en

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 21 / 210 Model B

Maintenance Manual
GFZ-62705EN/03 October 1997
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use. In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.
PowerMotion is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). CNC maintenance involves various dangers. CNC maintenance must be undertaken only by a qualified technician. Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder. Before checking the operation of the machine, take time to become familiar with the manuals provided by the machine tool builder and FANUC.
Contents
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s2 2. WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION . . s3 3. WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s4 4. WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s5 5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s6
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B62705EN/03
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the maintenance personnel (herein referred to as the user) and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s2
B62705EN/03
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION
WARNING
1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover removed
(1) The users clothing could become caught in the spindle or other components, thus presenting a danger of injury. When checking the operation, stand away from the machine to ensure that your clothing does not become tangled in the spindle or other components. (2) When checking the operation, perform idle operation without workpiece. When a workpiece is mounted in the machine, a malfunction could cause the workpiece to be dropped or destroy the tool tip, possibly scattering fragments throughout the area. This presents a serious danger of injury. Therefore, stand in a safe location when checking the operation.
2. When checking the machine operation with the power magnetics cabinet door opened
(1) The power magnetics cabinet has a highvoltage section (carrying a mark). Never touch the highvoltage section. The highvoltage section presents a severe risk of electric shock. Before starting any check of the operation, confirm that the cover is mounted on the highvoltage section. When the highvoltage section itself must be checked, note that touching a terminal presents a severe danger of electric shock. (2) Within the power magnetics cabinet, internal units present potentially injurious corners and projections. Be careful when working inside the power magnetics cabinet.
3. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 4. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 6. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
s3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B62705EN/03
WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO REPLACEMENT
WARNING
1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the power magnetics cabinet. If only the power to the CNC is turned off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section. In such a case, replacing a unit may damage the unit, while also presenting a danger of electric shock. 2. When a heavy unit is to be replaced, the task must be undertaken by two persons. If the replacement is attempted by only one person, the replacement unit could slip and fall, possibly causing injury. 3. After the power is turned off, the servo amplifier and spindle amplifier may retain voltages for a while, such that there is a danger of electric shock even while the amplifier is turned off. Allow at least twenty minutes after turning off the power for these residual voltages to dissipate. 4. When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same parameter and other settings as the old unit. (For details, refer to the manual provided with the machine.) Otherwise, unpredictable machine movement could damage the workpiece or the machine itself, and present a danger of injury.
s4
B62705EN/03
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO PARAMETERS
WARNING
1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close the machine cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after such a modification. Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using functions such as the single block function, feedrate override function, and machine lock function, or by operating the machine without mounting a tool and workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that it operates normally, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury. 2. The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so that those parameters usually need not be modified. When a parameter must be modified for some reason, ensure that you fully understand the function of that parameter before attempting to modify it. If a parameter is set incorrectly, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury.
s5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B62705EN/03
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. and When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked fitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied. If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators panel or CRT screen. When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNCs memory will be lost. To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.6 of this manual.
s6
B62705EN/03
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. and When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked fitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position. If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators panel or CRT screen. When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost. To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.6 of this manual.
s7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B62705EN/03
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits and fitted with an insulating cover). (marked Touching an uncovered highvoltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
s8
B62705EN/03
PREFACE
PREFACE
Description of this manual
This manual consists of following chapters. 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are related to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also provided at the end of this chapter. 2.HARDWARE This chapter covers hardwarerelated items, including the hardware configuration, connection, and NC status indicated on printed circuit boards. A list of all units is also provided as well as an explanation of how to replace each unit. 3.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA This chapter describes the input/output of data, including programs, parameters, and tool compensation data, as well as the input/output procedures for conversational data. 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system configuration, and the signals used by the PMC. 5.DIGITAL SERVO This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust the reference position return position. 6.AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) These chapters describe the spindle amplifier checkpoints, as well as the spindle tuning screen. 7.TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event of certain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot be turned on or if manual operation cannot be performed. Countermeasures to be applied in the event of alarms being output are also described. APPENDIX The appendix consists of a list of all alarms, a list of maintenance parts, and boot system. This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to the separate PARAMETER MANUAL (B62710EN) .
p1
PREFACE
B62705EN/03
Applicable models
Product Name FANUC Series 21MB 21 MB FANUC Series 210MB Control unit A TB FANUC Series 21 21TB Control unit B FANUC Series 210TB Control unit B
This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated names may be used.
Abbreviations 21MB 21MB 210MB 21TB (Control unit A) 21TB (Control unit B) 210TB Series 21 Series 21 Series 210 Series 21 Series 21 Series 210 T series Software series (Specification)
D201(A02B0179H800#D201)
M series DDA1(A02B0218H501#DDA1)
DDA1(A02B0218H501#DDA1) DE01(A02B0210H501#DE01) DE02(A02B0210H501#DE02) DEA1(A02B0219H501#DEA1) DEA1(A02B0219H501#DEA1)
NOTE Some function described in this manual may not be applied to some products. For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B62702EN).
Related manuals
The table below lists manuals related to MODEL B of Series 21, Series, Series 210. In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related Manuals
Manual name
DESCRIPTIONS CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) OPERATORS MANUAL FOR LATHE OPERATORS MANUAL FOR MACHINING CENTER MAINTENANCE MANUAL PARAMETER MANUAL MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTOR PROGRAMMING MANUAL FAPT MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer) PROGRAMMING MANUAL CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER OPERATORS MANUAL
Specification number
B62702EN B62703EN B62703EN1 B62534E B62704EN B62705EN B62710EN B61803E1 B66102E B61874E1
p2
B62705EN/03
Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p1 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 1.2 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Module Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Display of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deletion of External Operator Messages Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting The Input Signal or Output Signal to Be Recorded in The Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Diagnostic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
2
SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21 21 22 23 23
1.3
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4
24
24 24 25 25
1.4
ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4
27
27 27 27 27
1.5
EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4
28
28 28 29 29
1.6
OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 1.6.4 1.6.5
30
30 31 35 39 43
1.7
HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.1 1.7.2
44
44 44
1.8
DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.8.1 1.8.2
46
46 46
1.9 1.10
CNC STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.10.1 1.10.2 1.10.3 1.10.4 1.10.5 1.10.6 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic of Wave Diagnosis data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56 57
57 58 61 63 65 68
1.11
OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.1 1.11.2
69
69 70
1.12
LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
c1
Table of Contents
B62705EN/03
1.13 1.14 1.15
WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED (SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POWER MOTION MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.15.1 1.15.2 1.15.3 1.15.4 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keys Used for Operation on the SetUp Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Begin the SetUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to End the SetUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keys Used for Operation on the SetUp Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Begin the SetUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Details of the Setup Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to End the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76 78 79
79 80 87 89
1.16
BIOS SETUP OF THE MMCIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.16.1 1.16.2 1.16.3 1.16.4
90
90 90 91 95
1.17
BIOS SETUP OF INTELLIGENT TERMINALS 1 AND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.17.1 1.17.2 1.17.3 1.17.4 1.17.5
96
96 96 97 99 102
2. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2.1 2.2 GENERAL OF HANDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND LED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 Main PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option 1 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loader Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSSB Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.1 Parts layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.2 2.2.6.3 2.2.7 System block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104 106
106 113 116 117 118 120 120 121 121 122 123 123 129 132 137
2.2.6.4 LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMCIV PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.7.1 A02B0207C020, A02B0207C021, A02B0207C022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.7.2 A16B22030180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intelligent Terminal 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Unit P.C.B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Fuses for Power Supply of Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Fuses for New MMCIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Fuses for Intelligent Terminal 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Fuse for LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.8 2.2.9
2.3
LIST OF UNIT AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1 2.3.2
142
142 144
2.4
HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.1 2.4.2
146
146 146
2.5
REPLACING THE FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4
147
147 147 148 149
2.6
HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.1 2.6.2
150
150 152
c2
B62705EN/03
Table of Contents
2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5
Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder ( series servo amplifier module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Battery for New MMCIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Fan Motor for Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Fan for Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152 154 155
2.7
REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.1 2.7.2
156
156 157
2.8 2.9
REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT FOR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADJUSTING THE FLAT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.1 2.9.2 Adjusting the Color Liquid Crystal Display and Plasma Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Replace the Monochrome Liquid Crystal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158 161
161 162
2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13
MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.1 2.13.2 2.13.3 2.13.4 2.13.5 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163 166 168 170

170 171 172 173 174
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

3.1 3.2 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.2.10 3.2.11 3.2.12 3.2.13 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Input/OutputRelated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting and Outputting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting and Outputting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting and Outputting Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176 178
178 179 180 180 181 181 181 182 183 184 184 185 185
3.3
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6
186
187 188 192 193 194 195
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

4.1 4.2 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Builtin Debug Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Reserve Area of Internal Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Execution Period of PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201 202
202 203 204 216 217 218
c3
Table of Contents
B62705EN/03
4.3
PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMCLAD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMCDGN Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Display (M.SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMCPRM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
219 220 224 228 232
4.4
LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
237
5. DIGITAL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

5.1 5.2 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 5.2.2 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247 250
250 250
5.3 5.4
ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3
253
253
DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
255 255 256
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

6.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.1 Method A of Gear Change for Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.2 6.1.2 Method B of Gear Change for Machining Center(PRM 3705#2=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.3 For Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2.1 Display method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2.2 6.1.2.3 6.1.2.4 6.1.3 Spindle setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
258 259 259 259 260 260 260 261 263 265 267
6.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle tuning screen . . . . . . . Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1.1 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1.2 6.2.1.3 Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2.1
268
268 268 269 271
7. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
273
NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDLE OPERATION (MPG) CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO DISPLAY APPEARS AT POWERUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275 279 282 284 291 293
c4
B62705EN/03
Table of Contents
7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.22 7.23 7.24 7.25 7.26 7.27 7.28 7.29 7.30 7.31 7.32 7.33 7.34 7.35 7.36 7.37
ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 301 TO 305 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 306 TO 308 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 350 (SERIAL A PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 351 (SERIAL A PULSE CODER COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 410 (EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT DURING STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALRAM 411 (EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 414 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALRAM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 751, 761 (SPINDLE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 910 TO 913 (RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 920 AND 921 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 924 (SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 970 (NMI ALARM IN PMC CONTROL MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 971 (NMI ALARM IN SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM BY UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
294 300 302 303 304 305 306 307 309 310 312 313 315 316 317 318 319 320 322 323 324 325 326 328 329 330 331 332 333 334
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
A.1 A.2 A.3 LIST OF ALARM CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 356 361
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 C. BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

C.1 C.2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTING AND EXITING FROM THE SYSTEM MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.1 Starting the System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369 370
370
c5
Table of Contents
B62705EN/03
C.2.2
Exiting from the System Monitor (Activating the CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a File from a Memory Card into Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen) . . . . Listing the Names of the Files Stored in Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen) . . . . . . . Deleting a File from Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputting a File, Stored in Flash Memory, to a Memory Card (SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen) . . . Backing up SRAM Data to a Memory Card and Subsequently Restoring Data from a Memory Card (SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a File from a Memory Card (MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
371
C.3
SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.3.1 C.3.2 C.3.3 C.3.4 C.3.5 C.3.6 C.3.7
372
372 374 375 376 378 380 381
C.4
ERROR MESSAGES AND CORRESPONDING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATORS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

D.1 D.2 D.3 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISTINCTION OF SUPPORTED CARD AND UNSUPPORTED CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.3.1 D.3.2 D.3.3 D.3.4 D.3.5 D.3.6 D.3.7 D.3.8 D.3.9 Standard of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kind of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method of Format of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Operation in Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Capacity of Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice when Flash Memory Card is Formatted with CardPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When Flash Memory Card Formatted with BOOT SYSTEM is Used with Each Company Device . . When Flash Memory Card Formatted with Each Company Device is Used with BOOT SYSTEM . . Names and Function of Memory Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnection of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure of Battery Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385 386 387

387 387 388 388 388 388 388 388 389
D.4
OPERATING OF MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.4.1 D.4.2
390
390 390
D.5
BATTERY CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.5.1 D.5.2 D.5.3
391
391 391 391
c6
B62705EN/03
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
DISPLAY AND OPERATION
This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function keys. The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 1.10 WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 57 1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED (SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 1.15 POWER MOTION MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 1.16 BIOS SETUP OF THE MMCIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 1.17 BIOS SETUP OF INTELLIGENT TERMINALS 1 AND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
B62705EN/03
1.1
FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS 1.1.1
Soft Keys
Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are described below:
To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations. The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing each function key.
The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below : : : Indicates screens Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a function key(*1) Indicates a soft key(*2)
[ ( [
] ) ]
Indicates input from the MDI panel.
Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).
Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key)(*3).
*1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently. *2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option configuration. *3 In some cases, the continuous menu key is omitted when the 12 soft keys type is used.
B62705EN/03
POSITION SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
POS
POS
1.
Absolute coordinate display
[ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] [EXEC]
Relative coordinate display

[REL] [(OPRT)]
(Axis or numeral) [ORIGIN]

[PTSPRE] [RUNPRE]
[PRESET]
[ALLEXE] (Axis name) [EXEC] [EXEC] [EXEC]
Current position display

[ALL] [(OPRT)]
(Axis or numeral) [ORIGIN]

[PTSPRE] [RUNPRE]
[PRESET]
[ALLEXE] (Axis name) [EXEC] [EXEC] [EXEC]
Handle interruption
[HNDL] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] [EXEC]
Monitor screen [MONI] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] [EXEC]
B62705EN/03
PROGRAM SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key in the MEM mode
PROG
1/2
PROG
2.
Program display screen [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] (O number) (N number) [REWIND] [P TYPE] [Q TYPE] [F SRH] [CAN] (N number)
See When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed

[O SRH] [N SRH]
(1)
[EXEC]
Program check display screen [CHECK] [ABS] [REL] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] (O number) (N number) [REWIND] [P TYPE] [Q TYPE] [F SRH] [CAN] (N number)

[O SRH] [N SRH]
[EXEC]
Current block display screen [CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT]
Next block display screen [NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT]
Program restart display screen [RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT]
(2)(Continued on the next page)
B62705EN/03
2/2
(2)
[FL.SDL]
[PRGRM]
Return to (1) (Program display)
File directory display screen [DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] (File No. ) [EXEC] [F SET]
Schedule operation display screen [SCHDUL] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] [INPUT]
(Schedule data)
B62705EN/03
PROGRAM SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key in the EDIT mode
PROG
1/2
PROG
3.
Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] (O number) (Address) (Address) [REWIND]

[O SRH] [SRH] [SRH]
[F SRH] [READ]
[PUNCH]
[DELETE] [EXEDT]
[CAN] (N number) [EXEC] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.) [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [CAN] [EXEC] (N number) [COPY] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC] [CRSR] [BTTM] [ALL] [MOVE] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC] [CRSR] [BTTM] [ALL] [MERGE] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC] [BTTM] [CHANGE] (Address) (Address) [BEFORE] [AFTER] [SKIP] [1EXEC] [EXEC]
B62705EN/03
2/2
(1)
Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] (O number)

[O SRH] Return to the program
[READ]
[PUNCH]
[CHAIN] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [STOP] [CAN] (O number)
[EXEC]
[EXEC]
Floppy directory display [FLOPPY]
Return to the program [PRGRM] [DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [CAN] [EXEC] [READ] (Numeral) (Numeral) [STOP] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] (Numeral) (Numeral) [STOP] [CAN] [EXEC] [DELETE] (Numeral) [CAN] [EXEC]
[F SET]
[F SET] [O SET]
[F SET] [O SET]
[F SET]
B62705EN/03
PROGRAM SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key in the MDI mode
PROG
PROG
4.
Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT]
Program input screen [MDI] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] [START] (Address) (Address) [REWIND]

[CAN] [EXEC] [SRH] [SRH]
See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed"
B62705EN/03
PROGRAM SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode
PROG
5.
PROG
Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT]
PROGRAM SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key in the TJOG or THDL mode
PROG
PROG
6.
Program input screen [MDI] [(OPRT)] [BGEDT] (O number) (Address) (Address) [REWIND]

[O SRH] [SRH] [SRH] Return to the program

[O SRH] Return to the program
B62705EN/03
PROGRAM SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key (When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed in all modes) 1/2
PROG
PROG
7.
Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BGEND] (O number) (Address) (Address) [REWIND]
[O SRH] [SRH] [SRH]
[F SRH] [READ]
[PUNCH]
[DELETE] [EXEDT]
[CAN] (N number) [EXEC] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.) [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [CAN] [EXEC] (N number) [COPY] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC] [CRSR] [BTTM] [ALL] [MOVE] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC] [CRSR] [BTTM] [ALL] [MERGE] [CRSR] (O number) [EXEC] [BTTM] [CHANGE] (Address) (Address) [BEFORE] [AFTER] [SKIP] [1EXEC] [EXEC]
10
B62705EN/03
2/2
(1)
[O SRH]
Return to the program
[READ]
[PUNCH]
[CHAIN] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [STOP] [CAN] (O number)
[EXEC]
[EXEC]
Floppy directory display [FLOPPY] [PRGRM] [DIR]
Return to the program

[(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [CAN] [EXEC] (Numeral) (Numeral) [STOP] [CAN] [EXEC] (Numeral) (Numeral) [STOP] [CAN] [EXEC] (Numeral) [CAN] [EXEC] [F SET]
[READ]
[F SET] [O SET]
[PUNCH]
[F SET] [O SET]
[DELETE]
[F SET]
11
B62705EN/03
OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (T series)

OFFSET SETTING
1/2
OFFSET SETTING
8.
Tool offset screen [OFFSET] [WEAR] [GEOM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name and numeral) [INP.C.] (Axis name) (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [CLEAR] [ALL] [WEAR] [GEOM] [CAN] [EXEC] [CAN] [EXEC]
[MEASUR]
[READ] [PUNCH]
Setting screen [SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) (Numeral) [NO SRH]
[+INPUT] [INPUT]
Workpiece coordinate system setting screen [WORK] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name and numeral) (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT]
[MEASUR]
Macro variables display screen [MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) (Axis name) (Numeral) [NO SRH] [INP.C.] [INPUT]
[PUNCH]
[CAN] [EXEC]
12
B62705EN/03
2/2
(1)
Pattern data input screen [MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT]
Software operators panel screen [OPR]
Tool life management setting screen [TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [CLEAR] (Numeral) [NO SRH] [CAN] [EXEC] [INPUT]
Y axis tool offset screen [OFST.2] [WEAR] [GEOM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name and numeral) [INP.C.] (Axis name) [+INPUT] (Numeral) (Numeral) [INPUT] [CLEAR] [ALL] [WEAR] [GEOM] [CAN] [EXEC] [CAN] [EXEC]
[MEASUR]
[READ] [PUNCH]
Workpiece shift screen [WK.SHFT] [(OPRT)] (Numeral) (Numeral) [+INPUT] [INPUT]
Chuck/tailstock barrier setting screen [BARRIER] [(OPRT)] (Numeral) (Numeral) [SET] [INPUT] [+INPUT]
B axis tool offset screen [OFST.B]
13
B62705EN/03
OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (M series)

OFFSET SETTING
OFFSET SETTING
1/2
9.
Tool offset screen [OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) (Axis name) (Numeral) (Numeral) [CLEAR] [NO SRH] [INP.C.] [+INPUT] [INPUT] [ALL] [WEAR] [GEOM] [CAN] [EXEC] [CAN] [EXEC]
[READ] [PUNCH]
Setting screen [SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) (Numeral) [NO SRH]
[+INPUT] [INPUT]
Workpiece coordinate system setting screen [WORK] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name and numeral) (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT]
[MEASUR]
Macro variables display screen [MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) (Axis name) (Numeral) [NO SRH] [INP.C.] [INPUT]
[PUNCH]
14
B62705EN/03
2/2
(1)
Pattern data input screen [MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT]
Software operators panel screen [OPR]
Tool life management setting screen [TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [CLEAR] (Numeral) [NO SRH] [CAN] [EXEC] [INPUT]
15
B62705EN/03
SYSTEM SCREEN
SYSTEM
1/3
SYSTEM
10.
Parameter screen [PARAM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) (Numeral) [NO SRH]
[+INPUT] [INPUT]
[READ]
[CAN] [EXEC] [CAN] [EXEC]
[PUNCH]
Diagnosis screen [DGNOS] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]
PMC screen [PMC] [PMCLAD] [SEARCH] [TOP] [BOTTOM] [SRCH] [WSRCH] [NSRCH]
[FSRCH] [ADRESS]/[SYMBOL] [TRIGER] [TRGON] [TRGOFF] [START]
[DUMP]
[SEARCH]
[WINDOW]
(1) (2) (Continued on the next page)
(3)
[DPARA]/[NDPARA] [TRGSRC] [INIT] [DIVIDE] [CANCEL] [DELETE] [SELECT] [WIDTH]
[BYTE] [WORD] [D.WORD]
16
B62705EN/03
(1)
(2)
(3) [DUMP] [SEARCH]
2/3
[PMCDGN]
[BYTE] [WORD] [D.WORD] [DRARA]/[NDPARA] [TITLE] [STATUS] [SEARCH] [ALARM] [TRACE] [T.DISP]/[TRCPRM] [EXEC] [TIMER] [COUNTR] [KEEPRL] [DATA]
[PMCPRM]
[SETTING] [STOP]/[RUN] [I/O]
[G.DATA] [C.DATA] [G.CONT] [GSRCH] [SEARCH] [NO.SRH] [INIT] [YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM] [NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM]
[EXEC] [CANCEL] (No.)
[SPEED] [MDI]/[ROM]
[INPUT] [INIT]
System configuration screen [SYSTEM]
Pitch error compensation screen [PITCH] [(OPRT)] (No.) [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) (Numeral) [NO SRH]
[+INPUT] [INPUT]
[READ]
[CAN] [EXEC] [CAN] [EXEC]
[PUNCH]
(4) (Continued on the next page)
17
B62705EN/03
(4)
3/3
Servo parameter screen [SV.PRM] [SV.SET] [SV.TUN] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [TRACE] [TRNSF]
[(OPRT)]
[INPUT]
[SV.TRC]
[(OPRT)]
Spindle parameter screen [SP.PRM] [SP.SET] [SP.TUN] [SP.MON] [ON:1] [OFF:0] [INPUT]
[(OPRT)]
Waveform diagnosis screen [W.DGNS] [W.PRM] [W.GRPH]
[START] [TIME] [TIME] [HDOBL] [HHALF]
[START] [CH1] [CH1] [VDOBL] [VHALF]
[START] [CH2] [CH2] [VDOBL] [VHALF]
18
B62705EN/03
MESSAGE SCREEN
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
11.
Alarm display screen [ALARM]
Message display screen [MSG]
Alarm history screen [HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR]
HELP SCREEN
HELP
HELP
12.
Alarm detail screen [ALARM] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]
Operation method screen [OPERAT] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]
Parameter table screen [PARAM]
19
B62705EN/03
GRAPHIC SCREEN (T series)
GRAPH
Tool path graphics
Mode 0
GRAPH
13.
Tool path graphics [G.PRM] [GRAPH] [ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [(OPRT)] [(OPRT)] [NORMAL] [ERASE] [ACT] [HI/LO]
GRAPHIC SCREEN (M series)
GRAPH
Tool path graphics GRAPH
Tool path graphics [PARAM] [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [AUTO] [STSRT] [STOP] [REWIND] [CLEAR] [EXEC] [] [] [] []
[ZOOM]
[(OPRT)]
[POS]
20
B62705EN/03
1.2
SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON 1.2.1
Loading of Software
Series 21 stores the following software in FLASHROM. (1) CNC control software (2) Macro executer software (3) Digital servo software (4) PMC control software When a Series 21 unit that uses A16B22010721 as its main board is used, software (1) above is first loaded into DRAM for execution at powerup. When a Series 21/210 unit that uses A16B22020900 as its main board is used, software (1) is executed in the flash ROM, so that the screen display begins from the slot status display described in Section 1.2.3. In the Series 21, which uses the A16B32000020 main board, (1) is executed on the EPROM. The screens of Section 1.2.4 and subsequent sections are displayed immediately after the power is turned on.
Loading screen to DRAM
LOADING BASIC TO DRAM.
Blink character
1.2.2
System Monitor Screen
When the software is loaded in DRAM, data in FLASHROM is checked and if trouble occurs, the System monitor screen is displayed. If the System monitor screen is displayed, FLASHROM module or main board may be faulty. For details of the system monitor screen, see Appendix C, Boot System.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. SYSTEM DATA LOADING SYSTEM DATA CHECK SYSTEM DATA DELETE SYSTEM DATA SAVE SRAM DATA BACKUP MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE NENORY CARD FORMAT
9. END ***MESSAGE*** SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY [SELECT] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]
21
B62705EN/03
1.2.3
Slot Status Display
D Slot state screen
Types of PCBs mounted on the slots are displayed. If a hardware trouble or an incorrect mounting is found, this screen is displayed.
SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY 0: 01B34000 1: 30464202 2: 00504303 3: 4: 5: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5:
Physical slot number (2ndary side) Module ID of the PCB mounted (*1) Physical slot number (primary side) *1) Module ID of PCB ff j j Internal slot number Module function (software ID) Type of PCB (module ID)
D Module ID
ID
B3 B5 94 AA 3F 82 _
Name
21MB (DDA1 series)/210MB main P.C.B.(A16B22010721) 21TB (control unit B)/210TB P.C.B.(A16B22020900) Loader control board MMCIV P.C.B. HSSB interface board Option 1 board (for remote buffer) 21MB (D201 series) main P.C.B. 21TB (control unit A main P.C.B. (A16B32000020))
D Software ID
40 5E 4A 53
: : : :
Main P.C.B. MMCIV (HSSB interface) Remote buffer Loader control
22
B62705EN/03
1.2.4
Setting Module Screen
DDA101
SLOT 01 (01B3) : END SLOT 02 (0050) :
END : Setting completed Space : Setting incompleted Module ID Slot number
1.2.5
Configuration Display of Software
DDA101
SERVO : 906025 OMM : yyyyyy PMC : zzzzzz
CNC control software Digital servo ROM
Order made macro/macro compiler PMC
23
B62705EN/03
1.3
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN 1.3.1
Display Method
After the system has been installed correctly, you can find the PCBs installed and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen.
(1) Press
SYSTEM
key.
(2) Press soft key [SYSTEM], then the system configuration screen is displayed. (3) The system configuration screen is composed of three screens and each of them can be selected by the page key
PAGE PAGE
1.3.2
Configuration of PCBs
D Screen
Software series of module with CPU
SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) SLOT MODULE ID 00 01B3 : 40 08 1194 : 5E SERIES DDA1 VERSION 0006
PAGE01
Software version of module with CPU
Software ID (type)
Module ID Slot No. (80 to 8F is 2nd side)
D Module ID
ID
B3 B5 94 AA 3F 82 _
Name
21MB (DDA1 series)/210MB main P.C.B.(A16B22010721) 21TB (control unit B)/210TB main P.C.B.(A16B22020900) Loader control board MMCIV P.C.B. HSSB interface board Option 1 board (for remote buffer) 21MB (D201 series) main P.C.B. 21TB (control unit A main P.C.B. (A16B32000020))
D Software ID
40 5E 4A 53
: : : :
Main P.C.B. MMCIV (HSSB interface) Remote buffer Loader control

24
B62705EN/03
1.3.3
Software Configuration Screen
SYSTEM CONFIG(SOFTWARE) SYSTEM DDA1 0001 BASIC 9060 4084 I/OB BBBB 600L 60M2 0001 0001 0001 bbbb 0001 0001
Kind of software Software series
Software version Software configuration
SERVO PMC LADDER MACRO GRAPHIC BOOT
Character written on PMC title screen
Character written on macro compiler and on CAP.
1.3.4
Module Configuration Screen
Configuration of the modules displayed on PCB.

(1)
SYSTEM CONFIG(MODULE) SLOT 00 MAIN CPU BOARD FLASH ROM MODULE SPINDLE LSI & SRAM MATRIX DI/DO PMC MODULE CRTC MODULE SERVO AXIS MODULE HSKIP DI & ANALOG I/O GRAPHIC MODULE
(2)
: : : : : : : :
2MB POS+512KB PMP+SLC 9ICRT 1/2 +3/4 MOUNTED MOUNTED

(3)
(4)
EDIT **** *** *** 16:53:44 [ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][
Contents of display (1) Slot number (The number is corresponding to PCB configuration screen) (2) Type of PCB mounted (3) Type of mounted module or hardware (4) Mounted or not, or type of module Pressing the PAGE key displays the system configuration screen of other PCBs. NOTE The displayed information varies with the model and software series.
25
B62705EN/03
Screen for 21TB (control unit A)

SYSTEM CONFIG (HARDWARE) MAIN BOARD FROM RAM PMC CRTC SERVO 1/2 SERVO 3/4 SIC DI/DO TYPEA 256KB 512KB BIT+SLC 9CRT MOUNTED MOUNTED MOUNTED 96/64
Mounted or not, or type of module
Hardware configuration
26
B62705EN/03
1.4
ALARM HISTORY SCREEN 1.4.1
General
Alarms generated in the NC are recorded. The latest 25 alarms generated are recorded. The 26th and former alarms are deleted.
1.4.2
Screen Display
(1) Press
MESSAGE
key .
(2) Press soft key [HISTRY] and an alarm history screen is displayed. (3) Other pages are displayed by
ALARM HISTORY
PAGE
or
PAGE
key.
O1234 N12345
97/04/18 20:56:26 506 OVERTRAVEL : +X 97/04/18 19:58:11 000 TURN OFF POWER 97/04/18 19:52:45 000 TURN OFF POWER 97/04/18 19:48:43 300 APC ALARM : XAXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST 97/04/18 18:10:10 507 OVERTRAVEL : +B
[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTRY ][
][(OPRT)]
1.4.3
Clearing Alarm History
(1) Press soft key [(OPRT)]. (2) Press soft key [(CLEAR], then the alarm history is cleared.
1.4.4
Alarm Display
When an external alarm (No. 1000 to 1999) or a macro alarm (No. 3000 to 3999) is output, the alarm history function can record both the alarm number and message if so specified in the following parameter. If recording of the message is not set or if no message is input, only an external alarm or macro alarm is displayed.
#7 3112 #6 #5 #4 #3 EAH #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit #3 (EAH) The alarm history function: 0 : Does not record the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms. 1 : Records the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms.
27
B62705EN/03
1.5
EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD 1.5.1
Screen Display
This function enables the saving of external operator messages as a record. The record can be viewed on the external operator message history screen.
(1) Press the
MESSAGE
function key. .
PAGE
(2) Press the rightmost soft key (3) Press the [MSGHIS] soft key.
(4) To display the previous or subsequent screen, press the key.

MESSAGE HISTORY
Date, time, and page 97/04/01 17:25:00 Message number No. ****
PAGE
or
O1234 N12345 PAGE : 1
Display range
Up to 255 characters
MEM STRT MTN FIN ALM 17:25:00 [ ][ MSGHIS ][ ][
][
1.5.2
Deletion of External Operator Messages Record
(1) The recorded external operator message can be deleted by setting the MMC bit (bit 0 of parameter 3113) to 1. Pressing the [CLEAR] soft key erases all the records of the external operator message. (2) The MS1 and MS0 bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter 3113) specify the number of records to be displayed on the external operator message history screen. When the bits are changed, all external operator message records retained up to that point are erased.
28
B62705EN/03
1.5.3
Parameter
3113 #7 MS1 #6 MS0 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MHC
#0 (MHC) The records of an external operator message: 0 : Cannot be erased. 1 : Can be erased. #6, #7 (MS0,MS1) These bits set the number of characters to be retained in each record of an external operator message, as well as the number of records, as shown in the following table:
MS1
0 0 1 1
MS0
0 1 0 1
Number of characters in each record

255 200 100 50
Number of records
8 10 18 32
An external operator message of up to 255 characters can be specified. Combining the MS1 bit and MS0 bit (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No. 3113) selects the number of records by limiting the number of characters to be retained as the record of an external operator message.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 OMH #1 #0
3112
#2 (OMH) The external operator message history screen is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. NOTE After setting this parameter, briefly turn the power off, then on again.
1.5.4
Notes
When the number of an external operator message is specified, the system starts updating the records of the specified message. The system continues to perform update until another external operator message is specified or until an instruction to delete the records of the external operator message is specified.
29
B62705EN/03
1.6
OPERATION HISTORY
This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the operator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an alarm, together with the corresponding alarms. This function records the following data: (1) MDI key operations performed by the operator (2) Status changes (ON/OFF) of input and output signals (selected signals only) (3) Details of alarms (4) Time stamp (date and time)
1.6.1
Parameter Setting
3106 #7 OHS #6 #5 #4 OHD #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit OHD The operation history screen is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. NOTE For the system software of the following series, the operation history screen is always displayed, regardless of the setting of this parameter: 21TB (control unit A) 21MB: Software series D201 OHS Operation history sampling is: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed.
#7 3112 #6 #5 OPH #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit OPH Specifies whether the operation history function is to be enabled. Note that the usage of this parameter varies with the CNC model and system software series. Set the parameter according to the following table:
Model (software series) Value 0 1 21MB (series D201) Disabled Enabled 21MB 21TB 21TB (series DDA1) (control unit A) (control unit B) (series DEA1) Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
30
B62705EN/03
3122
Interval at which the clock time is recorded in the operation history
[Data type] Word [Units of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 0 to 1439 The clock time is recorded to the operation history at specified intervals. If zero is set as the interval, ten minutes is assumed. The time is recorded only when data is recorded within the corresponding interval.
1.6.2
Screen Display
D Displaying the operation history (1) Press the
SYSTEM
function key. ]. The [OPEHIS] [(OPRT)] soft key
(2) Press the continue menu key [ are displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice. The operation history screen is displayed.
OPERATION HISTORY No.DATA 01 97/06/03 02 08:40:00 03 <DELETE> 04 F0000.6 05 MEM 06 G0009.0 07 G0009.1 08 G0009.2 09 ST 10 ST No.DATA 11 F0000.7 12 F0000.5 13 F0001.0 14 F0000.5 15 P/S0010 16 97/06/03 17 09:27:49 18 <PROG> 19 <RESET> 20 F0000.7 O1234 N12345 Page : 123 No.DATA 21 F0001.0 22 <POS> 23 <PROG> 24 <RESET> 25 EDIT 26 O 27 1 28 2 29 3 30 4 08:20:52 ][PG.SRH]
EDIT **** *** *** [ TOP ][ BOTTOM ][
][
On the operation history screen, the soft keys are configured as shown below:
[ [ [ [ ] [ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [ SYSTEM ] [ (OPE) ] [ ] push ] [ W.DGNS ] [ ] [ ] [ OPEHIS ] [ (OPE) ] [ ] push ] [ OPEHIS ] [ SGSEL ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPE) ] [ ] push ] [ TOP ] [ BOTTOM ] [ ] [ ] [ PG.SRH ] [ ] 31
B62705EN/03
(4) To display the next part of the operation history, press the page down
PAGE
key
. The next page is displayed. or
To display the interface between two pages, press cursor key
. The screen is scrolled by one row. On a display unit with 12 soft keys, pressing the cursor key scrolls the screen by half a page. These soft keys can also be used: 1) Pressing the [TOP] soft key displays the first page (oldest data). 2) Pressing the [BOTTOM] soft key displays the last page (latest data). 3) Pressing the [PG.SRH] soft key displays a specified page. Example) By entering 50 then pressing the [PG.SRH] key, page 50 is displayed. Data displayed on the operation history screen (1) MDI keys Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space. Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([ ]). Other keys (RESET/INPUT, for example) are displayed in angle brackets (< >). A key pressed at poweron is displayed in reverse video. 1) Function key: <POS>, <PROG>, <OFFSET>, etc. 2) Address/numeric key: A to Z, 0 to 9, ; (EOB), +, , (, etc. 3) Page/cursor key: <PAGE >, <CUR >, <CUR > 4) Soft key: [SF1], [SF2], etc. 5) Other key: <RESET>, <CAN>, etc. 6) Key pressed at poweron: <RESET> (2) Input and output signals
General signals are displayed in the following format: G0000.7
The mark indicates that the signal is turned on. The mark indicates that the signal is turned off. Indicates the bit. Indicates the address.
Some signals are indicated by their symbol names. SBK (Indicates that the single block switch is turned on.)
32
B62705EN/03
Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signals are displayed as indicated below:
Input signal MD1
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
ND2
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
MD4
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
REF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
DNC1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Name displayed
MDI MEM RMT NOMODE EDT H/INC JOG REF TJOG THND
Input signal ROV1

0 1 0 1
ROV2
0 0 1 1
Name displayed
R R R R 100% 50% 25% F0%
(3) NC alarms NC alarms are displayed in reverse video. P/S alarms, system alarms, and external alarms are displayed together with their numbers. For other types of alarms, only the alarm type is displayed. (No details are displayed.) Example) P/S0050, SV_ALM, S_APC_ALM (4) Time stamp (date and time) The following time data (date and time) is recorded: 1) Date and time of poweron 2) Date and time of poweroff 3) Date and time when an NC alarm occurs 4) The clock time is recorded at predetermined intervals, together with each new calendar day. 1) The poweron time is displayed as shown below: 97/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day 09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second 2) The poweroff time and the time when an NC alarm occurred are displayed in reverse video. 97/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day 09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second If a system alarm occurs, the date and time are not recorded.
33
B62705EN/03
3) At predetermined intervals, the clock time is displayed in reverse video. Set the interval in minutes in parameter No. 3122. If zero is set, the time is stamped at tenminute intervals. 09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second Each new calendar day is displayed in reverse video. 97/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day NOTE The clock time is recorded for a specified interval only when data is stored within that interval. D Input signal or output signal to be recorded in the operation history
(1) P ress the
SYSTEM
function key.
. The [OPEHIS] (operation (2) Press the continuous menu key history) soft key is displayed. (3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key, then press the [SGSEL] soft key. The operation history signal selection screen is displayed.
OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT No. ADDRES SIGNAL 01 X0000 00001000 02 X0004 10000000 03 X0008 00001100 04 X0009 00111000 05 X0012 00001111 06 Y0000 01000000 07 Y0004 00110000 08 Y0007 00011100 09 Y0008 00011100 10 Y0010 00011100 > EDIT **** *** * * * [OPEHIS] [SGSEL] [ No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 O1000 N02000 ADDRES G0000 G0004 G0008 G0003 G0043 SIGNAL 00000001 00000011 00000111 00001111 01100000 ******** ******** ******** ******** ********
00:00:00 ] [ ] [ (OPE) ]
34
B62705EN/03
1.6.3
Setting the Input Signal or Output Signal to be Recorded in the Operation History
(1) On the operation history signal selection screen, press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT No. ADDRES SIGNAL 01 G0004 00000010 02 ******** 03 ******** 04 ******** 05 ******** 06 ******** 07 ******** 08 ******** 09 ******** 10 ******** > EDIT **** *** *** [ ALLDEL ][ DELETE ][ No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 O1000 N02000 ADDRES SIGNAL ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ******** ********
*** 00:00:00 ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][
(2) Press the cursor key position.
or
to position the cursor to a desired
(3) Key in a signal type (X, G, F, or Y) and an address, then press the key. Example) G0004
INPUT
INPUT
Signal address G0004 is set in the ADDRES column. The corresponding position in the SIGNAL column is initialized to 000000000. (4) Select the bit to be recorded. To select all bits of the specified signal address, press the [ON:1] soft key while the cursor is positioned to 00000000 . To select a particular bit, position the cursor to that bit by pressing the cursor key or , then press the [ON:1] soft key. To cancel a selection made by pressing the [ON:1] soft key or to cancel a previously selected signal, press the [OFF:0] soft key. (5) Up to 20 addresses can be specified by means of this signal selection. These addresses need not always be specified at consecutive positions, starting from No.1. (6) Pressing the [ALLDEL] and [EXEC] soft keys deletes all data. If the [ALLDEL] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by pressing the [CAN] key. (7) To delete a selected signal address, position the cursor to the corresponding position then press the [DELETE] and [EXEC] soft keys. In the SIGNAL column, asterisks ******** are displayed in place of the deleted data. In the ADDRES column, the corresponding position is cleared. If the [DELET] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by pressing the [CAN] key.
35
B62705EN/03
(8) Pressing the return menu key key to be displayed again. D Input signals and output signals to be recorded in the history
causes the [OPEHIS] (OPE) soft
NOTE 1 A cross () indicates that a signal will not be recorded. Also, any signal for which an address is not specified will not be recorded, either. 2 A circle (f) indicates that a signal can be recorded. 3 A signal indicated by its symbol name will also be displayed by its symbol name. 1. M/T addresses MTPMC
X000 to X127 f f f f f f f f #7 f #6 f #5 f #4 f #3 f #2 f #1 f #0 f
PMCCNC
G000 to G003 G004 G005 G006 G007 G008 G009 to G013 G014 G015 to G018 G019 f RT f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f RLSOT ERS f f f f f EXLM RRW f f f f f *FLUP *SP f f f f f f *ESP f f FIN TFIN f f f f f f SFIN *ABS ST f f f f f f STLK f f f f MFIN SRN f *IT f #7 f #6 f #5 f #4 f #3 f #2 f #1 f #0 f
36
B62705EN/03
G020 to G042 G043 G044 G045 G046 G047 to G060 G061 G062 to G099 G100 G101 G102 G103 to G105 G106 G107 G108 G109 G110 G111 G112 G113 G114
#7 f f f f BDT9 DRN f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
#6 f f f BDT8 KEY4 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
#5 f f f f BDT7 KEY3 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
#4 f f f BDT6 KEY2 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
#3 f f f BDT5 KEY1 f f f f f +J4 f J4 f f MI4 f MLK4 f +LM4 f LM4 f *+L4
#2 f f f f BDT4 f f f f f f +J3 f J3 f f MI3 f MLK3 f +LM3 f LM3 f *+L3
#1 f f f MLK BDT3 SBK f f f f f +J2 f J2 f f MI2 f MLK2 f +LM2 f LM2 f *+L2
#0 f f f BDT1 BDT2 f f f RGTA f f +J1 f J1 f f MI1 f MLK1 f +LM1 f LM1 f *+L1
37
B62705EN/03
G115 G116 G117 G118 G119 G120 G121 to G125 G126 G127 to G129 G130 G131 G132 G133 G134 G135 to G255
#7 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
#3 f *L4 f *+ED4 f *ED4 f f SVF4 f f *IT4 f +MIT4 f MIT4 f f
PMCMT
Y000 to Y127 f f f f f f f f #7 f #6 f #5 f #4 f #3 f #2 f #1 f #0 f
CNCPMC
F000 to F255 f f f f f f f f #7 f #6 f #5 f #4 f #3 f #2 f #1 f #0 f
38
B62705EN/03
1.6.4
Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data
Recorded data can be output to an input/output unit connected via a reader/punch interface. An output record can be input from the input/output unit. Set the input/output unit to be used in setting parameters No. 0020 and 0100 to 0135. To output the data, set a code in the ISO bit of a setting parameter (bit 1 of parameter No. 0020). (1) Select EDIT mode. (2) Press the
SYSTEM
D Output
key, then select the operation history display screen. , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] in this
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], order.
The data output to the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FANUC FA Card is stored under file name OPERATION HISTORY. D Input (1) Select EDIT mode. (2) Press the
SYSTEM
key, then select the operation history display screen. , [READ], and [EXEC] in this
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], order. D Output data format 1. MDI/soft key 2. Signal 3. Alarm 4. For extension (date or time)
The header and recorded operation data are output, in this order. The operation history data is divided into four parts by identifier words. Data other than the identifier words depends on the type.
T(identifier word) T0 T50 T51 T52 T53 : : : : : Header MDI/soft key Signal Alarm For extension (date or time)
39
B62705EN/03
1) Header
T 0 C O P E R A T I O N
C: Data word
2) MDI/soft key
T 5 0 P 0 to 1 H * * ;
P0: Usually P1: At poweron H **: Key code (See the following table.)
3) Signal
T 5 1 P 0 to 6 N 0 to 255 H * * , * * ;
P0: P2: P4: P6: N***: H **:
X0000 and above G0000 and above Y0000 and above F0000 and above DI/DO number Signal information data (hexadecimal)
New data
Old data
4) Alarm
T 5 2 P 0 to 10 N * * * * ;
P0: P/S No. 100 P1: P/S No. 000 P2: P/S No. 101 P3: P/S No. 0001 to 254 P4: Overtravel alarm P5: Overheat alarm P6: Servo alarm P7: System alarm P8: APC alarm P9: Spindle alarm P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999 P15: External alarm N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm, system alarm, and external alarm only)
5) For extension (date or time)

Date T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 0 D * * * * * * * * ;
Time
0 to 1
P0: P1: E0: E1: D*..*:
Usually At poweron Date Time Data Example) October 29, 1997

D 1 9 9 7 1 0 2 9
40
B62705EN/03
Key codes (MDI/soft key) (00H to 7FH)

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ; (EOB)
2
Space ! # $ % & ( ) * + . / < = > ? 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 :
3
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
4
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ ]
41
B62705EN/03
(80H to FFH)
8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Cur *2 Cur *2 Cur *2 Cur *2 Help *2 Input *2
POS *2 PROG *2 OFFSET SETTING *2 SYSTEM *2 MESSAGE *2 CUSTOM GRAPH *1, *2
9
Reset *2 MMC *2 CNC *2
F
F0 *2 F1 *2 F2 *2 F3 *2
Shift
Insert *2 Delete *2
F4 *2 F5 *2 F6 *2 F7 *2 F8 *2 F9 *2
CAN
Alter *2
B C D
E F
Page *2 Page *2
CUSTOM *2
FR *2 FL *2
*1:On the smallsized keypad, ED corresponds to the standard keyboard, ED corresponds to the
CUSTOM
CUSTOM GRAPH
key. On a
GRAPH
key and EE to the
key.
*2:Command key
42
B62705EN/03
1.6.5
Notes
(1) While the operation history screen is displayed, no information can be recorded to the history. (2) An input signal having an on/off width of up to 16 msec is not recorded in the history. Some signals are not recorded in the history. See Appendix A. (3) Once the storage becomes full, old data is deleted, starting from the oldest record. Up to about 8000 key information items can be recorded. (4) The recorded data is retained even after the power is turned off. A memory all clear operation, however, erases the recorded data. (5) The operation history function cannot execute sampling when the OHS bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 3106) is set to 1. (6) Set the date and time on the setting screen. (7) The time needed to input and output 6000 operation records at a rate of 4800 baud is as follows: Output : About 5 minutes Input : About 2 minutes and 30 seconds This file corresponds to a paper tape of about 180 m in length.
43
B62705EN/03
1.7
HELP FUNCTION 1.7.1
General
The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook.
1.7.2
Display Method
D Display of help screen Press
HELP
key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen
appears. (However, it is not available when PMC screen/CUSTOM screen is displaying)

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345
***** HELP ***** 1. ALARM DETAIL 2. OPERATION METHOD 3. PARAMETER TABLE
[ALARM]
[OPERAT]
[PARAM]
D Help for alarm
(1) When an alarm is generated, press soft key [ALARM], then a help message of the alarm is displayed.
HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345
NUMBER : 010 MSAGE : IMPROPER G CODE FUNCTION : ALARM : A G CODE NOT LISTED IN GCODE TABLE IS BEING COMMANDED ALSO GCODE FOR FUNCTION NOT ADDED IS BEING COMMANDED
[ALARM]
[OPERAT]
[PARAM] [
] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Pressing soft key [OPERAT],(alarm No.), and soft key [SELECT] in this order, a help message corresponding to the input alarm number is displayed.
44
B62705EN/03
D Help for operation
(1) Press [OPERAT], then a menu for operation method is displayed.

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. PROGRAM EDIT SEARCH RESET DATA INPUT WITH MDI DATA INPUT WITH TAPE OUTPUT INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE MEMORY CLEAR O1234 N12345
[ALARM] [OPRERAT]
[PARAM] [
[(OPRT)]
(2) Press [OPERAT], (an item number) and soft key [SELECT], then an operation method of the item is displayed. Pressing PAGE key
PAGE
or
PAGE
displays another pages.

O1234 N12345 1/4
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) <<1.PROGRAM EDIT>> DELETE ALL PROGRAMS MODE :EDIT SCREEN :PROGRAM OPR :(09999) (DELETE)
Current page/ Total page
DELETE ONE PROGRAM MODE : EDIT SCREEN : PROGRAM OPR :(0+PROGRAM NUMBER) <DELETE>
[SELECT]
D Parameter table
Press soft key [PARAM], then a parameter table is displayed.

HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) SETTING READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT COORDINATE SYSTEM STROKE LIMIT FEED RATE ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL SERVO RELATED DI/DO O1234 N12345 1/4 (NO.0000~ ) (NO.0100~ ) (NO.1000~ ) (NO.1200~ ) (NO.1300~ ) (NO.1400~ ) (NO.1600~ ) (NO.1800~ ) (NO.3000~ )
Current page/ Total page
[ ALARM ] [OPERAT][ PARAM ] [
][SELECT]
Another screen can be selected by the PAGE key
PAGE
or
PAGE
45
B62705EN/03
1.8
DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE 1.8.1
Displaying Diagnostic Page
(1) Press
SYSTEM
key.
(2) Press soft key [DGNOS], then a diagnostic screen is displayed.
1.8.2
Contents Displayed
D Causes when the machine does not travel in spite of giving a command
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL An auxiliary function is being executed. 001 MOTION Travel command of cycle operation is being executed. 002 DWELL DWELL Dwell is being executed. 003 INPOSITION CHECK Inposition check is being done. 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%. 005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK Interlock or start lock is input. 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK Waiting for spindle speed arrival signal. 010 PUNCHING Data is being output through reader/puncher interface. 011 READING Data is being input through reader/puncher interface. 012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP Waiting for the end of index table indexing 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Manual feedrate override is 0%. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP,RRW OFF NC is in reset state. 015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH External Program Number Search External program number search is being done 016 BACKGROUND ACTIVE Background is being used.
46
B62705EN/03
D Cause of the cycle start LED turned off
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 021 RESET BUTTON ON 022 RESET AND REWIND ON 023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 024 RESET ON 025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL
1 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
Input of emergency stop signal Input of external reset signal Reset button On of MDI Input of reset & rewind Servo alarm generation Switching to other mode, Feed hold Single block stop
D State of TH alarm
030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM Position of the character that caused TH alarm. The position is counted from the head. 031 TH DATA Data of the character that caused TH alarm.
#7 0202 #6 CSA #5 BLA #4 PHA #3 RCA #2 BZA #1 CKA #0 SPH
D Detail of serial pulse coder

DGN
#0(SPH): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty. Counting of feedback cable is erroneous. #1(CKA): Serial pulse coder is faulty. Internal block stopped. #2(BZA): Battery voltage became 0. Replace the battery and set the reference position. #3(RCA): Serial pulse coder is faulty. Counting of feedback cable is erroneous. #4(PHA): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is erroneous. #5(BLA): Battery voltage is low (warning) #6(CSA): Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal
#7 DTE #6 CRC #5 STB #4 PRM #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN
0203
#4(PRM): Parameter detected by the Digital servo is invalid. #5(STB): Communication failure of serial pulse coder. Transferred data is erroneous. #6(CRC): Communication failure of serial pulse coder. Transferred data is erroneous. #7(DTE): Communication failure of serial pulse coder. There is no response for communication.
47
B62705EN/03
D Details of digital servo alarm

DGN 0200
#7 OVL
#6 LV
#5 OVC
#4 HCA
#3 HVA
#2 DCA
#1 FBA
#0 OFA
#0(OFA): #1(FBA): #2(DCA): #3(HVA): #4(HCA): #5(OVC): #6(LV): #7(OVL):

DGN
Overflow alarm Disconnection alarm Discharge alarm Overvoltage alarm Abnormal current alarm Over current alarm Insufficient voltage alarm Overload alarm
#7 ALD #6 #5 #4 EXP #3 #2 #1 #0
0201
Overload alarm l Disconnection alarm l
0 1 1 1 0
0 1 0
Motor overheat Amplifier overheat Builtin pulse coder (hard) Disconnection of separated type pulse coder (hard) Disconnection of pulse coder (software)
#3 PMS #2 #1 #0
#7 DGN 0204
#6 OFS
#5 MCC
#4 LDA
#3(PMS): Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial pulse coder C or feedback cable. #4(LDA): Serial pulse coder LED is abnormal #5(MCC): Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted. #6(OFS): Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC. If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203) is set to 1.
#7 0280 #6 AXS #5 #4 DIR #3 PLS #2 PLC #1 #0 MOT
#0 (MOT): The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the predetermined range. #2 (PLC): The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid. #3 (PLS): The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in parameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid. #4 (DIR): The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No. 2022 (the value is other than 111 or 111). #6 (AXS): In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the parameter are not consecutive.
48
B62705EN/03
D Position error amount

DGN 0300 Position error= Position error of an axis in detection unit Feed rate [mm/min] 60 servo loop gain [1/sec] 1 Detection unit
D Machine position
DGN 0301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit
D Cause of the APZ bit (bit 4 of parameter 1815) brought to 0

DGN 310
#7
#6 DTH
#5 ALP
#4 NOF
#3 BZ2
#2 BZ1
#1 PR2
#0 PR1
#0(PR1): The setting of the following parameters has been changed: Parameters 1821, 1850, 1860, 1861. #1(PR2): The setting of the ATS bit (bit 1 of parameter 8302) has been changed. #2(BZ1): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (Inductosyn). #3(BZ2): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (separate position detector). #4(NOF): The Inductosyn output no offset data. #5(ALP): Before the pulse coder detects a full single rotation, reference position establishment by parameters was attempted. #6(DTH): A controlled axis detach signal/parameter was input.
#7 DGN 311 #6 DUA #5 XBZ #4 GSG #3 AL4 #2 AL3 #1 AL2 #0 AL1
#0(AL1): An APC alarm was issued. #1(AL2): A disconnection was detected. #2(AL3): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial pulse coder). #3(AL4): An abnormal rotation speed (RCAL) was detected. #4(GSG): The G202 signal was brought from 0 to 1. #5(XBZ): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial separate position detector). #6(DUA): While the dual position feedback function was being used, the difference in error between the semiclosed loop side and the closed loop side became too large. D Diagnostic data related to the Inductosyn absolute position detector
DGN
380
Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data
[Data type] Twoword axis [Units of data] Detection units

M (absolute position of the motor) S (offset data) (pitch interval)
The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.

49
B62705EN/03
DGN
381
Offset data from the Inductosyn
[Data type] Twoword axis [Units of data] Detection units Offset data is displayed when CNC calculates the machine position. D Serial spindle
#7 DGN 0400 #6 #5 #4 SAI #3 SS2 #2 SSR #1 POS #0 SIC
#0 (SIC) A module required for spindle serial control is 0 : not mounted 1 : mounted #1 (POS) A module required for spindle analog control is 0 : not mounted 1 : mounted #2(SSR) 0 : Spindle serial control is not performed. 1 : Spindle serial control is performed. #3(SS2) 0 : Spindle serial doesnt control 2nd spindle. 1 : Spindle serial control 2nd spindle. #4(SAI) 0 : Spindle analog control is not used. 1 : Spindle analog control is used.
DGN DGN 0401 0402 Serial spindle alarm state of 1st spindle Serial spindle alarm state of 2nd spindle
DGN
0408
#7 SSA
#6
#5 SCA
#4 CME
#3 CER
#2 SNE
#1 FRE
#0 CRE
#0 (CRE): A CRC error occurred. (Warning) #1 (FRE): A framing error occurred. (Warning) #2 (SNE): The transmission/reception target is invalid. #3 (CER): An error occurred during reception. #4 (CME): No response was returned during automatic scanning. #5 (SCA): A communication alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side. #7 (SSA): A system alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side. (These problems cause spindle alarm 749. Such problems are mainly caused by noise, disconnection, or instantaneous poweroff).
50
B62705EN/03
#7 DGN 0409
#6
#5
#4
#3 SPE
#2 S2E
#1 S1E
#0 SHE
Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated. #0 (SHE) 0 : Serial communication module is correct on CNC side. 1 : An error occurred in serial communication module on CNC side #1 (S1E) 0 : 1st spindle started normally in spindle serial control. 1 : 1st spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control. #2 (S2E) 0 : 2nd spindle started normally in spindle serial control. 1 : 2nd spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control. #3 (SPE) In spindle serial control serial spindle parameters 0 : Satisfy start condition of spindle unit 1 : Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit
DGN DGN DGN DGN DGN DGN DGN DGN DGN DGN DGN 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 0420 Load meter of 1st spindle [%] Speed meter of 1st spindle [%] Load meter of 2nd spindle [%] Speed meter of 2nd spindle [%] Position error in 1st spindle synchronous control mode Position error in 2nd spindle synchronous control mode
Absolute value of synchronization error between 1st and 2nd spindles
Feedback information of 1st spindle position coder Position error of 1st spindle position loop mode Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coder Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coder
D Diagnostic data related to rigid tapping

DGN 450 Spindle position error during rigid tapping
[Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection units

DGN 451 Spindle distribution during rigid tapping
51
B62705EN/03
DGN
454
Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping
[Data type] Twoword [Unit of data] Detection units

DGN 455 Instantaneous difference for the move command, calculated in terms of the spindle, during rigid tapping (signed, accumulated value)
[Data type] Twoword [Unit of data] Detection units

DGN 456 Instantaneous difference for the travel error, calculated in terms of the spindle, during rigid tapping (signed)

DGN 457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value)
[Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection units D State of remote buffer (protocol A)
DGN 0500 Send command
1: SYN 2: RDY 3: RST 4: ALM 5: SAT 6: GTD 7: RTY 8: SDI

DGN 0501 Receive command
1: SYN 2: RDY 3: ARS 4: AAL 5: CLB 6: SET 7: DAT 8: EOD 9: WAT 10: RTY 11:RDI 12: SDO
DGN 0502 State of remote buffer
0: 1: 2: 3: 4: D Open CNC
Not ready Reset state Operation state Alarm state Circuit disconnection
#7 DGN 510
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to general users).
52
B62705EN/03
#7 DGN 511
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to general users).
#7 PA1 #6 PA0 #5 BNK #4 #3 THH #2 THL #1 #0 PRA
DGN
512
This data indicates the cause of a system alarm that has occurred in Open CNC. #0(PRA) 1 : A RAM parity error occurred in shared RAM. #2(THL) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too low. 1 : Normal #3(THH) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too high. 1 : Normal #4 0 : Normal 1 : An NMI has occurred in HSSB.
#5(BNK) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1, 0 : An alarm occurred in the lower half of shared RAM. 1 : An alarm occurred in the upper half of shared RAM. #6 (PA0) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1, 1 : An alarm occurred at an evennumbered address. #7 (PA1) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1, 1 : An alarm occurred at an oddnumbered address. D Diagnostic data related to a smalldiameter peck drilling cycle (M series only)
DGN 520 Total number of retractions during cutting after G83 is specified
Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero.

DGN 521 Total number of retractions made by receiving the overload signal during cutting after G83 is specified
Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero.

DGN 522 Position on the drill axis from which retraction is started
The units are the same as the minimum input increment.

DGN 523 Difference between the position on the drill axis from which the previous retraction was started and the position from which the current retraction is started
The units are the same as the minimum input increment.

53
B62705EN/03
D Diagnostic data related to simple synchronous control

DGN 540 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchronas control Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchronas control
DGN
541
DGN 540 indicates the difference in the position error between the master and slave axes when a single axis pair is subjected to simple synchronous control. DGN 541 is used when two or more pairs are subjected to simple synchronous control. The position error is indicated for the master axis. DGN 540 and 541 indicate values in detection units. They are displayed only with the M series. D Diagnostic data related to the dual position feedback function
0550
Closed loop error
[Data type] 2word axis [Unit of data] Detection units [Valid data range] 99999999 to +99999999
0551 Semiclosed loop error
[Data type] 2word axis [Unit of data] Detection units [Valid data range] 99999999 to +99999999
0552 Error between semiclosed and closed loops
[Data type] word axis [Unit of data] Detection units [Valid data range] 32768 to +32767
0553 Amount of dual position compensation
[Data type] 2word axis [Unit of data] Detection units [Valid data range] 99999999 to +99999999 The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at the following positions:
54
B62705EN/03
Semiclosed loop error (No. 551)
Command
Motor + Ps Conversion coefficients Closed loop error (No. 550) + + Pf S + Error between semi closed and closed loops (No. 552) + (Parameters No. 2078 and 2079) Amount of dual position compensation (No. 553) S + + Kp + Speed control Servo amplifier Machine
Time constant (Parameter No. 2080)
55
B62705EN/03
1.9
CNC STATUS DISPLAY
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010
X Y Z
217.940 363.233 0.000

PART COUNT CYCLE TIME S *** [ ALL ] 09:06:35 [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ] 0H 0 5 0M38S T0000
RUN TIME 0H15M ACT.F 3000MM/M MEM [ ABS ] STRT MTN
[ REL ]
MEM STRT MTN ***
ALM/BAT (Alarm state/ Low battery) FIN (Waiting for auxiliary funciton finish) MTN/DWL( Axis travelling/dwelling) EMG /RESET (Emergency stop/reset state) STRT/STOP/HOLD/INC (Start/Stop/Hold state) Mode display EDIT/MEM/RMT/MDI/INC HND/JOG/REF/THND/TJOG EDIT : Edit mode MEM : Memory mode RMT : Remote operation mode MDI : MDI operation mode INC : Incremental feed mode (Without manual pulse generator) HND : Handle feed mode JOG : Jog feed mode REF : Reference position return mode THND : TEACH IN NANDLE mode TJOG : TEACH IN JOG mode
56
B62705EN/03
1.10
WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
Tuning becomes easier by graphically displaying servo error amount and torque command, etc. (Graphic option is required). The following two types of waveform diagnosis functions are supported: (1) Oneshot type The oneshot type waveform diagnosis function can graphically display, as a waveform, any variation in those data items listed below. The start of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine signal. This function facilitates the adjustment of the servo and spindle motors. a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and thermal simulation data for the servo motor of each axis b. Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes c. Spindle motor speed and load meter value d. On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal address (2) Storage type The storage type waveform diagnosis function enables the storing of any variation in the data items listed below and, if a servo alarm occurs, the graphical display (as a waveform) of the stored data. The end of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine signal. This function facilitates the estimation of erroneous locations. Stored data can be output via the reader/punch interface. a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and thermal simulation data for the servo motor for each axis NOTE 1 To output stored waveform data, the optional reader/punch interface must have been installed. 2 The waveform diagnosis function is enabled when bit 0 (SGD) of parameter No. 3112 is set to 1. Note, however, that a graphics module is necessary to display waveforms.
1.10.1
Setting Parameters
(1) Set a parameter to utilize the servo waveform diagnostic function.

#7 3112 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SGD
#0(SGD) 0 : Do not display servo waveform (usual graphic display). 1 : Displays servo waveform (usual graphic display function cannot be used). (2) Turn off the power once and turn it on again.
3120 Time between servo alarm and sampling stop (storage type)
[Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32760

57
B62705EN/03
1.10.2
Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen
1. Press the
SYSTEM
key to display a system screen such as aparameter. several times, and the soft key
2. Press the continuous menu key [W.DGNS] is displayed.
3. Press [W.DGNS], then the parameter screen for the waveform diagnosis is displayed. Set the necessary data items. Position the cursor to the item to be set, enter the corresponding data, then press
INPUT
. Data items for which
***** is displayed cannot be set. To assist in data setting, the frame on the right side of the screen displays help information for that data to which the cursor is positioned. Help information which cannot fit into a single frame is split into several pages, which the user can scroll through using the page keys
PAGE
and
PAGE
WAVE DIAGNOSE (PARAMETER) GRP CONDITION 100 SAMPLING TIME *****MS TRIGGER ******* (CH1) DATA NO. 11 UNIT 1000 SIGNAL ******* > EDIT **** *** *** [W.PRM] [W.GRPH] (CH2) 22 10 *******
O1234 N12345 GRP CONDITION (ONES TYPE) 0:START 1:START&TRG 2:START&TRG (MEMORY TYPE) 100: DATA OF MEMORY 1/3 0 ] [ T0000 ]
S 08:20:52 [ W.MEM ] [
D Waveform diagnosis parameters (oneshot type)
(1) Display start condition 0 : Starts data sampling upon the [START] key being pressed, samples data for the specified period, then draws a waveform. 1 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first rising edge of the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data for the specified period, then draws a waveform. 2 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first falling edge of the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data for the specified period, then draws a waveform. (2) Sampling period: Set the period during which data will be sampled. Valid data range: 10 to 32760 Units: ms (3) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the start of data sampling, when 1 or 2 is set for the start condition. Example) G0007.2: ST signal
58
B62705EN/03
(4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 4).
Data No.
00 0n 1n 2n 3n 5n 6n 7n 90 99 10n 11n 161
Description
Does not display a waveform. Servo error (8 ms) for the nth axis (positional deviation) Pulse distribution for the nth axis (move command) Torque for the nth axis (actual current) Servo error (2 ms) for the nth axis (positional deviation) Actual speed for the nth axis Command current for the nth axis Thermal simulation data for the nth axis Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal address Actual spindle speed for the nth axis Load meter for the spindle for the nth axis Difference in position error calculated on the spindle basis
Units
Pulses (detection units) Pulses (input increments) % (relative to maximum current) Pulses (detection units) RPM % (relative to maximum current) % (OVC alarm ratio) Pulses (input increments) None % (relative to maximum rotation speed) % (relative to maximum output) Pulses (detection unit)
(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless the units must be changed for some reason. [Valid data range] 1 to 1000 [Unit] 0.001 (6) Signal address: PMC address and bit number. Set in the same way as that for trigger, when the data number is 99.
59
B62705EN/03
D Waveform diagnosis parameters (storage type)
(1) Display start condition 100 : Draws a waveform for the stored data. (2) Sampling period: Invalid (3) Trigger: Invalid (4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 4). Numbers for which no data is stored cannot be specified.
Data No.
00 0n 1n 2n 5n 6n 7n
Description
Does not display a waveform. Servo error (8 ms) for the nth axis (positional deviation) Pulse distribution for the nth axis (move command) Torque for the nth axis (actual current) Actual speed for the nth axis Command current for the nth axis Thermal simulation data for the nth axis
Units
Pulses (detection units) Pulses (input increments) % (relative to maximum current) RPM % (relative to maximum current) % (OVC alarm ratio)
(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless the units must be changed for some reason. [Valid data range] 1 to 1000 [Unit] 0.001 (6) Signal address: Invalid
60
B62705EN/03
1.10.3
Graphic of Wave Diagnosis data
1. Press soft key [W.GRPH], then graph of waveform diagnosis is displayed.

WAVE DIAGNOSE (GRAPHIC) CH1 1.0 0.5 0 0. 5 CH2 1.0 0.5 0 0. 5
1. 1. 0 0 [START] [TIME] [TIME] [HDOBL] [HHALF]
2. Press soft key [(OPRT)], then the following soft keys are displayed. The following three sets of soft keys are displayed by the key.
[START] [TIME] [TIME] [HDOBL] [HHALF] [START] [CH1] [CH1] [VDOBL] [VHALF] [START] [CH2] [CH2] [VDOBL] [VHALF]
1) [START ] 2) [TIME] 3) [TIME]
: Starts Graphic data : Shift the waveform of channel 1 and 2 rightward : Shift the waveform of channel and 2 leftward
4) [HDOBL] : Double the time scale of the waveform of channel 1 and 2 5) [HHALF] : Half the time scale of the waveform of channel 1 and 2 6) [HDOBL] : Double the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2 7) [VHALF] : Half the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2 8) [CH1] 9) [CH1] 10) [CH2] 11) [CH2] D Drawing a waveform for oneshot type waveform diagnosis : Shift the zero point of channel 1 upward : Shift the zero point of channel 1 downward : Shift the zero point of channel 2 upward : Shift the zero point of channel 2 downward
The oneshot type waveform diagnosis function draws a waveform for a specified data item in real time as the data is sampled. The sampled data, however, is not stored and thus cannot be output later. To sample data for oneshot type waveform diagnosis, press the [START] key on the WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) screen. Then, data is sampled when the specified start condition is satisfied. Data sampling continues for the specified period.
61
B62705EN/03
Pressing the [SATART] soft key starts data sampling. While sampling is being performed, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once data sampling has been completed, a waveform is automatically displayed.
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) CH1
O1234 N12345 CH2
EDIT **** ****** [START] [TIME] [TIME] [HDOBL] [HHALF]
D Drawing a waveform for storage type waveform diagnosis
To use storage type waveform diagnosis, set 100 for the display start condition. The maximum data width for storage type waveform diagnosis is 32760 ms. Data must be sampled before starting drawing. The next page explains sampling in detail. Pressing the [START] soft key loads stored data. While the data is being loaded, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once the data has been loaded, a waveform is displayed. The date on which the data was stored is displayed at the top left of the screen. If the [START] soft key is pressed while data is being stored, storage is stopped and the waveform for the data stored up to that point is displayed. The WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) screen indicates whether data is being stored.
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) CH197/01/13 12:15:00
O1234 N12345 CH2
EDIT **** ****** [START] [TIME] [TIME] [HDOBL] [HHALF]
62
B62705EN/03
1.10.4
Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis
(1) Press the
SYSTEM
function key. Pressing the menu continuation key
displays the [W.DGNS] soft key. Press this soft key to display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (PARAMETER) screen. (2) Press the [W.MEM] soft key to display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) screen. The operation selection soft keys appear. The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as follows:
WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) CONDITION: DATA KINDS POS ERROR MOTION CMD CURRENT (%) SPEED (RPM) TORQUE CMD HEAT SIMLT SMPL DATE EDIT **** *** *** [SELECT] [ ] [ 100 TRIGGER:
O1234 N12345 G0123.4
SAMPLING AXIS XYZA XYZA XYZA NONE NONE XYZA TIME : 2. 0SEC : MEMORY 08:20:52 ] [ ] [START]
(3) The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as follows:

[W.PRM] [W.GRPH] [ W.MEM ] [ Press [SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START] ] [ ]
] [
] [PUNCH] [
] [
Fig. 1.10.4 Soft keys
(4) Using the cursor, set the necessary data items. To set the sampling axes, position the cursor to the data item to be set, enter the names of the axes for which data will be sampled for that data item, then press [SELECT] or data items. Example) XYZ + [SELECT] or
INPUT INPUT
. The axis names are displayed to the right of the
(5) Once the sampling axes have been selected, the sampling period for each axis is displayed. Subsequently pressing the [START] soft key starts data sampling.
63
B62705EN/03
CAUTION 1 Data items for which ***** is displayed cannot be set. 2 To change the sampling axes, enter new axis names then press the [SELECT] soft key. Pressing the [SLELCT] soft key without entering an axis name results in no sampling axis being set. 3 If the sampling axes are changed during data sampling, data sampling is stopped. In this case, press the [START] soft key to restart data sampling for the new sampling axes. 4 Initially, no sampling axis is set.
D Storage data parameters
(1) Storage stop condition 100: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm. 101: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the detection of the rising edge of the trigger signal. 102: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the detection of the falling edge of the trigger signal. The maximum stored data width is 32760 ms. If the storage stop condition is not satisfied within 32760 ms, data is overwritten, starting with the oldest data. Parameter No. 3120 can be used to delay data storage being stopped by a specified period (ms), after the issue of a servo alarm. (2) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the stopping of data storage, when 101 or 102 is set for the stop condition. Example) G0007.2: ST signal (3) Data type: The following table lists the types of data for which a waveform can be displayed.
Data type
POS ERROR MOTION CMD CURRENT (%) SPEED (RPM) TORQUE CMD HEAT SIMLT
Description
Servo error (8 ms) for the nth axis Pulse distribution for the nth axis Torque for the nth axis Actual speed for the nth axis Command current for the nth axis Thermal simulation data for the nth axis
Units
Pulses (detection units) Pulses (input increments) % (relative to maximum current) RPM % (relative to maximum current) % (OVC alarm ratio)
(4) Sampling axis: The axes along which data will be sampled are displayed. (5) Sampling period: The sampling period for each axis is displayed. (6) Date of storage: While data is being sampled, MEMORY blinks in this field. When data sampling stops, the date at that point appears in this field.
64
B62705EN/03
1.10.5
Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type)
Waveform diagnosis data of servo alarm format can be output to an I/O device, as follows: 1) Select EDIT mode. 2) Press the
SYSTEM
key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this
screen. 3) Press the [W.MEM], order.
For details of input/output to/from the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card, see Output to FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card, below.
WAVE DIAGNOSE (MEMORY) CONDIGION: DATA KINDS POS ERROR MOTION CMD CURRENT (%) SPEED (RPM) TORQUE CMD HEAT SIMLT SMPL DATE EDIT **** *** *** [SELECT] [ ] [ 100 TRIGGER: O1234 N12345 G0123.4
SAMPLING AXIS XYZA XYZA XYZA NONE NONE XYZA TIME : 2.0SEC : 97/01/13 12:15:00 12:15:52 ] [ ] [START]
] [
] [PUNCH] [ Press
] [
] [
] [
] [ CAN ] [ EXEC ] Press
D Output to FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card
1) Select EDIT mode. 2) Press the

SYSTEM
key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY)
screen. 3) Open the write protect tab on the floppy disk or card. 4) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this order. The waveform diagnosis data is output to a file named WAVE DIAGNOS, to which the number of the last file is assigned. If a file named WAVE DIAGNOS already exists in the floppy disk or on the card, P/S alarm 86 is issued. A floppy disk or card can contain only one file for waveform diagnosis data. If the existing WAVE DIAGNOS file contains unnecessary waveform diagnosis data of servo alarm format, delete that file before attempting to output new data. The procedure for deleting a file is described later.
65
B62705EN/03
D Directory display
The directory in the cassette or card is displayed by means of the following procedure: 1) Select EDIT mode. 2) Press the
PROG
function key to select the program screen. , then press [FLOPPY].
3) Press the continuous menu key 4) Press page key .
The directory is displayed. D Deleting a file A file stored on a cassette or card is deleted by means of the following procedure: 1) Select EDIT mode. 2) Press the 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
PROG
function key to select the program screen.
Set the write protect switch on the cassette or card to enable writing. Press [FLOPPY]. Press [DELETE]. Enter the file number, then press [F SET]. Press [EXEC]. The file corresponding to the specified file number is deleted. The number of each file subsequent to the deleted file is decremented by one.
66
B62705EN/03
D Output format
In the servo alarm format, the header, date and time, selected axes, and waveform diagnosis data are output in this order. Data items are identified by nine identifier words. Output data other than the identifier words varies with the data type.
T(identifier word) T0 : T60 : T61 : T62 : T63 : T64 : T65 : T68 : T69 : Header Positional deviation Move command Actual current Actual speed Command current Thermal simulation Selected axes Date and time
1) Header
T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
C: Data word
2) Data word
T 6 9 D * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
D *..*: Data Example: 12:14 59 seconds on June 23, 1997

T 6 9 D 1 9 9 7 0 6 2 3 , 1 2 1 4 5 9 ;
3) Selected axes
T 6 8 P * * D * * , * * , to * * ,
P0: Positional deviation P1: Actual speed P2: Move command P3: Command current P4: Actual current P5: Thermal simulation D*.. *: Axis number (1 to 8)
67
B62705EN/03
4) Waveform diagnosis data

T 6 0 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,
to
to
to
to
to
D *..*: Waveform diagnosis data x number of axes
NOTE 1 Records are classified into header records and data records. 2 % is used as an endofrecord code. 3 Each record starts with an identifier and ends with an endofblock code. 4 Either the ISO or EIA code system is used. 5 The output code type is specified with parameter ISO (bit 1 of No. 0100). For ISO code, parameter NCR (bit 3 of No. 0100) is used to specify whether the endofblock code is <LF> only, or a sequence of <LF> <CR> <CR>. 6 Parameter NFD (bit 7 of No. 01X1, where X is the channel number) is used to specify whether a feed code is output before and after the data. 7 No identifier word is output for a data item for which no axis is selected. 8 The above file corresponds to a paper tape of about 200 m in length.
1.10.6
Notes
(1) Once the storage is full, the oldest data is overwritten. (2) Storedtype waveform diagnostic data is not lost, even when the power is turned off. (3) The waveform diagnostic function is disabled when parameter SGD (bit 0 of No. 3112) is set to 0. (4) Set the correct date and time using the setting screen.
68
B62705EN/03
1.11
OPERATING MONITOR 1.11.1
Display Method
Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed meter can be displayed.
1. Set a parameter to display operating monitor. (Bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No.3111) 2. Press the
POS
key to display the position display screen. , then soft key [MONI] is displayed.
3. Press continuous menu key
4. Press the soft key [MONI], then the operating monitor screen is displayed.
OPERATING MONITOR (LOAD METER) X : Y : Z : * * * 80% 0% 0% PART COUNT 5 CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S S 0 T 0000 S1: O0001 N00001
200%
* * * * * * * * * *
(SPEED METER RPM) S1: * * * 1500
RUN TIME ACT.F
0H15M 3000 MM/M
MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35 [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
NOTE 1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200%. 2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio of the current spindle speed to the maximum spindle speed (100%). Although the speed meter normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6. (OPS) of parameter 3111 to 1. 3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed are set to parameter No. 3151 to 3154. If parameters 3151 to 3154 are all zero, the load meter of the basic axes are displayed. 4 For color display, the bar of the load meter that exceed 100% shows purple color.
69
B62705EN/03
1.11.2
Parameters
#7 3111 #6 OPS #5 OPM #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit #5(OPM) Operating monitor display is: 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled #6(OPS) The speed meter on the operating monitor screen displays: 0 : Spindle motor speed 1 : Spindle speed
3151 3152 3153 3154
Axis number for which the first servo motor load meter is displayed Axis number for which the second servo motor load meter is displayed Axis number for which the third servo motor load meter is displayed Axis number for which the fourth servo motor load meter is displayed
[Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0, 1, ... number of controlled axes These parameters specify the numbers of the axes for which load meters for servo motors are to be displayed. Up to four load meters can be displayed. Set 0 for those axes for which no load meter is to be displayed.
70
B62705EN/03
1.12
LIST OF OPERATIONS
Reset
Function Resetting run hour Resetting no. of machined parts Resetting OT alarm Resetting alarm 100 Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key Mode Function button Operation [(OPRT)] [RUNPRE][EXEC]
POS
At Power ON
[(OPRT)] [PTSPRE][EXEC]
POS
P
CAN
and and
CAN
RESET
Registration from MDI

Function Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key Mode Function button Operation
Inputting parameters
Yes
MDI or E.Stop
SYSTEM
Parameter no.[NO.SRH]Data PWE =0

RESET
INPUT
(PARAM)
Inputting offset values Inputting setting data Input of PMC parameters, counter and data table Inputting PMC parameters (Timer, keep relay)
OFF OFF
MDI
OFFSET SETTING
Offset number[NO.SRH]Offset value Setting no.[NO.SRH] or Data
INPUT
OFFSET SETTING
INPUT
OFF MDI or E.Stop OFF

SYSTEM
[PMCPRM][COUNTR] or [DATA]Data
INPUT
(PMC)
[PMCPRM][TIMER] or [KEEPRL]Data
INPUT
POS
POS
(Display of relative coordinate)<AXIS> [ORIGIN]

OFFSET SETTING
Tool length measurement
JOG
OFFSET SETTING
Jog the tool to measuring position
Offset no.[NO.SRH]<AXIS>[INP.C]
71
B62705EN/03
Input/Output with FANUC Cassette

Function Heading a file Deleting a file Collating a program OFF Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key Mode EDIT
PROG
Function button
Operation
N N
File no.[ File no.[
][F SRH][EXEC] ][DELETE][EXEC] Program number[(OPRT)]
EDIT
PROG
EDIT
PROG
Heading a file [
][READ][EXEC]
Inputting From FANUC Cassette

Function Inputting parameters Inputting PMC parameters Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key OFF Mode EDIT or E.Stop E.Stop
SYSTEM
Function button [(OPRT)][

SYSTEM
Operation ][READ][EXEC]
(PARAM)
OFF
][I/O](CANNEL NO)
INPUT
(PMC)
(DEVICE NAME) [FDCAS](KIND OF DATA) [PARAM][READ](FILE NO) File no.

INPUT
[EXEC]
Inputting offset values Registering a program Inputting macro variables
OFF OFF
EDIT EDIT
OFFSET SETTING
(Heading a file no.)[(OPRT)][
][READ][EXEC]
PROG
N N
File no. File no.
INPUT
[ [
][READ][EXEC] ]
OFF
EDIT
PROG
INPUT
Program no. [READ][EXEC]

MEMORY
PROG
<START>
72
B62705EN/03
Output to FANUC Cassette

Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key Function button [(OPRT)][ EDIT
SYSTEM
Function
Mode
Operation ][PUNCH][EXEC]
Output of parameter
(PARAM)
[ Output of PMC parameter EDIT

SYSTEM
][I/O](CANNEL NO)
INPUT
(DEVICE
NAME) [FDCAS] (KIND OF DATA) [PARAM] [WRITE] (FILE NO) [(OPRT)][
(PMC)
INPUT
[EXEC]
Output of offset Output of all programs Output of one program Output of macro variables
EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT
OFFSET SETTING
][PUNCH][EXEC]
PROG
O O
[
9999[
][PUNCH][EXEC] ][PUNCH][EXEC] ][PUNCH][EXEC]
PROG
Program no.[
OFFSET SETTING
][MACRO][(OPRT)][
Search
Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key Function button
PROG
Function Searching a program number Searching a sequence number Searching an address word
Mode
Operation
MEMORY or EDIT MEMORY
Program no.[O SRH]
PROG
Program no. search
Sequence number[NSRH]
EDIT
PROG
Data to be searched[SRH] or[SRH] or (cursor key)
Searching an address only
EDIT
Address to be searched[SRH] or[SRH] or

PROG
(Cursor key) Searching an offset number Searching a diagnostic number

OFFSET SETTING
Offset no.[NO.SRH] Diagnostic number[NO.SRH]
SYSTEM
(DGNOS) Searching a parameter number Parameter no.[NO.SRH]

SYSTEM
(PARAM)
73
B62705EN/03
Edit
Function Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key Mode Function button [LIB]
PROG
Operation
Display of memory capacity used Deleting all programs Deleting a program OFF
EDIT
EDIT
PROG
O O N
9999
DELETE
OFF
EDIT
PROG
Program no. Sequence no.
DELETE
Deleting several blocks
DELETE
OFF
EDIT
PROG
(Deleted up to a block with a specified sequence no.) OFF EDIT

PROG
Deleting a block
EOB
DELETE
Deleting a word Changing a word
OFF OFF OFF
EDIT EDIT
PROG
Searching a word to be deleted
DELETE
PROG
Searching a word to be changedNew Data
ALTER
Searching a word immediately before a word to be EDIT

PROG
Inserting a word
searchedNew Data
INSERT
Collation
Function Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key ON Mode Function button
PROG
Operation [(OPRT)][ ][READ][EXEC]
Collating memory
EDIT
Playback
Function Data Paramproteceter tion write=1 key Mode Function button Jog the machine
PROG
Operation
Input of NC data
TEACHIN JOG/ HANDLE
Y
EOB
or
Z
INSERT
INSERT
NC data
INSERT
74
B62705EN/03
Clear
Function Memory all clear At ower power ON Parameter/offset clear f M/T :
RESET
Data protection key
Parameter write=1
Mode
Function key AND
Operation
DELETE
Loader is controlled : M/T :

RESET
CAN
AND
At Power ON
Loader is controlled :
RESET
AND
(Parameter
only) Clearing a program f At Power ON M/T :

DELETE
Loader is controlled : AND
RESET
AND
Program under edition at power off(PS101) PMC RAM *
PROG
RESET
At Power ON
Main CPU :
AND
O X
AND
Loader is controlled :
* PMC ladder program is not cleard in FROM.
75
B62705EN/03
1.13
WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED
D Warning screen This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of the options using the SRAM area is changed. The data for the function indicated on the screen is cleared the next time the system is turned on.
WARNING YOU SET THE PARAMETER NO.jjjj#j THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE CLEARED. * PART PROGRAM MEMORY PLEASE PRESS <DELETE> OR <CAN> KEY. <DELETE> : CLEAR ALL DATA <CAN> : CANCEL
NOTE Mark* varies with the parameter settings. Two or more function names may be displayed.
76
B62705EN/03
D Allocation error screen
When an option which uses the SRAM area is added, the system software may require more SRAM than is currently installed in the system. In this case, an allocation error screen appears the first time the system is turned on after the addition of the option, thus restoring the state existing before the addition.
FILE ALLOCATION ERROR SRAM CAPACITY IS NOT SUFFICIENT. ADDITIONAL SRAM IS NECESSARY. PLEASE PRESS <CAN> KEY : RETURN TO THE STATE BEFORE OPTION PARAMETER IS CHANGED.
NOTE When the currently installed SRAM is not sufficient, additional SRAM can be mounted. Newly installed SRAM must be cleared before it can be used. Operation:When turning on the power, hold down the following keys:
O +
DELETE
for M/T series
When installing additional SRAM, however, perform all clear.
77
B62705EN/03
1.14
WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED (SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR)
System software can be replaced only with compatible system software. Otherwise, the first time the CNC is turned on after the system software is replaced, the following screen will be displayed and the system will not be activated:
DDF101
SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR: CLEAR ALL SRAM MODULE
NOT READY
In this case, perform memory all clear (by holding down the
DELETE
RESET
and
MDI keys then turning on the power) or reinstall the original system
software.
78
B62705EN/03
1.15
POWER MOTION MANAGER
When the Power Motion series is used as an additional axis (slave) of the CNC, the power motion manager allows the slave data to be displayed and set by the CNC. The power motion manager enables the following display and setting: (1) Current position display (absolute/machine coordinates) (2) Parameter display and setting (3) Diagnosis display (4) System configuration screen display (5) Alarm display The Power Motion series that can be used as the slave is a amplifier with I/O Link.
1.15.1
Parameter
#7 0960 #6 #5 #4 #3 PMN #2 MD2 #1 MD1 #0 SLV
[Data type] Bit #0(SLV) When the power motion manager is selected, the screen shows the data of: 0 : A single slave. 1 : Up to four slaves by dividing the screen into four segments. #1, #2(MD1, MD2) The slave parameters are input from and output to the following devices:
MD2
0 0
MD1
0 1
I/O device
Part program storage Memory card
The parameters are input or output in the program format, no matter which I/O device is selected. #3(PMN) The power motion manager function is: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. (Communication with the slave is not performed.)
79
B62705EN/03
1.15.2
Screen Display
1. Press the
SYSTEM
function key.
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. The [PMM] soft key appears. 3. Press the [PMM] soft key. The system configuration screen, which is the initial screen of the power motion manager, appears. The screen has the following soft keys (function selection soft keys).
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]
The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse video. Pressing a soft key enables the corresponding function, as indicated below: POS: Current position display SYSTEM: System information MSG: Alarm list To select another function after one of the functions listed above is selected, press the return menu key several times until the soft keys are displayed as shown above. Then, select the desired function. 4. To terminate the power motion manager, repeatedly press the return until the function selection keys are displayed as menu key shown above. Then, press the return menu key once more. The soft keys of the CNC system appear, and the power motion manager terminates. The system configuration screen of this function is displayed as the termination screen. Alternative termination method is to select another function while this function is enabled. To do this, press an MDI function key (
MESSAGE
POS
PROG
, etc.).
NOTE After another screen is displayed by pressing a function key, pressing the function key, restores the initial status of this function. That is, the soft keys shown above are restored. The data that was being input is canceled.
SYSTEM
80
B62705EN/03
D System configuration screen
This screen displays the system software information of the slave. The screen is displayed first when the power motion manager function is selected. This screen is automatically displayed also at the termination of the function. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft keys are displayed together with the screen displayed when SYSTEM was last selected. The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse video.
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][ ]
2. Press the [SYSTEM] soft key again. The system configuration screen appears. While this screen is displayed, the [SYSTEM] soft key is left displayed in reverse video.
POWER MOTION MANAGER SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.GROUP0 / SYSTEM <SERIES/VERSION> 88A1 01
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][
][ SYSTEM ][
Sample screen: Series and edition of the servo unit series system list
81
B62705EN/03
D Parameter screen
The parameters necessary for the functions of the slave must be specified in advance. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft keys appear.
2. Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears.

POWER MOTION PARAMETER 1.GROUP0 / 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 MANAGER
00001000 00010101 11111011 00000000 00000000 10100001 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000
0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019
11110000 01010000 00000000 00000000 10110001 00000000 00000000 10000010 00000000 00000000
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][
][ SYSTEM ][
The screen displays just the bit and decimal data. For details of the parameters, refer to the connection manual of the corresponding Power Mate. D Searching for a parameter A search can be made for the parameter to be displayed. 1. Select the active slave. 2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear.
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Enter a desired number in the keyin field by using MDI numeric keys. Then, press the [NO.SRC] soft key. The search starts. D Setting a parameter A parameter of a slave Power Mate can be directly set from the CNC. 1. Select the active slave. 2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Move the cursor to the parameter to be set. 4. Enter desired data in the keyin buffer by using MDI numeric keys. Then, press the [INPUT] soft key. Alternatively, press the MDI key.
82
INPUT
B62705EN/03
D Diagnosis screen
This screen shows the current status of the slave. 1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft keys appear:
2. Press the [DGNOS] soft key. The diagnosis screen appears. The displayed data is basically the same as the data displayed on the parameter screen. For details of the diagnosis information, refer to the connection manual of the corresponding Power Mate. D Current position display The screen shows the current position on the workpiece coordinate system or machine coordinate system. 1. Press the [POS] function selection soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN][ ][ ]
2. To see the absolute coordinate screen, press the [WORK] soft key. To see the machine coordinate screen, press the [MACHIN] soft key.
POWER MOTION MANAGER ACTUAL POSITION (MACHINE) 1.GROUP0 /
1 F
1267900 3500
[ WORK
][
][ MACHIN ][ 1: Coordinate
][
F: Actual speed
83
B62705EN/03
D Alarm screen
If an alarm is issued during operation, the group number of the slave causing the alarm is indicated at the right end of the message field on the screen. Check the details on the alarm screen. For example, (13) means that the first and third power motion units are in the alarm state. 1. Press the [MSG] function selection soft key. Just the error code is displayed on the screen.
POWER MOTION MANAGER ALARM 1.GROUP0 / 442 210 232
POS
][
][
][SYSTEM ][
MSG
Up to forty codes can be displayed on the screen. For details of the alarm, refer to the connection manual of the corresponding Power Mate. D Operating the active slave The active slave is subjected to the ZOOM function, which will be described later, and parameter overwrite. The title of the active slave is displayed in a color different from the display color of the other slave titles. The active slave can be selected by pressing the [NEXT] or [BACK] soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key is pressed several times. [NEXT]: Displays the screen of the Power Mate connected after the currently active slave. The equipment other than the Power Mate is ignored. [BACK]: Displays the screen of the Power Mate connected before the currently active slave.
84
B62705EN/03
D Singleslave display/ Fourslave display
Whether the screen displays the data of just a single unit or of four units in four segments is specified in the SLV bit (bit 0 of parameter 960). To switch the fourslave display to the singleslave display, press the [ZOOM] soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key is pressed several times. The singleslave display shows the data of the active slave. To switch the singleslave display to the fourslave display showing the data of four slaves including the active slave, press the [ZOOM] key. When five or more slaves are connected, the fourslave display has two or more pages. To see the slave data that is not displayed on the current page, press soft key [NEXT].
POWER MOTION MANAGER/ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION O12345678 1.GROUP0 / O12345678 N12345 2.GROUP1 / SYSTEM 88A101 SYSTEM
N12345
88A101
3.GROUP2 / SYSTEM 88A101
4.GROUP3 / SYSTEM 88A101
PARAM
DGNOS
SYSTEM
(OPRT)
The figure above shows a sample fourslave display screen on a display unit with twelve soft keys. A unit with seven soft keys can also display the fourslave display screen.
POWER MOTION MANAGER SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1.GROUP0 / SYSTEM <SERIES/VERSION> O12345678 N12345
88A101
POS
][ DGNOS ][
][ SYSTEM ][
MSG
85
B62705EN/03
The figure above shows a sample singleslave display screen on a display unit with seven soft keys. A unit with twelve soft keys can also display the singleslave display screen. D Guidance message While the following soft keys are being displayed, a guidance message is displayed in the message field.
[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]
[ WORK
][
][MACHIN ][
][
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][
][SYSTEM][(OPRT) ]
When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, SELECT ACTIVE SLAVE [>] is displayed.
[ NEXT ][ BACK ][ ZOOM ][ ][ ]
When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, SELECT ACTIVE SLAVE [] [] is displayed. D Keyin field When the [(OPRT)] soft key is pressed, the message line may turn into a keyin field as required. The numeric data input by using MDI keys is displayed after the prompt (>). On the parameter and diagnosis screens, the keyin field appears when just a numeric value is input. The soft key [(OPRT)] need not be pressed.
86
B62705EN/03
1.15.3
Parameter Input/Output
D Saving parameters Parameters can be saved in CNC memory or a memory card as a data file of program format. Specify the first digit of the registration program number in parameter 8760. Programs with predetermined numbers are created for individual slaves. When the parameters are saved in CNC memory, a program having the specified program number is created. When the parameters are saved in a memory card, a file is created, to which the file name consists of the specified program number and an extension PMM. Example: When parameter 8760 is set to 8000 The program number for group n is 8000 + n*10. The group number n is indicated in the title area of each slave. CAUTION In case that the parameters are saved in a memory card, If the specified program number already exists on memory card, the corresponding program is overwritten with new data. Specify a desired input device in the MD1 and MD2 bits (bits 1 and 2 of parameter 960). Connect a memory card. Alternatively, check the free area of CNC memory. Then, follow the steps given below: 1. Select the active slave. 2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Press the continuous menu key

[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH
. The following soft keys appear:

][ ][ ]
4. Press the [READ] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]
5. Press the [EXEC] soft key. During input, INPUT blinks in the message field.
87
B62705EN/03
D Writing parameters
The data file of parameters saved in CNC memory or a memory card as a program is written into the slave determined by the program number. The program number and memory device are determined as described in Saving parameters. 1. Select the active slave. 2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]
3. Press the nextmenu key. The following soft keys appear:

[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]
4. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]
5. Press the [EXEC] soft key. During output, INPUT blinks in the message field. The screen cannot be changed to another screen during parameter input/output. When the RESET key is pressed, or when an alarm status is detected in communication, the input/output stops.
88
B62705EN/03
1.15.4
Notes
D Connecting an I/O Link When the Power Motion series is used as a slave of an I/O Link, the CNC assigns I/O addresses. The salve data is input and output in units of 16 bytes. Therefore, 128 input/output points are necessary. Up to eight slaves can be connected. The module name is OC021 (16byte input) or OC020 (16byte output). BASE is always 0, and SLOT is always 1. D Ignoring the power motion manager function After the data necessary for each slave connected is set and checked, the communication of the power motion manager (PMM) can be stopped to send a command from the CNC ladder to the slave. When the PMN bit (bit 3 of parameter 960) is set to 1, all communication between CNC and the slave via the I/O Link is open to the ladder. While the bit is held 1, the screen shows just the title, function name, and other items that are independent of the communication. The following message appears to indicate that communication has stopped. COMMUNICATION PROHIBITED BY P960#3 D Data input/output by I/O Link D Alarm When the power motion manager is used, the function for data input/output by I/O Link cannot be used. (1) CNC When a CNC alarm status is detected, the screen is automatically switched to the CNC alarm screen. Check the details of the alarm. If necessary, display and select the power motion manager screen again by pressing function key
SYSTEM
(2) Slave A guidance message is usually displayed in the message field. If a slave alarm is detected, the corresponding slave group number is displayed at the right end. Display the alarm screen to check the details. D Data protection key When the data protection key of the CNC is turned on, parameters cannot be input to CNC memory.
89
B62705EN/03
1.16
BIOS SETUP OF THE MMCIV
This section describes the BIOS setup for the following MMCIV.
Order code
A02B0207J001 A02B0207J002
Printed circuit board code

A02B0207C020 A02B0207C021 A02B0207C022
1.16.1
BIOS Setup
The BIOS setup is a program for setting the operating environment of the MMCIV. The BIOS setup, however, need not be executed to set up a typical operating environment. A typical operating environment for the MMCIV is factoryset. Inadvertently modifying the setting may cause a failure. The BIOS setup should be executed when: A printed circuit board is replaced. A hard disk unit is replaced. The peripheral configuration is changed. (A floppy disk drive or keyboard is connected or disconnected, for example. Whether execution of the BIOS setup is needed varies with the BIOS parameters.) POST (Power On Self Test) has issued an error message relating to the setup. The setting made by the BIOS setup is stored into SRAM on the printed circuit board of the MMCIV main body. The SRAM is provided with a battery backup to retain the recorded settings. For the BIOS setup, a full keyboard is necessary.
1.16.2
Keys Used for Operation on the SetUp Screen
The keys used for setup have the following functions.

PAGE
and and key

PAGE
keys : Move the cursor to the next item. keys : Move the cursor to the previous item. : Move to the next page of the setup menu. : Move to the previous page of the setup menu.
key and Key
spacebar
keys : Display the desired value at a setup menu item. : Ends the setup menu.
ESC
90
B62705EN/03
1.16.3
How to Begin the SetUp
1. End work and store the data: 2. If a full keyboard has been connected. Press the
CTRL
ALT
DELETE
keys to reset the MMCIV PCB.
If a full keyboard has not been connected. Switch off the power, connect a full keyboard, and switch on the power, again. 3. Immediately when POST ends, and DOS loading begins, press the
CTRL
ALT
ESC
keys. The Standard System Parameters display
appears on the screen. If it does not appear, retry starting at step 2.

PAGE
Pressing the
and
PAGE
keys displays the next and previous pages
of the setup menu, respectively. Standard System Parameters screen

Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1.00) (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved Page 1 of 3 Standard System Parameters System Time: System Date: Diskette A : Diskette B : Hard Disk 1 : Hard Disk 2 : Base Memory : Extended Memory: Video Card : CPU Speed : 12: 00: 00 Sep 14, 1993 3.5, 1. 44MB Not Installed AUTO 1 Not Installed 640 KB 3072 KB VGA/EGA Fast
Cyl Hd Pre LZ Sec Size 722 10 0 722 23 81
NumLock on at boot: NO Quick Boot: Off "# Field
Esc Menu
F2 Sys Info
Space/Value
PgUp/Dn Page
91
B62705EN/03
D Detailed descriptions of the setup items
The details of the setup items are as follows:

Item
System Time
Description
The time is displayed in thetime:minute:second format. To adjust the clock, set the cursor to a respective item and press the [spacebar] or [] key. When the second display is selected, pressing the [spacebar] or [] key resets the second display to 00. The date is displayed in the month day, year format. pressing [spacebar] advances the month display in the order of Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, and Dec. Pressing the [] key reverses the order. The type of a floppy disk is specified. To use a portable 3.5inch floppy disk drive, specify 3.5inch, 1.44MB. If no floppy disk drive is connected, specify Not Installed. The type of a second floppy disk is specified. To use a portable 3.5inch floppy disk drive, specify 3.5inch, 1.44MB. If no second floppy disk drive is connected, specify Not Installed. The type of a hard disk drive built in the MMCIV main unit is specified. AUTO 1 is factoryset. Do not change in this item. The type of a second hard disk drive is specified. Because the MMCIV main unit does not contain a second hard disk drive, Not Installed is factoryset. Do not change in this item. The capacity of the base memory detected by POST is displayed. Do not change the setting. The capacity of the extended memory detected by POST is displayed. Do not change the setting. The display rating of the CRT display is specified. VGA/EGA is factoryset. Do not change the setting. The CPU operating speed is specified. Fast :The CPU clock is at full speed. Slow :The CPU operates at low speed. How the Num Lock feature is handled at system boot is specified. Yes :The system is booted up with the Num Lock feature switched on. No : The system is booted up with the Num Lock feature switched off. It is specified whether the memory is tested when power is applied. Off : The memory test is performed. On : The memory test is skipped. Always select Off.
System Date
Diskette A
Diskette B
Hard Disk 1 Hard Disk 2
Base Memory Extended Memory Video Card CPU Speed
NumLock on at boot
Quick Boot
92
B62705EN/03
Device Feature Control screen

Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1.00) (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved Page 2 of 3 Device Feature Control Serial Port: Track Ball: Parallel Port: 03F8h 02F8h 03BCh Floppy Boot: Enabled
Display: Simulataneous Video Mode Graphics: Normal Internal Cache: Enabled Video Mode Text: Normal Vertical Compensation: Enabled
Esc Menu
F2 Sys Info
"# Field
Space/Value
PgUp/Dn Page

Item
Serial Port Track Ball Parallel Port Internal Cache
Description
The I/O address of serial port 1 is specified. 03F8h is factoryset. The I/O address of serial port 2 is specified. 02F8h is factoryset. The I/O address of the parallel port is specified. 03BCh is factoryset. It is specified whether to enable or disable the cache memory in the CPU. Enabled : The builtin cache memory is enabled. Disabled : The builtin cache memory is disabled. It is specified whether to boot the system from a floppy disk. Enabled : The system is booted from a floppy disk. Disabled : The system is not booted from a floppy disk. A display unit to be used is specified. Always select Simultaneous.
Floppy Boot
Display
Video Mode Graphics Video Mode Text Vertical Compensation
The setting has no meaning. The setting has no meaning. It is specified whether the entire surface of the LCD display screen is used. Always select Enabled.
93
B62705EN/03
Power Management Feature Control screen

Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1. 00) (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved
Page 3 of 3 Power Management Feature Control Power Management Disabled System Doze After: Disabled Hard Disk Off After:Disabled System Standby After:Disabled LCD Panel Off Time: Disabled System Suspend After:15 minute Suspend Mode: Suspend/Resume System Doze Speed: Divide by 2 Low Battery Action:Divide by 2 System Standby Speed:Divide by 2
Esc Menu
F2 Sys Info
"# Field
Space/Value
PgUp/Dn Page

Item
Power Management
Description
Always select Disabled.
94
B62705EN/03
1.16.4
How to End the SetUp
This section describes how to save the information specified in the setup menu and to exit the setup menu. Pressing the
ESC
key on the setup menu causes the Exiting SETUP
menu to appear on the right section of the screen.

** Exiting SETUP **
ESC
Continue with SETUP.
F4
Save Values, exit setup, and reboot. Load default values for allpages. Abort SETUP without saving value.
F5
F6
(1) Pressing the
ESC
key resumes the setup menu. You can continue
to set up on the setup menu. (2) Pressing the F4 key saves the set information before ending the setup program. After the setup program ends, the MMCIV is reset, and the system is booted. (3) Pressing the F5 key cancels all set information and loads the initial settings. Inadvertently pressing the F5 key loses the factory settings of the MMCIV, possibly causing a failure. (4) Pressing the F6 key ends the setup program without changing the previous settings; the information you set up is not saved.
95
B62705EN/03
1.17
BIOS SETUP OF INTELLIGENT TERMINALS 1 AND 2
This section describes the BIOS setup for intelligent terminals 1 and 2 and the following MMCIV.
Order code
A02B0207J031 A02B0207J032
Printed circuit board code

A02B22030180 A02B22030180
1.17.1
BIOS Setup
The BIOS setup is a program for setting the operating environment of the MMCIV or intelligent terminal. The BIOS setup, however, need not be executed to set up a typical operating environment. A typical operating environment for the MMCIV or intelligent terminal is factoryset. Inadvertently modifying the setting may cause a failure. The BIOS setup should be executed when: A printed circuit board is replaced. A hard disk unit is replaced. The peripheral configuration is changed. (A floppy disk drive or keyboard is connected or disconnected, for example. Whether execution of the BIOS setup is needed varies with the BIOS parameters.) POST (Power On Self Test) has issued an error message about setup. The setting made by the BIOS setup is stored into SRAM in the MMCIV or intelligent terminal. The SRAM is provided with a battery backup to retain the recorded settings. For the BIOS setup, a full keyboard is necessary.
1.17.2
Keys Used for Operation on the SetUp Screen
The keys used on the setup screen have the following functions: and keys : Move the cursor. : Displays the help. : Selects the item to which the cursor is positioned.
ESC
F1 key
ENTER
key key
: Abandons the current setting.
96
B62705EN/03
1.17.3
How to Begin the SetUp
1. Terminate the current operation and save the data. 2. Turn the power off, connect a full keyboard, then turn the power on again. 3. Press the F1 key on the initial screen once, as shown in Fig. 1.17.3 (a). The BIOS setup starts a few seconds later, with the display of the menu screen. In some cases, the BIOS setup starts automatically, showing error screen (1), as shown in Fig. 1.17.3 (c). If the error screen appears, press the , , and
ENTER
keys as indicated in Figs.
1.17.3 (a), (b), and (c). The menu screen appears. If the BIOS setup does not begin, return to step 2 above. 4. The menu screen appears. The triangle indicates that the corresponding item has been changed. Check the new setting. If necessary, make a modification.
(C) Copyright IBM Corporation 1981,1994 ALL RIGHTS RESERVERD 486DX250MHz Copyright (C) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,LTD 1995 Release 01 1.02 0640KB System Memory 7168KB Extended Memory
Indicating that pressing the F1 key starts BIOS setup.
Press F1 for configration/Setup Press ESC for fast POST
Fig. 1.17.3 (a) Initial Screen
IBM SurePath Setup (C) Copyright IBM Corporation 1994
Configuration/Setup Utility Select Options: System Summary Devices and I/O Ports Date and Time System Security Start Options Advanced Setup
<F1> Help <ESC> Exit
< " # > Move <Enter> Select
Fig. 1.17.3 (b) Menu Screen
97
B62705EN/03
POST Startup Error(s) The following error(s) were detected when the system was started: 162 Configuration Change Has Occured 163 Date and Time Incorrect Select one of the following: Continue. Select this item. Exit Setup
Fig. 1.17.3 (c)
Error Screen (1) Displayed after Automatic Activation
Error The configration settings are invalid. Select one of the following: Automatically reconfigure system and continue. Continue with the corrupted values. Exit Setup Select this item.
Fig. 1.17.3 (d)
Configration Error Configration errors were detected. Select one of the following: Continue. Select this item. Exit Setup
Fig. 1.17.3 (e)
98
B62705EN/03
1.17.4
Details of the Setup Items
(1) System Summary (2) Device and I/O Ports
Indicates the current system configuration. This information cannot be changed. Indicates the basic I/O settings, which are as listed below:
Item
Serial Port A I/O Address
Description
The I/O address and IRQ of serial port A are specified. 3F8IRQ4 is usually specified.
Serial Port B I/O Address
The I/O address and IRQ of serial port B are specified. 2F8IRQ3 is usually specified.
Parallel Port I/O Address
The I/O address and IRQ of the parallel port are specified. 3BCIRQ7 is usually specified.
Parallel Port Mode
The operation mode of the parallel part is specified. Standard corresponds to AT mode while Extended corresponds to PS/2 mode. Standard is usually specified.
Parallel Port Extended Mode Mouse Diskette Drive A Diskette Drive B Video Setup... IDE Drives Setup...
Bidirectional is specified if the parallel port mode is Extended. Install is specified when a mouse is connected. The media type for drive A is specified. The media type for drive B is specified. The type of the video chip is indicated. This setting cannot be changed. The HDD type is indicated. This setting cannot be changed.
(3) Date and Time
The date and time can be changed. If an invalid value is included, correct that value. The values are indicated as follows:
Hours : Minutes : Seconds Month : Day : Year
99
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION (4) System Security
B62705EN/03
A password and other access right settings are specified.

Item
Secure Hard Disk Drives and Diskette Drives
Subitem
Hard Disk Access
Description
Only Enable (default) can be specified.
Diskette Drive Access Poweron Password Enter Poweron Password Enter Poweron Password Again Set or change Poweron Password Delete Poweron Password Password Prompt
When Disable is specified, a connected floppy disk drive cannot be accessed. A poweron password is input. The password must consist of seven or more characters. The same password is input again. To set or change the poweron password, this item is selected after the above two items have been set. This item is selected to delete the poweron password. When Off is specified, the password input immediately before booting is unnecessary. (The setup password is still necessary.) An administrator password is input. The password must consist of seven or more characters. The same password is input again. To set or change the administrator password, this item is selected after the above two items are set. This item is selected to delete the administrator password. When YES is specified, the poweron password can be changed.
Administrator Password
Enter Administrator Password Enter Administrator Password Again Set or change Administrator Password Delete Administrator Password Poweron Password changeable by user
NOTE The administrator password has a higher priority than the poweron password. If the BIOS setup is started with the poweron password when both passwords have been specified, only the system summary and poweron password can be changed. Both the poweron password and administrator password can be used as the password immediately before booting.
100
B62705EN/03
(5) Start Options
Indicates the basic I/O settings, which are as listed below:

Item
Keyboard NumLock State Keyboard Speed Disketteless Operation
Description
This item specifies whether the keyboard NumLock is set to on or off at powerup. The typematic rate of the keyboard is specified. When Enable is specified, no configuration error will occur, irrespective of whether a floppy disk drive is connected. Enable is usually specified. Only Disable can be specified. When Enable is specified, no configuration error will occur, irrespective of whether a keyboard is connected. Enable is usually specified. When Enable is specified, setting an environment will not result in a configuration error. The environment is updated automatically. Enable is usually specified. Enable should be specified when a PCMCIA ATA card is used. A boot sequence is specified.
Monitorless Operation Keyboardless Operation
Automatic Configuration
PCMCIA ATA Card First Startup Device Second Startup Device Third Startup Device Fourth Startup Device Power On Self Test
When Quick is specified, no memory test is performed at powerup. Only ENHANCED can be specified. When the contents of the boot sector of the hard disk drive are changed, notes relating to virus protection are displayed. (These notes are also displayed at the first booting after Enable is specified.)
Virus Detection
(6) Advanced Setup

Item
Cache Control ROM Shadowing
Subitem
Cache State F0000HFFFFFH E8000HEFFFFH E0000HE7FFFH D8000HDFFFFH D0000HD7FFFH C0000HCFFFFH
Description
Whether the internal cache is set to on or off is specified. Enable (ON) is usually specified. BIOS ROM shadowing in the individual areas is specified. When the BIOS version is changed, the BIOS areas may be changed. The use of the default settings is recommended. A noncacheable region in the area between D0000H and DFFFFH is specified. Disable is usually specified.
Non Cacheable Region
(7) Power Management

Item
Doze Timer Sleep Timer IDE Standby Timer
Description
Only Disable can be specified. Only Disable can be specified. Only Disable can be specified.
101
B62705EN/03
1.17.5
How to End the Setup
This section describes how to save and end the BIOS setup and how to abort the BIOS setup. 1. Saving and ending the BIOS setup (1) Position the cursor to ExitSetup on the menu screen, then press the Enter key. (2) Position the cursor to Yes, Save and exit the Setup Utility. Press the Enter key. The system is automatically rebooted. 2. Aborting the BIOS setup (1) Position the cursor to ExitSetup on the menu screen, then press the Enter key. (2) Position the cursor to No, Exit the Setup Utility without saving. Press the Enter key. The system is automatically rebooted.
102
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
HARDWARE
This chapter describes structure of CNC control section, connection of units and the functions of PCBs and modules mounted on PCBs.
2.1 GENERAL OF HANDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 2.2 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND LED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 2.3 LIST OF UNIT AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . 142 2.4 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . 146 2.5 REPLACING THE FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 2.6 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . 150 2.7 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 2.8 REPLACING THE LCD BAKLIGHT FOR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 2.9 ADJUSTING THE FLAT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 2.10 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 2.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 166 2.12 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 2.13 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
103
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.1
GENERAL OF HANDWARE
D Series 21
Option board (21TB) S Loader control S Remote buffer (21MB) S Remote buffer
Main board S Main CPU S Memory System software, Macro program, Ladder program, Parameter, and etc. S PMC control S I/O Link control S Servo control S Spindle control S Memory card I/F S LED display
I/O board S Power PCB (builtin) DCDC converter S DI/DO S Reader/puncher I/F S MDI control S Display control S Manual pulse generator control
Option
Main
I/O
2slot 3slot
104
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Series 210
MMCIV S MMC function
Main board S Main CPU S Memory System software, Macro program, Ladder program, Machining program, Parameter, and etc. S PMC control S I/O Link control S Servo control S Spindle control S Memory card I/F S LED display
I/O board S Power PCB (builtin) DCDC converter S DI/DO S Reader/puncher I/F S MDI control S Display control S Manual pulse generator control
MMC
Empty
Main
I/O
Mini slot S HSSB board
2slot 4slot
105
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.2
CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND LED DISPLAY 2.2.1
Main PCB
(1) A16B32000020
D Module mounting location
CPU
(1)
(2)
(CP8 : Battery for memory)
Memory card
ROM ROM ROM ROM IOLINK (JD1A) : I/ O Link
SPDL1 (JA7A) : Serial spindle AOUT1 (JA8A) : Analog spindle SERVO1 (JS1A) : 1st axis (SAM) (3) SERVO1 (JS2A) : 2nd axis (SAM) SERVO1 (JS3A) : 3rd axis (SAM) SERVO1 (JS4A) : 4th axis (SAM)
SCALE1 (JF21) : 1st axis Linear scale signal SCALE1 (JF22) : 2nd axis Linear scale signal SCALE1 (JF23) : 3rd axis Linear scale signal SCALE1 (JF24) : 4th axis Linear scale signal SC ABS (JF25) : Battery for absolute scale
106
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Kind of mounting module

Mounting position (1) Module name PMC Control module d l Module specification A20B29000142 A20B29000143 A20B29010660 A20B29010661 (2) Memory and S i dl module Spindle d l A20B29010760 A20B29010761 A20B29010764 A20B29010765 (3) Servo module A20B29020290 RA1, with I/O LINK RA1, without I/O LINK RA3, with I/O LINK RA3, without I/O LINK SRAM : 256KB, FROM 256KB, with analog spindle control SRAM : 256KB, FROM 256KB, with serial spindle control SRAM : 0KB, FROM 128KB, with analog spindle control SRAM : 0KB, FROM 128KB, with serial spindle control For 3rd, 4th axis Remarks
NOTE 1 256KB SRAM is mounted on the main board. When both this memory & spindle module A20B29010760 or A20B29010761 is used, the total SRAM capacity becomes 512KB. 2 The control circuit for the first and second axes is configured on the main board. D Block diagram
Bus I/ F
SRAM 256KB Memory & spindle
Main CPU
SRAM 0/256KB
PMC Control module I/O Link RA1/RA3
FROM 128/256KB
Spindle control
Serial spindle
D/A converter Memory card
Analog spindle
Memory card I/ F
Control circuit for 1st and 2nd axes Servo module Control circuit for 3rd and 4th axes
Inverter, scale, etc
Inverter, scale, etc
107
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
(2) A16B22010721
CPU
ROM
(CP8: Battery for memory)
(1)
(2)
(3) Memory card
Rotary switch for maintenance IOLINK (JD1A): I/O LINK SPDL1 (JA7A): Serial spindle AOUT1 (JA8A): Analog spindle SERVO1 (JS1A): 1st axis (Servo amp. module) SERVO2 (JS2A): 2nd axis (Servo amp. module) SERVO3 (JS3A): 3rd axis (Servo amp. module) SERVO4 (JS4A): 4th axis (Servo amp. module) SCALE1 (JF21): 1st axis linear scale signal SCALE2 (JF22): 2nd axis linear scale signal SCALE3 (JF23): 3rd axis linear scale signal SCALE4 (JF24): 4th axis linear scale signal SCABS (JF25): Battery for absolute scale
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
D Kind of mounting modules

Position (1) Name RAM module code A20B29010711 A20B29010713 A20B29010714 A20B29010716 A20B29010718 A20B29010719 A20B29000142 A20B29000143 A20B29010660 A20B29010661 A20B29000812 A20B29000814 A20B29000811 A20B29000102 A20B29000103 A20B29010340 A20B29020400 A20B29010700 Remarks SRAM : 256KB, DRAM : 3. 5MB SRAM : 256KB, DRAM : 2. 5MB SRAM : 256KB, DRAM : 3MB SRAM : 128KB, DRAM : 3. 5MB SRAM : 128KB, DRAM : 2. 5MB SRAM : 128KB, DRAM : 3MB RA1, with I/O LINK RA1, without I/O LINK RA3, with I/O LINK RA3, without I/O LINLK 2MB 3MB 4MB With serial spindle control with analog spindle control For 3rd, 4th axis For 1st and 2nd axis For 3rd, 4th axis servo amp. Pulse coder interface For 1st and 2nd servo amp. Pulse coder interface
(2)
PMC control module
(3)
FROM module
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
System control module Servo control module Servo interface module
108
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Block diagram
System control module Bus I/F Calender clock
Main CPU
Spindle control
Serial spindle
BOOTROM
D/A converter
Analog spindle
RAM module Servo control module FROM module Servo I/F module I/O LINK PMC control module Servo control module
Servo amp. module, Pulse coder, Linear scale
Memory card
Memory card interface
Servo I/F module
Servo amp. module, Pulse coder, Linear scale
109
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
(3) A16B22020900
(1) (CP8: Battery for memory) CPU
Memory card
ROM Rotary switch for maintenance IOLINK (JD1A): I/O LINK
ROM for boot
SPDL1 (JA7A): Serial spindle AOUT1 (JA8A): Analog spindle SERV01 (JS1A): 1st axis (Servo amp. module) (2) (3) (4) SERV02 (JS2A): 2nd axis (Servo amp. module) SERV03 (JS3A): 3rd axis (Servo amp. module) SERV04 (JS4A): 4th axis (Servo amp. module) SCALE1 (JF21): 1st axis Linear scale signal SCALE2 (JF22): 2nd axis Linear scale signal SCALE3 (JF23): 3rd axis Linear scale signal SCALE4 (JF24): 4th axis Linear scale signal SCABS (JF25): Battery for absolute scale
110
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Types of modules mounted

Mounting location (1) (2) Module name FROM module PMC control module Specification A20B29010721 A20B29010720 A20B29000142 A20B29000143 A20B29010660 A20B29010661 (3) Memory and spindle module A20B29010760 A20B29010761 A20B29010762 A20B29010763 A20B29010764 A20B29010765 A20B29010766 (4) Servo module A20B29020290 2MB 4MB RA1, with I/O Link RA1, without I/O Link RA3, with I/O Link RA3, without I/O Link SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Analog spindle control SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Serial spindle control SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 128KB, Analog spindle control SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 128KB, Serial spindle control SRAM: 0KB, FROM: 128KB, Analog spindle control SRAM: 0KB, FROM: 128KB, Serial spindle control SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Serial spindle control For third/fourth axis Remarks
NOTE A servo control circuit for the first/second axis is mounted on the main board. D Block diagram
Memory and spindle module Bus I/F FROM
Main CPU
SRAM
Spindle control FROM module A/D conversion I/O LINK PMC control module
Serial spindle
Analog spindle
Memory card
First/second axis control circuit Memory card I/F Servo module SRAM Third/fourth axis control circuit
SVM, pulse coder, linear scale, etc.
SVM, pulse coder, linear scale, etc.
111
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
D LED display A16B22010721 A16B22020900 (1) LED status in power on routine (Green LED) j:OFF J:ON
STATUS jjjj STATUS JJJJ Power off State in which software is being loaded to DRAM after poweron, or when CPU operation is stopped because of an error Waiting for other CPUs answer (ID setting) Detect other CPUs answer (Finished of ID setting) FANUC BUS initialized PMC initialization finished All PCBs configuration finished PMC initial running finished Waiting for digital servo initialization All initialized, running
STATUS JjJJ STATUS jjJJ STATUS JJjJ STATUS jJjJ STATUS JjjJ STATUS JJJj STATUS jJJj STATUS Jjjj
(2) LED status in power of alarm j:OFF J:ON

STATUS jJjj ALARM JJj STATUS jJjj ALARM jJJ STATUS jJjj ALARM jJj RAM parity alarm occured in main CPU board Servo alarm (watch dog alarm) occured Other system alarm occured
A16B32000020
(1) LED status in power on routine (Green LED) j:OFF J:ON

STATUS jjjj STATUS JJjj STATUS Jjjj Power in not turned on Immediately after poweron or when the CPU is not operating due to the occurrence of an error Normal operation underway
(2) LED status in power of alarm j:OFF J:ON

ALARM JJjj ALARM jJjj ALARM jjjj Watch dog timer alarm is generated (Servo alarm) Other alarm is generated normal operation underway
112
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.2.2
I/O Printed Circuit Board
(1) A16B2201073V, A16B2201092V
D Module mounting lacation
MPG (JA3B): Manual pulse generator Power supply PCB DCIN (CP1A): Control unit 24V input DCOUT (CP1B): 24V output for CRT
(1) I/O: Machine side DI/DO I/O: Matrix DI/DO for machine
CRT (JA1): CRT video signal MDI (JA2): MDI key signal RS2321 (JD5A): RS232C 1st channel RS2322 (JD5B): RS232C 2nd channel
I/O: Machine side DI/DO I/O: Machine side DI/DO
113
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
(2) A16B2201091V, A16B2202098V, A16B3200012V

MPG (JA3B): Manual pulse generator Power supply PCB DCIN (CP1A): Control unit 24V input DCOUT (CP1B): 24V output for CRT
(1) I/O: Machine side DI/DO I/O: Machine side DI/DO
CRT (JA1): CRT video signal MDI (JA2): MDI key signal RS2321 (JD5A): RS232C 1st channel RS2322 (JD5B): RS232C 2nd channel
114
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
(3) A16B2203007V
RS2321 (JD5A): RS232C 1st channel Power supply PCB DCIN (CP1A): Control unit 24V input DCOUT (CP1B): 24V output for CRT
(1) I/O: Machine side DI/DO I/O: Machine side DI/DO
CRT (JA1): CRT video signal MDI (JA2): MDI key signal MPG (JA3): Manual pulse generator RS2322 (JD5B): RS232C 2nd channel
D Kind of module
Position (1) Name Graphic module Code A20B29000310 Remarks Graphic control
115
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.2.3
Power Supply Printed Circuit Board
(1) A20B10050421, A20B10050420
D Module mounting location (Mounted on the I/O printed circuit board)
D LED display
A green LED is provided at position A in the figure above. The LED lights when +24 V is input.
116
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.2.4
Option 1 Board
D LED display
Status of communication function
Name
Option 1 board
Specifications
A16B22000913
Function
Remote buffer
STATUS ALARM
jjjj jjj
D Communication function j:OFF,

STATUS JJJJ ALARM Jjj STATUS jJ ALARM jjj STATUS ll ALARM jjj
J:ON,
:Dont care l:Blink
Initial status after power on (CPU is not run yet) Remote buffer CPU initialized, running Communication error occured from OPTION 1 board
D Location of modules
Connector Connector Name Number Use
LED CPU
(1) R2323 JD5C R4221 JD6A RS232C serial port RS422 serial port
Communication function ROM
JNA FBUS back plane connector
D Type of modules
No.
(1)
Name
Communication control module
Specifications
Function
Display of system configuration screen

COMMUNICATION MODULE
A20B29000361 Communication control
117
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.2.5
Loader Control Board
Name
Loader control board
Code
A16B22020880
Function
Loader control function
D LED display transition when the power is turned on j: OFF, J: ON

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LED display STATUS jjjj STATUS JJJJ STATUS jJJJ STATUS JjJJ STATUS jjJJ STATUS JJjJ STATUS jJjJ STATUS jJJj STATUS Jjjj The power is off The power has just been turned on, or the CPU is not operating RAM is initialized The software ID has been set. The keys are initialized. All data is cleared. Software initialization is being awaited (wait state 1) Software initialization is being awaited (wait state 2) The position coder is initialized Digital servo initialization is being awaited Initialization has been completed (steady state) Description
D LED display upon occurrence of an error j:OFF,

No. 1 2 3 LED display STATUS jJjj ALARM Jjj STATUS jJjj ALARM jjJ STATUS jJjj ALARM jjj
J:ON
Description
Parity alarm in loader control Servo alarm in loader control Alarm other than parity or servo alarm
118
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Location of modules
LED
Connector Connector number Use name
BRAKE CNBK ESP CNPW
Brake output Emergency stop DI/DO for workpiece feeder DI/DO for teach pendant FANUC I/O LINK Servo waveform check output
(1)
(2)
IO1 TP CNWF CNTP
IOLINK JD1A AOUT JA8
(3) (4) (5)
AMP1 AMP2 AMP3 AMP4 IO- 2
JS1A JS2A JS3A JS4A CRM1
Servo amplifier for first axis Servo amplifier for second axis Servo amplifier for third axis Servo amplifier for fourth axis DI/ DO for loader main body AMP1
No.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Name
DRAM mod le module PMC module d l Servo module Servo module
Specifications
Function
Display of system configuration screen

DRAM:4MB DRAM:2MB PMC MODULE: BSI+SLC PMC MODULE: BSI SERVO 3/4 AXIS
A20B29010941 Loader system RAM A20B29010942 A20B29000142 PMC control A20B29000143 A20B29020290 Servo control 3rd or 4th axis A20B29020290 Servo control 1st or 2nd axis
(5)
SERVO 1/2 AXIS
119
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.2.6
HSSB Interface Board
2.2.6.1
Parts layout (1) Interface board for CNC B
Drawing Number : A20B20020210
SW1 ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 AL2(RED) AL1(RED)
JNA
COP7 (HSSB)
(2) Interface Board for Personal Computer type A
COP7 (HSSB)
LED2 (GREEN) LED1 (RED)
(3) Interface Board for Personal Computer type B
COP7 (HSSB)
LED2 (GREEN) LED1 (RED)
120
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.2.6.2
System block diagram (1) Interface B board for CNC
JNA BUS INTERFACE
HSSB CONTROLLER Optical Module
COP7 (HSSB)
COMMON RAM
(2) Interface board for personal computer

(Includes type 1 and 2)
ISABUS CARD EDGE
Decode circuit HSSB CONTROLLER
COP7
Optical Module (HSSB)
Setting Switch
JJJ
: Interface board for PC type 2 only
2.2.6.3
Configuration switch
ON OFF SW1 8421 ALL=OFF ON OFF SW1 8421 ALL=OFF
Interfacece Board I/F Board for CNC B
Setting This is the Maintenance setting. The start up menu is displayed. The operation of BOOT and IPL can be done from PC.
This is the Normal setting. The start up menu is not displayed. So, the operation of BOOT and IPL is skipped.
121
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.2.6.4
LED display (1) LED Display (General)
PCB Spec Spec. A20B20020210 A20B80010300 A20B81000100 Name I/F board for CNC B I/F board for PC Type 1 I/F board for PC Type 2 LED RED AL1 LED1 LED1 ON ON RED AL2 LED2 LED2 ON Communication is stopped. Parity Error at common RAM is occured. CNC status is good. GREEN Status
: DONT CARE
(2) LED Display (Status)

LED Status 7seg.LED . ST4 to ST1 4321 JJJJ JJJj JJjJ JJjj Jjjj jJJj jJjJ jJjj jjJJ jjJj Stat s Status
J : ON
j : OFF
Start up status after poweron. Initializing for HSSB board. Executing a boot operation by PC. Displaying CNC screen on CRT of PC. Start up has been completed and the system is now in normal operation mode. The thermal error occured in the Intelligent Terminal. Communication is not ready. Parity Error at common RAM is occured. Communication Error. Battery alarm occureed in the Intelligent Terminal.
122
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.2.7
MMCIV PCB
2.2.7.1
A02B0207C020, A02B0207C021, A02B0207C022 (1) PART LAYOUT
MARKING UPPER CPU

910
LOWER ALARM JA1B JA1A JD5F LCD ADJUST
FUNCTION LED INDICATOR
TMA 9 4
11 12 8 7 13
LED STATUS
GND
NC CRT CRT R2321 R2322
DRAM MODULE 1
NC VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL SERIAL PORT 1 VARIABLE REGISTOR FOR LCD DISPLAY FLOPPY DISK UNIT
ODP SOCKET
DRAM MODULE 2
6 SWA VRA1
JD5G SERIAL PORT 2
FDD SWA5 TMA3 SWA4 SWA3 TMA1 BIOS ROM

+5V GND
JD8
TMA2
CENTRO EX KEY
JD9 JD21
PARALLEL PORT (CENTRONICS) EXTENDEN KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD CD32A FULL KEYBOARD
SWA2
MEM CARD CNA JNA
MEMORY CARD (PCMCIA)
SWA1
MOUSE
CD32B MOUSE
HARD DISK UNIT BACKPLANE CONNECTOR MEMORY CARD SOCKET THERMAL : Check pin : Jumper plugs
INPUT OUTPUT I/O
123
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
(2) ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS
DRAM Module 1 DRAM Module 2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
CPU Socket
(18)
CPU i486SX
(7)(8)(9)(10)(11)
PCMCIA Socket
(19) (12)(13)(14)
(15) (16) (17)
(20)
LED
JAMPER PLUGS
No. (1) (2) (3) (4) Name SWA3 SWA4 TMA3 3 SWA5 Description Specifies S ecifies the use of the CPU and CPU socket The board d i486SX mounted is s used (1) SWA3 (2) SWA4 i486DX2 CPU on CPU socket k is i used (Note) (1) SWA3 (2) SWA4 Location 1 2 3 (3) TMA3 1 2 (4) SWA5 3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
(3) TMA3
1 2
(4) SWA5
3 2 1
NOTE In this setting, i486DX CPU is necessary. MMCIV cannot run without i486DX CPU on CPU socket.
124
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
No. (5) (6) (12) ( ) (13) (14) (15) ( ) (16) (17)
Name SWA9 SWA10 SWA6 S 6 SWA7 SWA8 SWA11 SWA12 SWA13
Description S ecifies whether Specifies the display unit is the LCD or CRT An LCD is used (5) SWA9 1 2 3
Location (13) SWA7 (12) SWA6 # (14) SWA8

1 2 3
(16) SWA12 (15) SWA11 # (17) SWA13

3 2 1
(6) 1 2 3 SWA10 (5) SWA9 1 2 3
See the next page
An CRT is used (7) (8) ( ) (9) (10) (11) TMA4 TMA6 TMA TMA7 TMA8 TMA9
(13) SWA7 (12) SWA6 # (14) SWA8

1 2 3
(16) ( ) SWA12 (15) SWA11 # (17) SWA13

3 2 1
(6) 1 2 3 SWA10
Eliminates flicker of the NC screen
TMA TMA TMA TMA TMA 4 6 7 8 9 1 2
If the NC screen flickers, try moving the jumper jum er plug lug until the flicker is eliminated eliminated.
ADJUSTING SWA6 TO SWA13 SWA6 to SWA13 and the BIOS display unit setting must be set according to the actual display unit to be connected. SWA6 to SWA13 and the BIOS display unit setting are factoryadjusted according to the users specifications. The settings must be modified in the following cases: i) When the BIOS setup parameters, including the display unit setting, are cleared or destroyed. (The default display unit (LCD) is selected.) When the BIOS display unit setting is changed such that it does not correspond to the connected display unit
ii)
iii) When the connected display unit is changed such that it does not correspond to the BIOS settings. The tables below list the screen statuses that depend on the jumper plug and BIOS display unit settings, and the actual display unit connected. D When an LCD is connected
BIOS SETTING SWA6 to 13 LCD CRT LCD (Default) (Defa lt) f l SIMULTANEOUS (LCD & CRT) f n1 CRT L n1
f : A normal screen is displayed. l, L : Nothing is displayed. n1 : A dark screen (half luminance) is displayed.
125
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
D When a CRT is connected

BIOS SETTING SWA6 to 13 LCD CRT LCD (Default) (Defa lt) n2 L SIMULTANEOUS (LCD & CRT) n2 f CRT l f
f : A normal screen is displayed. l, L : Nothing is displayed. n2 : The displayed screen is overly bright (about double luminance) and all characters are blurred. * If the display unit is used for an extended period with these settings, the lifetime of the unit will be shortened. When nothing is displayed with the settings indicated by a solid star L, adjust the setting as described below: (1) Adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the opposite of the actually connected display unit. When a CRT is connected, adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the LCD positions. When an LCD is connected, adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the CRT positions. (2) Change the BIOS setting to SIMULTANEOUS. (3) Set SWA6 to SWA13 according the actually connected display unit. When nothing is displayed with the settings indicated by a hollow star l, modify the settings of SWA6 to SWA13. BIOS SETUP UTILITY SCREEN (SECOND PAGE)
Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1.00) (c)Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved Page 2 of 3 ** Device Feature Control ** Serial Port: Track Ball: Parallel Port: 01ABh 02CDh 03EFh Floppy Boot: Enabled
Internal Cache: Enabled
Display: LCD Video Mode Graphics : Normal Video Mode Text: Normal Vertical Compensation: Disabled
LCD (default) CRT SIMULTANEOUS

Esc Menu F2 Sys Info Field Space/ PgUp/Dn Value Page
SETTING THE VARIABLE RESISTOR

No. (20) Name VRA1 Description The video signal voltage level is adjusted. This setting is valid only for the MMC screen when an LCD is connected. Method to specify This item is Factoryadjusted. The screen may flicker depending on the length of the cable used. In this case, follow the procedure described below. 1. Display the LCD adjustment screen (see the next page.) 2. Make adjustment so that an 8shade gray scale pattern displayed on the screen does not flicker.
126
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
LCD ADJUSTMENT SCREEN A gray scale graphic pattern is displayed on the LCD screen. (1) Program name The name of the program for LCD screen adjustment is LCDCHECK. EXE. The program is contained on standard driver/library disk (A02B0207K700) version 01.2. and up. (2) Activation method Insert the standard driver/library disk in drive A, and enter the following command.
C:> A:LCDCHECK
(3) Display screen A gray scale pattern is displayed on the screen. It has 8 different shades ranging from black at the left to white at the right. The lower half screen consists of vertical stripes interlaced at onebit intervals. Rough sketch of the pattern
LCD CHECK PATTERN Ver1.0 for FANUC MMCIV Push any key to terminate process.
Black Gray scale with 8 different shades. The lower half of the screen has vertical stripes interlaced at onebit intervals.
White
(4) Operation Pressing anykey erases the gray scale pertern and causes the DOS prompt to appear.
127
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
(4) LED INDICATOR
The MMCIV printed circuit board has two rows of status indicate LEDs at the top of the front panel: The upper row consists of four green STATUS LEDs. The lower row consists of three red ALARM LEDs. In the accompanying tables, the LED statuses are represented as follows: : : : Not lit Lit Dont care
MMCIV
1234 STATUS jjjj ALARM jjj
(1) Normal statuses

No No. 1 2 3 LED STATUS ALARM MMCIV STATUS The power is turned off. The MMCIV reset status is released. The hard disk drive is being accessed.
(2) Alarm statuses

No No. 1 2 3 LED STATUS ALARM MMCIV STATUS An NMI occurs in the MMCIV CPU. The ambient temperature around the hard disk drive is below 5C or above 55C. A parity alarm occurred in the backplane DRAM.
128
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.2.7.2
A16B22030180 (1) Parts layout
TMA4, TMA69
SW1
SWA613 Fuse (+3.3V) Card PC
LED (STATUS/ALARM) :State indicator MC CRT (JA1B) :NC video signal in CRT (JA1A) :Video signal out R2321 (JD5F) :Serial port 1 R2322 (JD5G) :Serial port 2 LCD ADJUST :Adjuster for LCD display
Fuse (+12V) DRAM module
FDD(JD8) CENTRO (JD9) KEYBOARD (CD32A)

HDD unit
:Floppy disk unit :Parallel port (Centronics) :Full keyboard :Fuse indicator :+3.3V indicator
LED (FUSE) LED (POWER)
MOUSE (CD32B)
:Mouse
129
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
(2) Setting points

D Setting of Short Plugs
Name SW1, SWA6 13 SWA6-13 Description Set up according to the connected display y unit (LCD ( or CRT) CRT SW1 SWA10 SWA9 Setting SWA13 SWA12 SWA11 SWA6 SWA7 SWA8 LCD SW1 SWA10 SWA9 SWA13 SWA12 SWA11 SWA6 SWA7 SWA8 TMA4, 6-9 Eliminates flicker f the h NC screen of TMA9 TMA8 TMA7 TMA6 TMA4 If the NC screen flickers try i h j l moving the jumper plug until the flicker is eliminated
* It is not necessary to set up the BIOS according to the using display. D Setting of variable resistor
Name VRA1
Description
Setting
Adjust the voltage level of Factoryadjusted the video signal. If the screen is flickering, please adjust (Effective only for the MMC by this resistor referring to Page 127. screen when the LCD is connected.)
130
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
(3) LED display
The details of the LED display on the new MMCIV board is as follows. : Not lit MMCIV : Lit : Dont care
1234 STATUS jjjj ALARM jjj
(1) LED (STATUS/ALARM) Normal status

No No. 1 2 3 LED STATUS ALARM
Details The power it turned off. The HDD is being accessed The MMCIV reset is released
Alarm status
No No. 1 2 LED STATUS ALARM Details The ambient temperature around the HDD is below 5C or above 55C Parity alarm occurred in the back panel DRAM
(2) LED (FUSE) The new MMCIV board has two fuses in it. This LED indicates that either fuse melted down. In this case please replace fuse according to the Subsec.2.5.2. (3) LED (POWER) This LED indicates that the power supply circuit for +3.3V become abnormal state or the fuse for +3.3V melts down. If this LED turns on, please replace the fuse or the board.
131
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.2.8
Intelligent Terminal
D Parts layout
*
Specification : A16B33000010, 0011/03A or later
BAT1(BATTERY)
CN1(LCD)
*
VR1
JD33(RS2321) CA39 (FAN) JD34(RS2322) JD9(CENTRO) PC CARD CD32(KEYBOARD)
HSSBC
SW1
COP7(HSSB)
CN2 (FDD power)

SW2
CN8(HDD)
GND 5V +5V 24V +3.3V 24V 12V 12V
SW4
SW3 SW5 SW4 SW5 SW3
JNS (ISA extension backplane connector) CD34(FDD) Thermostat
* Fuse (5A)
CP5(+24V)
: Check pin CN7 (LCD power) CNH2 CNH1 : Jumper plug
* * The positions differ on the printed circuit boards of comprehensive version 01A and 02A.
132
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Adjustment
PC CARD
LED (5) (2) (1) (4) (3)
(6)
(1) Jumper plug settings

No. Name (1) (2) SW1 SW2 Description Sets the dis display unit lay unit. Uses a color TFT dis display lay. Uses a monochrome display STN dis lay. (3) (4) ( ) (5) SW3 SW4 SW5 Reserved adjusted The factory factoryadjusted setting should not be h g d O f th changed. One of these set two o options tions is set. SW2 (2) SW2 (2) A (5) SW4 (4) (1) B SW5 SW3 (3) A (5) (4) (3) Note: SW4 may be connected for some specific applications. (6) VR1 Adjusts the view angle of the monochrome STN display. Set the resistor to the position where the optimum display is obtained. B SW5 SW4 SW3 (1) SW1 Setting SW1
(6)
VR1
133
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
D LED display
DA16(GREEN) DA17(GREEN) DA18(GREEN) DA19(RED) DA20(RED) CD32
COP7
CN2
Name DA20 DA19
Status Indicates that a battery alarm has occurred. Replace the battery of the intelligent terminal. Indicates that the HSSB transfer has been aborted. The following causes are possible: The CNC is turned off. The optical fiber cable is disconnected. The CNC or PC interface board is defective. Lit while the CNC is operating normally. HDD access lamp Lit while +5V is being supplied.
DA18 DA17 DA16
D ISA extension board (1) Board that can be used For an intelligent terminal, up to two ISA extension boards, as shown below, can be used.
Height of the components on the back surface: Up to 3.81 mm
Height of the components on the front surface: Up to 13.34 mm Feet of metal vibration isolator 5 79mm to 113mm (If this range is exceeded, the board cannot be held tight by a vibration isolator.) 5
20
20
Up to 170mm
Unit: mm
NOTE FANUC will not ensure the operation nor perform the maintenance of a commercial ISA extension board.
134
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
(2) Procedure for mounting the ISA extension board (See the below figure.)
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the metal vibration isolator. Insert the board connector into the slot. Fasten the board using the screw. Fasten the metal vibration isolator, using the screw, while pressing it against the board. When two or more ISA extension boards are mounted, the board mounted in slot A must be shorter than that mounted in slot B. Otherwise, the boards cannot be held tight by different metal vibration isolators.
Slot B
Metal vibration isolator A
Screw Slot A Metal vibration isolator B
Screw hole B Screw hole A
Mounting the ISA Extension Board
D Notes (1) Address map
D The memory space between D00000h and FFFFFFh is used by the intelligent terminal and cannot be used by the ISA board. The other areas are used as in an IBM PC compatible personal computer. D The I/O space is used as in an IBM PC compatible personal computer. No area is exclusively used by the intelligent terminal. D The setup specifies COM1, COM2, and a parallel port. D The intelligent terminal uses the following IRQ signals: IRQ1 : Keyboard IRQ3 : COM2 IRQ4 : COM1 IRQ6 : Floppy disk drive IRQ7 : Parallel port IRQ12 : Mouse IRQ14 : Internal hard disk drive IRQ3, IRQ4, and IRQ7 can be changed by the BIOS setup. D The intelligent terminal uses the following DRQ signal: DRQ2 : Floppy disk drive
135
(2) Interrupt and DMA request
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
(3) Others
When any of the following conditions is satisfied, normal operation may not be possible: D The ISA bus signal is subjected to pullup/pulldown processing. D The refresh cycle of the ISA bus is used. Other conditions may be added in the future.
(4) Troubleshooting
Problem (1) The power is turned on, but nothing i displayed. is di l d No Countermeasure ( : Yes Are all LEDs off? Yes Y Go (11) Yes Go (2) : No)
Is DA19 (red LED) on? (See the description of the LED display.) No Is the CNC interface board as shown below? Yes
The intelligent terminal type is not set to within the correct temperature range. (See Section 2.11, Environmental Requirement.)
: ON : OFF
or
ST1 ST4
Interface board A for thin slot
Interface board B for minislot
No Are the settings of SW1 to SW5 correct? Yes Is the printed circuit board defective? (2) DA19 is on. (HSSB is i not ready.) d ) Is the optical fiber cable connected? Yes Is the NC turned on? Yes No N No N Connect the cable. No Correct the settings.
(1) See the description of the jumper plug settings.
Turn the NC on.
Is the printed circuit board or NC interface board defective? (3) The LCD backlight blinks. A FAN alarm or battery alarm has been issued. Check whether the fan of the intelligent terminal has stopped or whether the intelligent terminal has issued a battery alarm (DA20 is on). Check the BIOS parameters. Countermeasure ( : Yes Has any fuse on the printed circuit board blown? No Does the status change when a cable of the peripheral equipment is disconnected? No Is the printed circuit board defective? Yes Check the cable. Yes : No)
(4)
COM or LPT cannot be used.
Cause (11) The power supply circuit is not operating normally.
Replace the fuse. Remove the cause.
136
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.2.9
Intelligent Terminal 2
D Specification : A20B21000240
CN3 (INVERTER)
CNH1
CNH2
+24V +12V +5V 5V 12V 24V
Thermal
TM10
+3.3V
BAT1 (BATTERY)
JNS (ISA Extension Backplane)
TM1
CN5 (PC CARD)
HSSBC
CD37 (TOUCH PANEL)
CN8 (HDD)
SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4
(FDD Power)
SW3
SW2
SW1
CN2
JD34 (RS2322)
FUSE (5A)
CP5 (+24V) CD34 (FDD) CD32B (MOUSE)
JD33 (RS2321)
Thermal
JD9 (CENTRO)
CD32A (KEYBOARD)
COP7 (HHSB)
LED
137
CN1 (LCD)
CN10 (PCMCIA I/F)
GND
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
D Adjustment
(7)(6)(5)(4)
(3)
(2) (1)
LED
(1) Setting of Rotary Switches
No. (1) (2) (3)
Name SW1 SW2 SW3
Description 15 to 04 bit of I/O port address used by I.T.2 (Default settings are SW3=0, (Default settings are SW2=2, (Default settings are SW1=8)
Notes Note that this settings are not duplicated with the space using by IBMPC compatible personal computers.
(2) Setting of short Plugs

No. (4) (5) (6) (7) Name SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 Description Reserved Never Change Location
B : Open : Short A (7) (6) (5) (4)
138
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D LED display
COP7 JD33 JD34 JD9 CN2 DA59 (GREEN) DA60 (GREEN) DA61 (GREEN) DA62 (RED) DA63 (RED)
Name DA59 DA60 DA61 DA62
Color GREEN GREEN GREEN RED
Status Power is turned on (+5V). HDD access LED. CNC status is normal. HSSB is not ready. The cause is as follows. D CNC poer is not turned on. D Optical fiber cable is not connected. D Something goes wrong with the interface board for CNC. D Something goes wrong with the I.T.2.
DA63
RED
Battery alarm. The battery on I.T.2 is exhausted. Please exchange it.
139
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
D Mounting Position of Maintenance Supplies

Bettery
Fan
LCD Backlight
Fuse Socket
Fuse
D Specification of Maintenance Supplies

Fuse Fan
Name Battery
Specification A02B0200K102 A13B0172K020 A90L00010423#105 A61L00010163#BL
LCD Backlight
140
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Trouble Shooting
Problem (1) Power supply is good, but nothing di l displayed. d Are LED all off? No Measure ( : Yes Yes Y Go (11) Yes Go (2) : No)
Is DA62 (Red, Refer to Item LED display 3) on? No Are LED displaying as below figure? Yes
I.T.2 is not in proper temperature. (Refer to Sec.2.11.)

: ON : OFF
or
ST1 ST4
I/F board A for thin slot No Are the SW1 to SW7 correct? Yes Is the P.C.B. not good? (2) HSSB is not ready. (DA62 is i off.) ff )
I/F board B for mini slot N No Change setting
Is the optical fiber cable connected? Yes Is the CNC on? Yes No N
No N
Connect.
Turn on the CNC.
Is the P.C.B. or the HSSB I/F board (CNC side) not good? (3) (4) LCD backlight blinks. COM, LPT is not usable. Cause (11) Power is not good. Periodical blink indicates a fan alarm or a battery alarm. Check whether the fan is not rotating or a battery alarm occur (DA63 is on). Check BIOS parameters. Countermeasure ( : Yes Has the fuse burnt out? No If all user cables are disconnect, has the state been changed? No Is the P.C.B. not good? Yes Check user cables. Yes : No)
Exchange the fuse. Check the cause.
141
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.3
LIST OF UNIT AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 2.3.1
Control Unit P.C.B.
Name
Power supply P.C.B. A Power supply P.C.B. B
Specification
A20B10050421 A20B10050420 A16B32000020 A16B22010721 A16B22020900
Remarks
Small capacity Large capacity Ordering No. A02B0210H001 Ordering No. A02B0179H001 Ordering No. A02B0218H001 A02B0219H002 Ordering No. A02B0179H011 A02B0218H010#A1 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#A2 Ordering No. A02B0179H016 A02B0218H010#B1 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#B2 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#B3 Ordering No. A02B0179H013 A02B0218H010#C1 Ordering No. A02B0179H015 A02B0218H010#C2 Ordering No. A02B0179H017 A02B0218H010#D1 Ordering No. A02B0179H018 A02B0218H010#D2 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#D3 Ordering No. A02B0210H010 Ordering No. A02B0210H011 Ordering No. A02B0210H012 Ordering No. A02B0210H013 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#E0 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#E1 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#E2 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#E5 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#E6 Ordering No. A02B0218H010#E7 2slot 2slot 3slot 4slot (For Series 210 with MMCIV)
21-TB
f f f
210-TB
f
21-MB
f f f
210-MB
f
Main board
f f f f f
f f f f f f
Bultin I/O board A1 Bultin I/O board A2 Bultin I/O board B1 Bultin I/O board B2 Bultin I/O board B3 Bultin I/O board C1 Bultin I/O board C2 Bultin I/O board D1 Bultin I/O board D2 Bultin I/O board D3 Bultin I/O board A Bultin I/O board B Bultin I/O board C Bultin I/O board D Bultin I/O board E0 Bultin I/O board E1 Bultin I/O board E2 Bultin I/O board E5 Bultin I/O board E6 Bultin I/O board E7
A16B22010732 A16B22010737 A16B22010910 A16B22010915 A16B22010918 A16B22010922 A16B22010927 A16B32000120 A16B22020980 A16B32000125 A16B22020985 A16B22020988 A16B32000030 A16B22030040 A16B32000031 A16B22030041 A16B32000035 A16B22030045 A16B32000036 A16B22030046 A16B22030070 A16B22030071 A16B22030072 A16B22030075 A16B22030076 A16B22030077 A20B10060260 A20B20000880 A20B20000890 A20B20020180 A16B22000913 A16B22020880
f f f f
f f f f f
f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
Back panel
Option 1 board (remote buffer) Loader control board
142
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
Name
MMCIV board DRAM module DRAM module HDD unit New MMCIV main board Card PC DRAM module 4MB HDD unit
Specification
A02B0207C020 A02B0207C022 A76L05000005 A76L05000006 A02B0207C051 A16B22030180 CPU 486SX CPU 486DX2 4MB 8MB 256MB
Remarks
21-TB
210-TB
f f f f f f f f f f
21-MB
210-MB
f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
A15L00010052#2 In new MMCIV board A76L05000007 A02B0207C054 In new MMCIV board In new MMCIV board
Highspeed serial bus A20B20020210 interface board (CNC side) Highspeed serial bus i t f interface b board d (PC side) id ) Intelligent terminal Intelligent terminal type 2 Inverter P.C.B. Touch panel controller Card PC (DRAM 4MB) Card PC (DRAM 16MB) Card PC (DRAM 24MB) HDD unit ISA extension unit (with ISA extension) ISA extension unit (without ISA extension) ISA extension backplane for intelligent terminal Soft key P.C.B. for intelligent terminal A20B80010300 (A20B80010581) A20B81000100 A16B33000010 A16B33000011 A20B21000240 A20B20020500 A20B80010620 A13B0178H001 A13B0178H002 A13B0178H003 A13B0178H030 A13B0178H040 A13B0178H049 A20B20020240 A20B10060791 In the intelligent terminal type 2 In the intelligent terminal type 2 In the intelligent terminal type 2 In the intelligent terminal type 2 In the intelligent terminal type 2 In the intelligent terminal type 2 In the intelligent terminal type 2 In the intelligent terminal type 2 Type 1 Type 2 DRAM 8MB DRAM 12MB
f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f
143
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.3.2
Others
Name
2slot 2slot Control unit rack 2slot 3slot 4slot 7.2 monochrome LCD control board 8.4 color LCD control board 9.5 monochrome LCD control board 9.5 color LCD control board Horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI Separate 9 CRT Separate 7.2 monochrome LCD Separate 9.5 monochrome LCD Separate 8.4 color LCD Separate small MDI
Specification
A02B0210C001 A02B0210C011 A02B0218C002 A02B0218C003 A02B0218C004 A20B20010840 A16B23000082 A20B20010840 A16B23000081 A02B0210C041#TA A02B0210C041#TAS A02B0210C111 A02B0200C081 A02B0200C115 A02B0218C050 A02B0210C120#TA A02B0210C120#TAS A02B0210C122#TA A02B0210C122#TAS A02B0218C120#TR A02B0218C120#TS A02B0218C121#TR A02B0218C121#TS A02B0200C071#TBR A02B0200C071#TBS A02B0200C072#TBR A02B0200C072#TBS A02B0200C065#TBR A02B0200C065#TBS A02B0200C066#TBR A02B0200C066#TBS A13B0172B001 A13B0172B002 A13B0172B021 A13B0172B022
Remarks
For Series 21TB (FANUC) For Series 21TB (GEFANUC) For Series 21/210TB/MB For Series 21TB/MB For Series 210TB/MB
For Series 21/210TB (English MDI) For Series 21/210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 21/210TB For Series 21/210TB For Series 21/210TB For Series 21/210TB For Series 21/210TB (English MDI) For Series 21/210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 21/210TB (English MDI) For Series 21/210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 21/210TB (English MDI) For Series 21/210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 21/210TB (English MDI) For Series 21/210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210TB (English MDI) For Series 210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210TB (English MDI) For Series 210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210TB (English MDI) For Series 210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210TB (English MDI) For Series 210TB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210TB/MB 9.5TFT color LCD,8MBmemory, without ISA extension For Series 210TB/MB 9.5TFT color LCD,12MBmemory, without ISA extension For Series 210TB/MB 9.5STN color LCD,8MBmemory, without ISA extension For Series 210TB/MB 9.5STN color LCD,12MBmemory, without ISA extension For Series 210TB/MB 9.5TFT color LCD,8MBmemory, with ISA extension For Series 210TB/MB 9.5TFT color LCD,12MBmemory, with ISA extension For Series 210TB/MB 9.5STN color LCD,8MBmemory, with ISA extension For Series 210TB/MB 9.5STN color LCD,12MBmemory, with ISA extension
Separate fullsize full size MDI
14 color CRT/MDI
9 5 color LCD/MDI 9.5
Intelligent terminal
A13B0172B101 A13B0172B102 A13B0172B121 A13B0172B122
144
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
Name
Specification
A13B0178B001
Remarks
For Series 210TB/MB 10.4TFT color LCD, without soft key, without touch panel For Series 210TB/MB 10.4TFT color LCD, with soft key For Series 210TB/MB 10.4TFT color LCD, with touch panel For Series 21/210MB (English MDI) For Series 21/210MB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 21/210MB For Series 21/210MB For Series 21/210MB For Series 21/210MB For Series 21/210MB For Series 21/210MB (English MDI) For Series 21/210MB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 21/210MB (English MDI) For Series 21/210MB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 21/210MB (English MDI) For Series 21/210MB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 21/210MB (English MDI) For Series 21/210MB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210MB (English MDI) For Series 210MB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210MB (English MDI) For Series 210MB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210MB (English MDI) For Series 210MB (Symbolic MDI) For Series 210MB (English MDI) For Series 210MB (Symbolic MDI)
Intelligent terminal type 2
A13B0178B002 A13B0178B003 A02B0210C041#MA A02B0210C041#MAS A02B0210C111 A02B0200C100 A02B0200C081 A02B0200C115 A02B0218C050 A02B0210C120#MA A02B0210C120#MAS A02B0210C122#MA A02B0210C122#MAS A02B0218C120#MR A02B0218C120#MS A02B0218C121#MR A02B0218C121#MS A02B0200C071#MBR A02B0200C071#MBS A02B0200C072#MBR A02B0200C072#MBS A02B0200C065#MBR A02B0200C065#MBS A02B0200C066#MBR A02B0200C066#MBS
Horizontal type 9CRT/MDI Separate 9CRT Separate 9PDP Separate 7.2 monochrome LCD Separate 9.5 monochrome LCD Separate 8.4 color LCD Separate small MDI
Separate fullsize full size MDI
14 color CRT/MDI
9 5 color LCD/MDI 9.5
145
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.4 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES

2.4.1
Removing
(1) Pull the latches of the module socket outwards. (Fig.(a)) (2) Pull out the module upward. (Fig.(b))
2.4.2
Insertion
(1) Insert the new module board diagonally with BSIDE outward. (Fig.(b)) (2) While pushing on the upper edge of the module board, raise it until it is locked. (Fig.(c))
(a)
No.1 pin
(b)
(c)
146
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.5
REPLACING THE FUSES 2.5.1
Replacing the Fuses for Power Supply of Control Unit
When a fuse builtin I/O board blows in the power supply unit of the CNC, find and correct the cause of the failure and replace the fuse. Fig.2.5.1 shows the fuse mounting diagram. Fuse specification : A60L00010046 #7.5R
I/O board Fuse
Fig.2.5.1 Mounting positions of fuses in the power supply unit
2.5.2
Replacing the Fuses for New MMCIV
When fuses on the new MMCIV board melted down, find the cause and take measures. After that, replace the fuse.
Name Fuse ORDERING NUMBER A02B0207K100 REMARKS 0.5A Fuse for +12V 1, 5.0A Fuse for +3.3V 1
147
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.5.3
Replacing the Fuses for Intelligent Terminal 2
WARNING Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuit section (marked and shielded with a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the highvoltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will get an electric shock. (1) At first, Check the cause that the fuse has been broken and remove the cause. (2) Prepare a new Fuse (A13B0172K020). (3) Make sure that I.T.2 is turned off the power. (4) Enable to work from rear side of I.T.2 by taking it out from panel, etc. (5) Remove the old fuse, and put a new fuse to the socket exactly. (6) Mount I.T.2 again. (7) Turn on the power, then confirm that I.T.2 is turned on.
148
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.5.4
Replacing the Fuse for LCD
This section describes the location and replacement of the LCD fuse. WARNING Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuit section (marked and shielded with a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the highvoltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will get an electric shock.
D Location of the LCD fuse
Fuse FS1
LCD Unit (Rear view)
D Replacing the fuse
(1) If the fuse blows, first find and eliminate the cause. Then, replace the fuse. (2) Pull the old fuse up. (3) Push a new fuse into the fuse holder. Ordering code : A02B0200K103 * Rating : 5.0 A *Inhouse code : A60L00010290#LM50
D Ordering information
149
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.6 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES
This chapter describes the method of replacing batteries as follows.

2.6.1 Replacing the CNC Battery for Memory Back Up 2.6.2 Replacing the Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse Coder 2.6.3 Replacing the Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder ( Series Servo Amplifier Module) 2.6.4 Replacing the Battery for New MMCIV 2.6.5 Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal
Battery for Memory Backup
The CNC has a battery to memorize data of part programs, offset data, system parameters and so on. When the battery was reaching the low level, the CNC would display BAT on the screen before losing the important data in the memory. When you find the sign BAT , please replace the battery as Subsec. 2.6.1 within a week. If you do not replace the battery, the data in memory could get lost. When the machine is equipped with absolute encoder. System such as an absolute pulse coder or absolute linear scale, there is a battery for them separately from the battery for memory backup. When you get an alarm message No. 307 or 308 APC alarm, please replace the battery within a week following the instructions in 2.6.2 or 2.6.3, or the absolute position could be lost and it would be required to take a procedure of manual reference point return. The MMCIV and intelligent terminal use a battery to retain the BIOS parameters and clock information. When the battery voltage drops to a certain level, the entire screen blinks. If this occurs, replace the battery immediately, as described in Section 2.6.4 or 2.6.5.
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder
Other batteries
2.6.1
Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up
1. Lithium battery (Order number is *A02B0177K106) is required. 2. Turn on the power to the CNC for about 5 minutes. 3. Turn off the power to the entire machine. 4. Referring to the manual provided by the machine tool builder, open the cabinet in which the CNC controller is mounted. 5. The battery used for memory back up is located on the front of the main board. Remove the battery cover on the main board by holding the upper and lower part of the battery cover and pulling it towards you. Then take off the battery. 6. Remove the connector (CP8) on the main board towards you. 7. Connect the connector of new battery to main board. 8. Mount a battery and put the battery cover back on. 9. Close the cabinet. 10. Turn on the power to the machine (CNC) to check that no alarm appears on the CRT screen.
150
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
Connector on cable CP8 BATTERY
Battery Battery unit unit
Connector on PCB side
Battery Main board Main board
Battery Replacement
* FANUCs order number : A98L00310006 WARNING Turn off the power to the entire machine before opening the cabinet. Be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked and covered by shock prevention covers) when opening the cabinet and replacing the battery. There is a danger of electric shock if the protective cover is removed from a highvoltage circuit.
CAUTION Never replace the battery with other than the specified type (A02B0177K106). Turn off the power to the machine before replacing the battery. Complete the replacement work within 30 minutes. The contents of CNC memory may be lost if the power is turned off, and the battery is removed for 10 minutes or more. If the contents of CNC memory are lost because of the above, a RAM parity system alarm is issued, and the CNC becomes unusable.
151
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.6.2
Replacing Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse Coder
1. Prepare 4 commercially available dry cell batteries 2. Turn on CNC power. If the batteries are replaced with the power off ,absolute position of the machine is lost. 3. Loosen the screws of battery case lid and remove the lid. Consult with the MTBs manual for where the battery case is installed. 4. Replace the batteries in the case. Take care to place the batteries facing in the correct direction. (Insert the batteries as shown in the diagram with 2 facing one way and 2 the other.)
Thread

5. Having exchanged the batteries put the lid back on. 6. Procedure completes.
Lid
2.6.3
Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder ( Series Servo Amplifier Module)
In case that the series servo drive is used, the battery for absolute pulse coder could be provided on the series servo amplifier module instead of the battery case as shown in 1.3. In this case the battery is not an alkaline battery but a lithium battery, A06B6073K001. Prepare the battery in advance and replace it by the following procedure. Observe the following precautions for lithium batteries: WARNING If an unspecified battery is used, it may explode. Replace the battery only with the specified battery (A06B6037K001). Dispose of used lithium batteries as follows: (1) Small quantities Discharge the batteries and dispose of them as ordinary nonflammablegarbage. (2) Large quantities Consult FANUC.
152
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
Procedure for replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder
Procedure
1 Turn on machine (CNC) power. Replace the battery under the emergency stop state for safety, to escape the machine from moving during the replacement work. If the battery is replaced while the power is off, the memorized absolute position data will be lost, thus necessitating a reference position return operation. 2 Remove the battery case on the front panel of series servo amplifier module (SVM). The battery case can be removed by holding the top of the case and pulling the case towards you.
Battery case Connector CX5X Connector
CX5X
series SVM
Battery compartment
Battery A06B6073K001
3 4 5 6
Remove the connector of the battery. Replace the battery, and connect the connector. Attach the battery case. Turn off machine (CNC) power.
153
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.6.4
Replacing the Battery for New MMCIV
A battery is mounted on the new MMCIV board to remember the BIOS setting. When voltage of the battery is down, alarm message BAT is displayed on the CNC screen. When the message is displayed, please replace both of the CNC side battery and the new MMCIV side battery promptly. How to replace the new MMCIV side battery 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Use the specified battery (A02B0200K102). Turn on the CNC more than 5 minutes. Turn off the machine. Remove the new MMCIV board from the CNC controller Remove the connector of the dead battery on the board, and connect the connector of the new battery. 6. Remove the dead battery from the board and mount the new battery. 7. Install the new MMCIV board in the CNC controller. 8. Turn on the CNC and confirm not to display alarm message. WARNING D Turn off the machine before opening the door of the cabinet. D Do not touch the parts of high voltage. CAUTION D Do not use except for the specified battery. D If the battery connector is removed more than 5 minutes, the BIOS setting of the new MMCIV board will be lost. In this case, BIOS setup menu will be displayed on the MMC screen after turning on the CNC controller.
154
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.6.5
Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal
The time from disconnecting the cable of old battery to connecting the cable of new battery should be shorter than 5 minutes. (1) For the worst, write BIOS parameters down. (Refer to Sec.1.16 and Sec.1.17.) (2) Prepare a new battery (A02B0200K102). Use a lithium battery (A98L00310017) for an intelligent terminal of type 2 and earlier types. (3) After I.T.2 is turning on for 5 seconds or more, turn off the power of I.T.2, then enable to work from rear side of I.T.2 by taking it out from panel, etc. (4) Pull out battery connector, then remove the battery from the holder. (5) Lead the cable of new battery as Fig.2.6.5. (6) Connect the cable, put the new battery in the holder. (7) Mount Intelligent Terminal Type2 again. (8) Turn on the power, then confirm that BIOS parameters has not erased (in case that BIOS parameters has erased, BIOS setup will start automatically).
Lithium Battery
Front
Rear View
Side View
BAT1
Fig.2.6.5 Connection of Lithium Battery
155
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.7 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR

2.7.1
Replacing the Fan Motor for Control Unit
For 2slot rack For 1slot rack Fan ordering information Ordering code A90L00010378 A90L00010385#A Number of units required For 12slot rack For 21slot rack
1. Remove the control section printed circuit board underneath the fan to be replaced. 2. There is a backplane inside the slot. The fan motor cable is connected to the backplane. Grasp the left and right side of the cable connector attached to the backplane and remove it. 3. Open the upper lid of the control section rack. Insert a philips head screwdriver into the hole at the center front of the lid. The latch holding the cover in place can be released by prying with the screwdriver in the direction shown in (3) of Fig.2.7.1. 4. Open the lid sufficiently and remove the fan motor. Since the fan itself is not screwed into the rack, it can be easily removed. 5. Install the new fan motor. Guide the fan motor cable through the hole and into the rack. 6. Close the lid until the latch locks. 7. Attach the fan motor cable to the connector on the back plane. At this time,affix the middle portion of the cable to the hooks at the back of the rack. 8. Insert the removed control section printed circuit board.
(4)
(3)
Fan motor Cable
Connector
Back plane
Fig. 2.7.1 Fan Motor Replacement
156
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.7.2
Replacing the Fan for Intelligent Terminal
(1) Make sure that I.T. is turned off the power. (2) Prepare a new Fan (A90L00010423#105). (3) Disconnect the Fan connector. The connector is latched. Disconnect the cable while pressing the latch at the bottom of the connector down, using a screwdriver or other tools. (4) Loosen the 2 screws fixing the Fan, and remove the old fan. (5) Screw the new Fan at 2 points, and connect the fan connector to CN39B.
157
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.8
REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT FOR DISPLAY
D Replacing the backlight of the 7.2 STN
Upon reaching the end of its service life, the backlight unit must be replaced. The unit can be replaced either by the user or by a FANUC service engineer.
A cold cathode tube (CFL) is used as the backlight of the 7.2 STN. Ordering information: A61L00010142#BL (1) Removing the CFL
CFL
Lamp cover
Direction of extraction
Remove the CFL.
1) Reset the three hooks. 2) Remove the CFL cover.
1) Pull out the reflective film.
1) Remove the CFL. 2) If the CFL has been broken, carefully remove all pieces of glass.
(2) Installing a new CFL

Groove for extraction
New CFL
Frame end
1) Mount the new CFL. At this time, wrap the reflective sheet around the CFL. 2) Set the CFL cable in the groove for extraction.
1) While lifting the frame end, place the reflective sheet under the frame.
1) Reinstall the lamp cover. 2) Bend the three hooks.
Remark) When the screen display is not required, the display and backlight can be turned off by pressing a key. Doing so will increase the useful life of the backlight. <Suppressing the screen display> While holding down the (for example, the
POS CAN
key, press any function key
key).
<Restoring the screen display> Press any function key (for example, the
POS
key).
158
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Replacing the LCD backlight for intelligent terminal 2
(1) If I.T.2 has the Touch Panel, disconnect the CN1 on the Touch Panel Controller PCB. And loosen the 6 screws, and remove the cover. (Remove the battery from the battery holder to workpiece. But do not disconnect the battery connector.)
CN1
(2) Loosen the screw at 4 points, and disconnect the 2 connectors (CP1:on the Inverter, CN1:on the main PCB), and remove the LCD unit.
CP1
CN1
159
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
(3) Loosen one screw and pull out the LCD Backlight as below figure, and exchange it.
Backplane of LCD
PCB
PCB
(4) Assemble the unit in a reverse order. (Note that the cables dont put between the plates etc.)
160
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.9
ADJUSTING THE FLAT DISPLAY 2.9.1
Adjusting the Color Liquid Crystal Display and Plasma Display
Fine adjustment of the video signal is supported to enable its use with color liquid crystal displays and plasma displays. This adjustment is necessary to compensate for errors resulting from the combination of NC devices and cables. Adjustment of the video signal is necessary if you have replaced the display unit, cable, or a hardware component of the display circuit in the NC, either as part of regular field maintenance or the correct a failure.
Locations of switches and jumper pins

SW2 SW1 SW1 TM1
Color liquid crystal display (rear view)
Plasma display (rear view)
Adjustment
D Eliminating flicker D Analog color liquid crystal display: Jumper pin TM1 Change the jumper pin to another side. Normally one of these settings will eliminate flicker. D Plasma display: Switch SW1 1. Change the jumper pin and search for a range such that flicker is eliminated. 2. If you find that flicker is eliminated by two or more different settings, select the setting approximating to the midpoint of those settings. Example : If flicker is eliminated by all of settings 2 to 6, select 4. D Analog color liquid crystal display : Switch SW1 D Plasma display : Switch SW2 1. The screen can be shifted horizontally in units of dots. 2. Adjust the horizontal position such that the entire screen is visible. Only one setting can successfully realize this positioning. NOTE Do not attempt to change any controls or settings other than those described above. If any controls or settings other than those described above are changed, the appearance of the display will be abnormal.
D Adjusting the horizontal position
161
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.9.2
How to Replace the Monochrome Liquid Crystal Display
D Tuning locations
The monochrome liquid crystal display is provided with a setting switch tuner for precisely adjust contrast. This setting is necessary to accommodate subtle differences among the NC units, cables, and LCDs to be used. Color Liquid Crystal Display(Rear Part)
VRD1
D Contrast setting (VRD1)
VRD1 can be used to adjust the contrast. NOTE Do not change those other than the above settings and controls, or otherwise the screen display may become abnormal.
162
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.10
MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER
Air filter cleaning and replacement
It is necessary to regulary clean the heat transformer, because the heat transformation ability will be reduced by the accumulation of dust. The frequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installation environment and therefore should be determined by your own judgment accordint to the degree of dirt.
Air filter cleaning and replacement method 1 When cleaning and replacing the filter, be sure to cut off the fans electric power source. 2 Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside.
Detach the cover by pressing, the flanges which are in the grooves of both sides towards the inside by minus screwdriver, etc.
3 Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on both sides.
4 When dirt is conspicuous, press wash with a neutral detergent, rinse with fresh water, and the washing, allow to dry naturally. When replacing with the same product. 5 Insert the filter in the cover, align the flange in the groove, and install by pressing. Confirm that the cover will not come loose even if it is pulled.
163
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
Cleaning heat exchanger

Cleaning heat exchanger
1 When cleaning, be sure to cut off the fan power source. 2 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.
Heat exchanger main unit
Power cable for fan (detach the connector)
External fan unit
Installation screws B (1)
Installation screws A (2)
Earth cable (if the installation screw on the fan side is detached, it can be taken out) Detach the two installation screws (A) of the external fan unit, and detach the unit from the main unit by sliding it down. Detach the power source cable to the fan and the earth cable. Also detach installation screws (B).
D Cleaning fan unit Method of cleaning fan unit
1 Wipe the dirt, condensation, etc., which has accumulated on the fan motor and fan installation case with a dry cloth, etc. When the condensation, etc. has accumulated and the dirt is difficult to remove, soak a cloth in neutral detergent, lightry sqeeze it and wipe away the dirt. However, take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electrical sections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor.
164
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
D Cleaning heat exchanger fan Method of cleaning heat exchanger fan 1 Detach the heat exchanger format the unit and either blow off with air, wipe off with a dry cloth, or brush the accumulated dirt, condensation, etc.
When the dirt is especially severe
1 Detach the internal fan unit, the terminal unit, and the cable from the main unit.
Main unit
Terminal unit and cable
2 Using a neutral detergent, remove the dirt from the main unit fan section by brushing. At this time, take care not to bend the fin of the element. 3 After cleaning, dry well. D Installation Method of installation after cleaning
After completing cleaning of the fan unit and heat transformer. 1 Install the terminal unit and cable in the original position. 2 Install the internal fan unit in the main body of heat transformer. 3 Mount the main heat exchanger unit on the panel, then install the external fan unit. At this time, do not forget to connect the fan power cable and the earth cable.
165
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.11
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT
The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual cabinet refers to the following: (1) Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the control unit or peripheral units; (2) Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC: (3) Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for housing the CRT/MDI unit or operators panel ; (4) Equivalent to the above. The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall conform to the following table.
Room temperature of unit Change in temperature Relative humidity Vibration Environment In operation 0C to 55C In storage or transportation 20C to 60C 1.1C/minute max. Normal : 75% or less Temporary (with 1 month) : 95% or less In operation : 0.5 G or less Normal machine shop environment (The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a location where the density of dust, coolant, and/ or organic solvent is relatively high.)
When the MMCIV or intelligent terminal is incorporated into the system, the environment in which the control unit is installed must satisfy the following conditions (within the cabinet):
In operation Room temperature Change in temperature Relative humidity In storage or transportation 20C /hour max. Normal Temporary (with 1 month) Vibration Environment In operation Not operation Relative humidity:10% to 75%, noncondensing. Relative humidity:10% to 90%, noncondensing. 0.5G or less 1.0G or less Note 2)
5C to 45C
Note 1)
20C to 60C
The control unit shall be housed in a sealed cabinet.
166
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
NOTE 1 Operating ambient temperature The temperature sensor on the MMCIV or intelligent terminal printed circuit board monitors whether the temperature is within the specified range. (The operator can check the state using the CNC diagnosis screen.) 1) If the ambient temperature is outside the specified range at poweron Only the CNC and PMC are turned on. Once the temperature moves within the specified range, the MMCIV is automatically turned on. 2) If the ambient temperature moves outside the specified range during operation after normal poweron An error occurs when the system attempts to access the hard disk. 2 Vibration The CNC control unit or builtin hard disk drive may exhibit vibration at an arbitrary frequency. Once the CNC control unit has been installed in the machine, check that no vibration occurs. Be particularly careful to eliminate any vibration when using the memory card socket.
Data stored on the hard disk may be damaged or destroyed as a result of a misoperation or system failure, even when the abovelisted conditions are satisfied. In particular, turning off the power while the hard disk is being accessed is extremely likely to damage stored data. Do not, therefore, turn off the power while the hard disk is being accessed. Ensure that your end users are also aware of this precaution. Important data on the hard disk should be regularly backed up to another medium.
167
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.12
POWER SUPPLY
The following units related to the CNC control unit require input power of 24 VDC "10% (excluding the 14 CRT/MDI unit):
Table 2.12 Power supply Unit 21TB control unit A 21TB control unit B 21MB control unit Series 210 control unit Series 210 control unit Loader control option board 9 CRT/MDI unit 9 PDP unit 7.2 STN unit 9.5 STN unit 8.4 TFT color unit 14 CRT/MDI unit 9.5 TFT/MDI unit I/O UnitA 170 to 264VAC 24 VDC"10% ("10% i includes l d momentary surges and ripples.) Power supply voltage 24 VDC"10% ("10% includes momentary surges and ri les.) ripples ) Power supply 2.4A (only control unit) 3.4A (only control unit) 3.4A (only control unit) 3.5A (only control unit) When HSSB is used. 5.5A (only control unit) When MMCIV is used. 0.7A (only 21TB) 0.8A 2.0A 0.8A 0.8A 0.8A 0.6A 0.8A Depends on the type and number of modules. Refer to I/O UnitMODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual (B61813E).
D Intelligent terminal
(1) Input power (a) Requirements To use the intelligent terminal, prepare a power supply that satisfies the following requirements.
Input voltage Input current When no ISA expansion is installed When an ISA expansion is installed +24 VDC"10% 2 A (maximum) 3 A (maximum)
NOTE The use of the FANUC I/O device requires an additional 1 A capacity. (b) Timing The power for the intelligent terminal should be switched on and off within "100 ms of the CNC power being switched on and off.
168
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
(2) Supply power The power supply capacity of the intelligent terminal is as listed below. When connecting a peripheral unit, confirm its current requirements.
Supply voltage +12V +5V Peripheral device ISA, FDD (CN2) FDD (CN2), keyboard (CD32, JD33), mouse (JD33) ISA 12V 5V ISA ISA Current (maximum) 400mA 1000mA
3500mA 180mA 74mA
(3) Heat dissipation 25 W (during normal operation) NOTE The heat dissipation increases with the addition of a peripheral device or ISA expansion board.
169
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.13
ACTION AGAINST NOISE
The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surfacemount and custom LS1 technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system. The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground loops. When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the machine as described in the following:
2.13.1
Separating Signal Lines
The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the following table : Bind the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group
A
Signal line
Primary AC power line Secondary AC power line AC/DC power lines (containing the power lines for the servo and spindle motors) AC/DC solenoid AC/DC relay
Action
Bind the cables in group A separately (N t 1) from (Note f groups B and d C or cover group A with an electromagnetic shield grou (Note 2). Connect spark killers or diodes with y the solenoid and relay.
DC solenoid (24VDC) DC relay (24 VDC) DI/DO cable between the CNC and power magnetics cabinet DI/DO cable between the CNC and machine
Connect diodes with DC solenoid and relay relay. Bind the cables in group B separately from group A or cover group B with an electromagnetic shield. Separate group B as far from group C as possible. possible It is more desirable to cover group B with the shield. Bind the cables in group C separately from group A or cover group C with an l t ti shield. hi ld electromagnetic Separate group C as far from group B as possible possible. Be sure to perform shield processing.
Cable between the CNC and servo amplifier Cable for position and velocity feedback Cable between the CNC and spindle amplifier Cable for the position coder Cable for the manual pulse generator Cable between the CRT and MDI RS232C and RS422 interface cables Cable for the battery Other cables to be covered with the shield
NOTE 1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another when binding the cables in each group. 2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between groups with grounded steel plates.
170
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
Cabinet
Spindle amp.
Servo amp.
Control unit Cable of group B, C Duct
To operators panel, motor, etc.
Cable of group A Group A
Section Group B, C Cover
2.13.2
Ground
The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machined tool: 1. Signal ground system (SG) The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the electrical signal system to the machine. 2. Frame ground system (FG) The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames and cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables between the units are connected. 3. System ground system The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground systems connected between devices or units with the ground.
Signal ground system Frame ground system System ground system Operators panel
Power magnetics unit
Servo amplifier
CNC control unit
Machine tool Power magnetics cabinet
Distribution board
171
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
Notes on connecting the ground systems S Connect the signal gournd with the frame ground (FG) at only one place in the CNC control unit. S The grounding resistance of the system gorund shall be 100 ohms or less (class 3 grounding). S The system ground cable must have enough crosssectional area to safely carry the accidental current flow into the system gound when an accident such as a short circuit occurs. (Generally, it must have the crosssectional area of the AC power cable or more.) S Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system gound wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.
2.13.3
Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit
Control unit
Printed circuit board Terminal for SG connection
M3 or M4 M3 or M4 terminal for signal ground (SG)
Ground cable: wire with a sectional area of 2mm2 or more
Ground cable
System ground Frame ground = (FG) Ground plate of the cabinet
Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal. The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the control unit.
172
B62705EN/03
2. HARDWARE
2.13.4
Noise Suppressor
The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet. A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are turned on or off. This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits to be disturbed. To reduce the pulse voltage, use a spark killer for an AC device or a diode for a DC device. Notes on connecting the ground systems (1) CR spark killer Use a spark killer for AC circuit consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer. (A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage, but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC therefore recommends a CR spark killer.) The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall conform to the following based on the current (1(A)) and DC resistance of the stationary coil : 1) Resistance (R):Equivalent to DC resistance of the coil I 2 to I 2 (F) 2) Capacitance (C):
10 20
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
Spark killer AC relay
Motor
Spark killer
(2) Diodetype spark killer Use a diodetype spark killer in a DC circuit. As a guideline, the breakdown voltage of the diode must be about double the applied voltage, and the current rating must also be about double.
Diode DC relay
173
2. HARDWARE
B62705EN/03
2.13.5
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing
The CNC cables that required shielding should be clamped by the method shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation, follow this cable clamp method. Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. Metal fittings for clamp are attached to the control unit. The ground plate must be made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows:
Control unit
Metal fittings for clamp
Shield cover
Machine side installation board
Ground plate
174
B62705EN/03
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again. This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters, the part programs and the tool offset values.
3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 3.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 3.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
175
B62705EN/03
3.1
SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT
D Setting procedure of parameters First, enable parameter writing by performing steps 1 to 3, below. 1. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state. 2. Press
OFFSET SETTING
key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display
SETTING (HANDY) screen. 3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press 1 keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed. 4. Press
SYSTEM
and
INPUT
key several times to display the following screen.

O1234N12345 INI ISO TVC 0 0 0 FCV 0 0 0 0 0 S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PARAMETER (SETTING) 0000 SEQ 0 0 0 0001 0 0 0 0012 RMV X 0 0 0 Y 0 0 0 Z 0 0 0 B 0 0 0 0020 I/O CHANNEL
0 0 0 0 0
0 MIR 0 0 0 0
0 T0000
REF **** *** *** 10:15:30 [ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ To make the cursor display in bit unit, press the cursor key or
5. Press soft key[(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is displayed. 1) Soft key [NO. SRH] : Searched by number. Examination) Parameter number [NO. SRH]. 2) Soft key [ON : 1] : Item with cursor position is set to 1 (bit parameter) 3) Soft key [OFF : 0] : Item with cursor position is set to 0 (bit parameter) 4) Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor (word type) 5) Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at cursor (word type) 6) Soft key [READ] : Parameters are input from reader/puncher interface. 7) Soft key [PUNCH] : Parameters are output to reader/puncher interface.
176
B62705EN/03
6. After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on the SETTING screen to 0. Press 7. Convenient method 1) To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or ,
RESET
to release alram 100.
then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set parameters bit by bit (Bit parameter only). 2) To set data consecutively, use (Ex.1)
1 2 3 4 EOB
key.
4 5 6 7 EOB 9
EOB
INPUT
This key sequence sets data as follows: 0 0 0 0 (Ex.2)

1 2
1234 4567 9999 0

4 EOB EOB 9 9 9 9
INPUT
This key sequence sets data as follows: 0 0 0 0 1234 0 9999 0

=
3) To set the same data sequentially, press (Ex.)

1 2 3 4 EOB = EOB
.
=
INPUT
This key sequence sets data as follows: 0 0 0 0 1234 1234 1234 0
4) Bit parameters can be set as follows: (Ex.)

1 1 EOB = EOB =
INPUT
This key sequence sets data as follows: 00011000 00000000 00000000 00011000 00000000 00011000 00000000 00000000 8. After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE to 0.
177
B62705EN/03
3.2
INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA
The main CPU memorized the following data. Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally (1) CNC paramter (2) PMC parameter (3) Pitch error compensation amount (4) Custom macro variable values (5) Tool compensation amount (6) Part program (machining program, custom macro program)
3.2.1
Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output
Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status. Parameters required for output are as follows : (When changing a parameter, do so in MDI mode or in the emergency stop state.)
#7 0000 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ISO #0
#1 (ISO) 0 : Output with EIA code 1 : Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)
0020 Selection of I/O channel
0 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A) 1 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A) 2 : Channel 2 (I/O printed circuit board JD5B) 3 : Channel 3 (Option 1 board JD5C) * In the example shown here, an I/O unit is connected to JD5A for data input and output (I/O channel = 0).
#7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2
0101
#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1. l 1 : No. of stop bits is 2. #3 (ASI)l 0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data. 1 : ASCII code is used. #7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when data is output. 1 : Feed is not output when data is output.
178
B62705EN/03
0102
pecification number of input/output device
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RS232C (control codes DC1 to DC4 used) FANUC bubble cassette B1/B2 FANUC Floppy cassette adapter F1 PROGRAM FILE Mate. FANUC FA card adapter ,FANUC Floppy cassette adapter, FSPH Not used Portable tape reader FANUC PPR, FSPG, FSPH
0103
Baud Rate
1: 2: 3: 4:
50 100 110 150
5: 6: 7: 8:
200 9: 300 l10: 600 11: 1200 12:
2400 4800 9600 19200 [BPS]
3.2.2
Outputting CNC Parameters
In case of PPR, steps 2 and 3 are not required. 1. Select EDIT mode. 2.
PROG
Press PROG key and soft key PRGRM to select a program text. . [EXEC].
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key
And then, put out the head of file by pressing [FSRH] 0 4. Press
SYSTEM
key and soft key [PARAM] to display parameter screen. .
5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] ,and soft key
6. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are started to be output.
179
B62705EN/03
3.2.3
Outputting PMC Parameters
1. Select MDI mode. 2. Press
OFFSET SETTING
key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen. and

INPUT
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input 1 At this time, alarm 100 will be generated. 4. Press
SYSTEM
key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL] 6. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1.
INPUT
Where, mark x is a former value
Thus, data input/output screen has been selected. 7. Select EDIT mode. 8. Press soft key then key . 9. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O. Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an item is set. 10. In CHANNEL NO item, input 1
INPUT
to select I/O channel 1.
11. In DEVICE item, press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette. 12. In KIND DATA item, press soft key [PARAM]. 13. In FUNCTION item, press soft key [WRITE]. 14. In FILE No item, specify a file name. In this example input as follows:
INPUT
15. Press soft key [EXEC]. Then PMC parameters are started to be output. 16. After the PMC parameters have been output, set PARAMETER WRITE to 0. 17. Press
RESET
to release alarm 100.
3.2.4
Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount
1. Select EDIT mode. 2. Press
SYSTEM
key several times, press soft key [PARAM], .
and
[PITCH] to select the SETTING screen for pitch error amount. 3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and 4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then pitch error compensation amount is started to be output.
180
B62705EN/03
3.2.5
Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values
When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable no. 500 and later are output. 1. Press
OFFSET SETTING
key.
key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro 2. Press variable screen. 3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then key . 4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then custom macro variable values are output.
3.2.6
Outputting Tool Compensation Amount
1. Select EDIT mode. 2. Press
OFFSET SETTING
key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool .
compensation amount screen. 3. Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key 4. Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool compensation amount is started to be output.
3.2.7
Outputting Part Program
1. Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set to the MDI mode and set it to 0.
#7 3202 #6 #5 #4 NE9 #3 #2 #1 #0 NE8
#0 (NE8) l 0 : Programs of 8000s are edited. 1 : Programs of 8000s can be protected. #4 (NE9) l 0 : Programs of 9000s are edited. 1 : Programs of 9000s can be protected. 2. Select EDIT mode. 3. Press
PROG
key and press soft key [PRGRM] to display program text. .
4. Press [(OPRT)] key and press soft key
5. Input a program number to be output. To output all programs input as:
6. Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.
181
B62705EN/03
3.2.8
Inputting CNC Parameters
1. Set to the emergency stop state. 2. Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct. 1) Press
OFFSET SETTING
key several times, and press [SETING] to display
SETTING screen. 2) Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1. 3) Press 4)

0020 Selectionof I/O channel
SYSTEM
key to select the parameter screen.
l 0 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A) 1 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A) 2 : Channel 2 (I/O printed circuit board JD5B) 3 : Channel 3 (Option 1 board JD5C) 5)
0101 #7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2
#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1. l 1 : No. of stop bits is 2. #3 (ASI) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used. 1 : ASCII code is used. #7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when punching out. 1 : Feed is not output when punching out. 6)
0102 Specification number of I/O device
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RS232C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.) FANUC Bubble cassette B1/B2 FANUCFloppy cassette F1 PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card adapter, FANUC Floppy casette adapter, FSPH, FANUC Handy File Not used Portable tape reader FANUC PPR, FSPG, FSPH
182
B62705EN/03
7)
0103 Baud rate
1: 2: 3: 4:
50 100 110 150
5: 6: 7: 8:
200 9: 300 l10: 600 11: 1200 12:
2400 4800 9600 19200 [BPS]
3. Press soft key 4. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters are started. 5. After parameters have been inputted, turn off power and turn it on. 6. Alarm 300 is issued if the system employs an absolute pulse coder. In such a case, perform reference position return again.
3.2.9
Inputting PMC Parameters
Set the emergency stop state. Operation of 12 is not required when PPR is used. 1. Turn off (KEY4=1) the program protect key. 2. Press
OFFSET SETTING
key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING
screen. 3. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1. 4. Press

SYSTEM
key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL]. 6. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1.
0
7. Press
0
key.
INPUT
key and
8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters required for I/O. Item selection cursor displays the next item after an item is set. 9. In CHANNEL item , press 1
INPUT
to select channel 1.
10. In DEVICE item, press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette. 11. In FUNCTION item, press soft key [READ] to input data 12. In FILE NO item, press 2
INPUT
to select file no. 2.
13. Press soft key [EXEC] and the PMC parameters are started to be input. 14. After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.
183
B62705EN/03
3.2.10
Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount
1. Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode. 2. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen. 3. Press
PROG
key and soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents. [EXEC] to select and
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], 5. Press
, [F SRH], and 3 the pitch error compensation file.

SYSTEM
key several times, soft key [PARAM],
[PITCH] to select the screen for pitch error compensation amount. key. 6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and 7. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error compensation amount is started to be input. 8. After data has been input, press
OFFSET SETTING
key twice to display the
SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER WRITE to 0.
3.2.11
Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values
If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input the variable values. For PPR, item 4 is not required. 1. Confirm that EDIT mode is selected. 2. Turn off the program protect key (KEY2=1). 3. Press
PROG
key then soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents. , [F SRH], and 4 . [EXEC] to select
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)],
a file. 5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key
6. Press address O , a program number (0001 for example), soft key [READ] and [EXEC] key, then custom macro variable values are started to be input. Input a program number that is not used. 7. Select MEMORY mode on the machine operators panel and press cycle start button. When the program is executed, macro variables are set. 8. Press
OFFSET SETTING
key,
key and soft key [MACRO] to select the custom
macro variable screen. 9. Press
and soft key [NO SRH] to display variable
number 500 and confirm the custom macro variables are set correctly. Of the data displayed, 0 and vacant differ in meaning. Vacant is an undefined variable. To set vacant, press soft key [INPUT]. 10. Select EDIT mode again. 11. Press
PROG
key to select the program display screen.
12. Press address O and a program number (0001 for example) ,then press
DELETE
to delete the program.
184
B62705EN/03
3.2.12
Inputting Tool Compensation Amount
Item 4 is not required for PPR. 1. Select the EDIT mode. 2. Turn off the program protect (KEY=1). 3. Press
PROG
key, and press soft key[PRGRM] to display the program [EXEC] to select
contents screen. 4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], 5. Press

OFFSET SETTING
, [F SRH], and 5 the tool compensation amount file.
key, and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen. 6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key. 7. Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.
3.2.13
Inputting Part Programs
Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set it to 0. (Change it in MDI mode).

#7 3201 #6 NPE #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 RAL #0
#1 (RAL) When programs are registered: l 0 : All programs are registered. 1 : Only one program is registered. #6 (NPE) When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30 and M99 are: 0 : regarded as the end of program. l 1 : not regarded as the end of porgram.
#7 3202 #6 #5 #4 NE9 #3 #2 #1 #0 NE8
#0 (NE8) l 0: 1: #4 (NE9) l 0: 1:
Programs of 8000s can be edited. Programs of 8000s are protected. Programs of 9000s can be edited. Programs of 9000s are protected. For PPR, item 4 is not required.
1. Confirm that mode is EDIT mode. 2. Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1). 3. Press file. 4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [F SRH], and 6 key. [EXEC] to select a part program file. 5. Press soft key, [(OPRT)] and
PROG
key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part program
6. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.
185
B62705EN/03
3.3
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN
To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen is usually selected. For example, the parameter screen is used for parameter input from or output to an external input/output unit, while the program screen is used for program input or output. However, programs, parameters, offset data, and macro variables can all be input and output using a single common screen, that is, the ALL IO screen.
READ/PUNCH (PROGRAM)
I/O CHANNEL DEVICE NUM. BAUDRATE STOP BIT NULL INPUT (EIA) TV CHECK (NOTES) CD CHECK (232C) PARITY BIT INTERFACE END CODE (0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_ 3 0 4800 2 NO ON OFF OFF RS422 EXT
O1234 N12345
TV CHECK OFF PUNCH CODE ISO INPUT CODE ASCII FEED OUTPUT FEED EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR BAUDRATE CLK. INNER RESET/ALARM ON SAT COMMAND HOST COM PROTCOL A COM CODE ASCII
MDI
****
*** PARAM
***
***
12:34:56 MACRO (OPRT)
PRGRM
OFFSET
Fig. 3.3 ALL IO screen (when channel 3 is being used for input/output)
186
B62705EN/03
3.3.1
Setting Input/OutputRelated Parameters
Input/outputrelated parameters can be set on the ALL IO screen. Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode.
Setting input/outputrelated parameters
Procedure
1 Press function key
SYSTEM
. (continuous menu key) several
2 Press the rightmost soft key times.
3 Press soft key [ALL IO] to display the ALL IO screen. NOTE 1 If program or floppy is selected in EDIT mode, the program directory or floppy screen is displayed. 2 When the power is first turned on, program is selected by default.
READ/PUNCH (PROGRAM)
I/O CHANNEL DEVICE NUM. BAUDRATE STOP BIT NULL INPUT (EIA) TV CHECK (NOTES) CD CHECK (232C) PARITY BIT INTERFACE END CODE 3 0 4800 2 NO ON OFF OFF RS422 EXT
O1234 N12345
TV CHECK OFF PUNCH CODE ISO INPUT CODE ASCII FEED OUTPUT FEED EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR BAUDRATE CLK. INNER RESET/ALARM ON SAT COMMAND HOST COM PROTCOL A COM CODE ASCII
(0:EIA MDI
1:ISO)>1_ **** *** PARAM *** *** 12:34:56 MACRO (OPRT)
PRGRM
OFFSET
NOTE Baud rate clock, CD check (232C), reset/alarm report, and the parity bit for parameter No. 134, as well as the communication code, end code, communication protocol, interface, and SAT command for parameter No. 135 are displayed only when channel 3 is being used for input/output. 4 Select the soft key corresponding to the desired type of data (program, parameter, and so forth). 5 Set the parameters corresponding to the type of input/output unit to be used. (Parameter setting is possible regardless of the mode.)
187
B62705EN/03
3.3.2
Inputting and Outputting Programs
File search
A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specify the input file containing the program (file search).
Procedure
1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown below. D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
O0001 N00010 PROGRAM (NUM.) USED : 60 FREE : 2 MEMORY (CHAR.) 3321 429
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999 O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666 O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040
>_ EDIT
****
*** READ
***
*** PUNCH
14:46:09 DELETE (OPRT)
F SRH
4 Enter address N. 5 Enter the number of the file to be found. D N0 The first floppy file is found. D One of N1 to N9999 Among the files numbered from 1 to 9999, a specified file is found. D N9999 The file immediately after that used most recently is found. D N9998 When 9998 is specified, the next file is found. Then, each time a file input/output operation is performed, N9999 is automatically inserted. This means that subsequent files can be sequentially found automatically. This state is canceled by specifying N0, N1 to N9999, or N9999, or upon a reset.
CAN EXEC
6 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC]. The specified file is found.
188
B62705EN/03
Inputting a program
Procedure
>_ EDIT
****
*** READ
***
*** PUNCH
F SRH
4 To specify a program number to be assigned to an input program, enter address O, followed by the desired program number. If no program number is specified, the program number in the file or on the NC tape is assigned as is.
STOP CAN EXEC
5 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC]. The program is input with the program number specified in step 4 assigned. To cancel input, press soft key [CAN]. To stop input prior to its completion, press soft key [STOP].
189
B62705EN/03
Outputting programs
Procedure
>_ EDIT
****
*** READ
***
*** PUNCH
F SRH
4 Enter address O. 5 Enter a desired program number. If 9999 is entered, all programs in memory are output. To output a range of programs, enter O, OVVVV . The programs numbered from to VVVV are output. When bit 4 (SOR) of parameter No. 3107 for sorted display is set to 1 on the program library screen, programs are output in order, starting from those having the smallest program numbers.
STOP CAN EXEC
6 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC]. The specified program or programs are output. If steps 4 and 5 are omitted, the currently selected program is output. To cancel output, press soft key [CAN]. To stop output prior to its completion, press soft key [STOP].
190
B62705EN/03
Deleting files
Procedure
>_ EDIT
****
*** READ
***
*** PUNCH
F SRH
4 Press soft key [DELETE]. 5 Enter a file number, from 1 to 9999, to indicate the file to be deleted.
CAN EXEC
6 Press soft key [EXEC]. The kth file, specified in step 5, is deleted.
191
B62705EN/03
3.3.3
Inputting and Outputting Parameters
Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting parameters
Procedure
1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.
READ PUNCH
CAN
EXEC
4 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC]. The parameters are read, and the INPUT indicator blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of input, the INPUT indicator is cleared from the screen. To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].
Outputting parameters
Procedure
1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.
READ PUNCH
CAN
EXEC
4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC]. The parameters are output, and the OUTPUT indicator blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the OUTPUT indicator is cleared from the screen. To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].
192
B62705EN/03
3.3.4
Inputting and Outputting Offset Data
Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting offset data
Procedure
1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.
READ PUNCH
CAN
EXEC
4 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC]. The offset data is read, and the INPUT indicator blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of input, the INPUT indicator is cleared from the screen. To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].
Outputting offset data
Procedure
1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.
READ PUNCH
CAN
EXEC
4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC]. The offset data is output, and the OUTPUT indicator blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the OUTPUT indicator is cleared from the screen. To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].
193
B62705EN/03
3.3.5
Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables
Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen.
Outputting custom macro common variables
Procedure
1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.
READ PUNCH
CAN
EXEC
4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC]. The custom macro common variables are output, and the OUTPUT indicator blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the OUTPUT indicator is cleared from the screen. To cancel output, press soft key [CAN]. NOTE To input a macro variable, read the desired custom macro statement as a program, then execute the program.
194
B62705EN/03
3.3.6
Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files
The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, as well as the input and output of floppy files.
Displaying a file directory
Procedure
1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY]. 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown below. D The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345
> MDI
****
*** READ
***
*** PUNCH
12:34:56 DELETE
F SRH
5 Press soft key [F SRH]. 6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. A directory is displayed, with the specified file uppermost. Subsequent files in the directory can be displayed by pressing the page key.
195
B62705EN/03
READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) No. FILE NAME 0001 PARAMETER 0002 ALL.PROGRAM 0003 O0001 0004 O0002 0005 O0003 0006 O0004 0007 O0005 0008 O0010 0009 O0020 F SRH File No.=2 >2_ EDIT * * * * * * * F SRH
O1234 N12345 (Meter) VOL 46.1 12.3 11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9
***
*** CAN
12:34:56 EXEC
A directory in which the first file is uppermost can be displayed simply by pressing the page key. (Soft key [F SRH] need not be pressed.)
196
B62705EN/03
Inputting a file
Procedure
1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY]. 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown below. The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.
> MDI
****
*** READ
***
*** PUNCH
12:34:56 DELETE
F SRH
5 Press soft key [READ].

F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC
6 Enter the number of a file or program to be input. D Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET]. D Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired program, then press soft key [O SET]. 7 Press soft key [EXEC]. The specified file or program is read, and the INPUT indicator blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of input, the INPUT indicator is cleared from the screen.
197
B62705EN/03
Outputting a file
Procedure
> MDI
****
*** READ
***
*** PUNCH
12:34:56 DELETE
F SRH
5 Press soft key [PUNCH].

F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC
6 Enter the number of the program to be output, together with a desired output file number. D Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET]. D Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired program, then press soft key [O SET]. 7 Press soft key [EXEC]. The specified program is output, and the OUTPUT indicator blinks at the lowerright corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the OUTPUT indicator is cleared from the screen. If no file number is specified, the program is written at the end of the currently registered files.
198
B62705EN/03
Deleting a file
Procedure
> MDI
****
*** READ
***
*** PUNCH
12:34:56 DELETE
F SRH
5 Press soft key [DELETE]. 6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. The specified file is deleted. After the file has been deleted, the subsequent files are shifted up.
199
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
B62705EN/03
INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
This chapter describes the signals between the machine operators panel, magnetics cabinet and the PMC, connection of the signals between PMC and CNC, and confirmation method of on/off state of these signals. It also describes system configuration of PMC, parameters of PMC, ladder and how to display time chart of the signals on the screen. It also describes a method of inputting/outputting PMC parameters to an external device.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . .
201 202 219 237
200
4.1
(D1) PMCDGN (0) PMCDGN (1) Machine side DI/DO DV (OFF) DV (ON) Output potential (0V) Output potential (24V) Load (OFF) Load (ON) Output potential (24V) Output potential (0V) Load (OFF) Load (ON) (Sink type DO) PMCDGN (0) PMCDGN (1) (Source type DO) PMCDGN (0) DV (OFF) PMCDGN (1) DV (ON) PMCDGN *1) PMCRA
X 1000 to 1011
B62705EN/03
Input potential (0V) Input potential (24V)
Contact point (open) Contact point (close)
GENERAL OF INTERFACE
Highspeed processing signal *DEC *ESP, SKIP,
PMCDGN DI / DO RV *2) +24E Sink type DV STL Y0.1 Source type DV Y PMCDGN *1)
Y 1000 to 1008
Load Load
NC
G 0000 to 0255
Machine side power magnetic circuit operators panel ST1 ST2 Power supply
+
ST1 DOOR X X0.1 ST2 X5.7 STL F0.5 X0.0 G007.2
ST
Sink type DO
Power supply
+
201
PMC address MTB decides addresses and signals *1) If I/O unit is added : X 0000 to 0127 Y 0000 to 0127 *2) DI is prepared to select pull up or pull down eternally. Internal relay Variable timer Counter Data table Message display Keep relay System reserve area R9000 to R9099 K17.0 to K19.7 R0.0 to R999.7 T0.0 to T079.7 C0.0 to C079.7 D0.0 to D1859.7 A0.0 to A024.7 K0.0 to K016.7
PMCDGN
Source type Operators panel DV

RV RV
F 0000 to 0255
FANUC decides addresses and signals correspondence
Matrix DI DV
4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
Matrix D0
B62705EN/03
4.2
SPECIFICATION OF PMC 4.2.1
Specification
Model Programming guage method PMCRA1 lan- Ladder 2 8 ms PMCRA3 Ladder 2 8 ms 0.15 (s/step) Approx. 3,000 Approx. 3,000 Approx. 5,000 Approx. 5,000 Approx. 8,000 Approx. 12,000 Approx. 16,000 S Symbol(Note)/comment S Message S C Language Instruction Internal relay Message request Nonvolatile S Var. Timer S Counter S Keep relay S Data table Fixed timer I/O S I/O link (DI/DO) S Builtin I/O card A (DI/DO) (sink type) S Builtin I/O card B (DI/DO) (sink type) S Builtin I/O card C (DI/DO) (source type) S Builtin I/O card D (DI/DO) (source type) S Builtin I/O card E (DI/DO) (source type) Storage media 1024 points/1024 points maximum (sharable with a builtin I/O card) 48 points/48 points maximum for the machine 64 points/32 points maximum for the operators panel 84 points/64 points maximum for the machine 48 points/48 points maximum for the machine 64 points/32 points maximum for the operators panel 96 points/72 points maximum for the machine 96 points/64 points maximum for the machine FlashROM Note) There is no objectlevel compatibility. (T) 80 byte (40 pairs) (20 pairs) (C) 80 byte (K) 20 byte (D) 1860 byte 100 (Specification timer No.) (Basic) (Function) 32 to 128KB 2 to 64KB No 12 kinds 49 kinds 32 to 128KB 2 to 64KB No 14 kinds 66 kinds (System uses R9000 to R9099) (200 Kinds)
Number of ladder level Level1 Cycle Time
Basic Instruction Execution 5.0 Time (s/step) Program capacity S Ladder (step)
(R) 1100 byte (A) 25 byte
NOTE Max. size of a symbol and a comment are each 64KB.
202
B62705EN/03
4.2.2
Address
Character X Kinds Input signal from the machine to the PMC (MT to PMC) Output signal from the PMC to the mama chine (PMC to MT) Input signal from the NC to the PMC (NC to PMC) Output signal from the PMC to NC (PMC to NC) Internal relay Message request signal Counter Keep relay Data table Variable timer Byte
142 X1000 to X1011 Y0 to Y127 142 Y1000 to Y1005 256 F0 to F255 Builtin I/O card *1) Builtin I/O card *1) FANUC I/O Link
Addresses
X0 to X127
Remarks
FANUC I/O Link
256
G0 to G255 R0 to R999
1100
R9000 to R9099 A0 to A24 C0 to C79 K0 to K16 K7 to K19 D0 to D1859 T0 to T79
Operation results, reserved system area
A C K D T
25 80 20 1860 80
Reserved system area
*1 Address change is not possible when a builtin I/O card is used.
203
B62705EN/03
4.2.3
Address List
I/O card A and C (21MB, 210MB) MTPMC
The table below lists the addresses for the interface signals between the CNC and PMC.
Bit No.
#7 X1000 X1001 X1002 X1003 X1004 X1005 X1006 X1007 X1008 X1009 X1010 X1011 X1012 X1013 *ESP *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1 SKIP ESKIP #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE 1 Signals enclosed in thick lines are DI signals for matrix configuration. 2 In DI signals except for *ESP, if the function of a DI signal is not used, it can be used for a general purpose DI signal.
204
B62705EN/03
PMCMT
#7 Y1000 Y1001 Y1002 Y1003 Y1004 Y1005 Y1006 Y1007 Y1008 Y1009 Y1010 Y1011 Y1012 Y1013 #6 #5
Bit No.
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE 1 Signals enclosed in thick lines are DI signals for matrix configuration. 2 The signals with dash cannot be used.
205
B62705EN/03
I/O board B and D (21MB, 210MB) MTPMC(CNC)
Bit No.
#7 X1000 X1001 X1002 X1003 X1004 X1005 X1006 X1007 X1008 X1009 X1010 X1011 X1012 X1013 *ESP *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1 SKIP ESKIP #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE 1 Those signals indicated by a solid oblique line cannot be used. Those signals indicated by a dotted oblique line cannot be used with I/O card B, only with I/O card D. 2 In DI signals except for *ESP, if the function of a DI signal is not used, it can be used for a general purpose DI signal.
206
B62705EN/03
PMCMT
#7 Y1000 Y1001 Y1002 Y1003 Y1004 Y1005 Y1006 Y1007 Y1008 Y1009 Y1010 Y1011 Y1012 Y1013 #6 #5
Bit No.
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE Those signals indicated by a solid oblique line cannot be used. Those signals indicated by a dotted oblique line cannot be used with I/O card B, only with I/O card D.
207
B62705EN/03
PMCCNC
#7 G000 G001 G002 G003 G004 G005 G006 G007 G008 G009 G010 G011 G012 G013 G014 G015 G016 G017 G018 G019 G020 G021 G022 G023 G024 G025 G026 G027 G028 G029 *SSTP SOR CON HS2D RT HS2C HS2B MP2 *JV7 *JV15 *FV7 *JV6 *JV14 *FV6 *JV5 *JV13 *FV5 ERS EXLM RRW *FLWU *SP BFIN AFL MFIN3 ED7 ED15 ESTB #6 ED6 ED14 EA6 #5 ED5 ED13 EA5
Bit No.
#4 ED4 ED12 EA4 #3 ED3 ED11 EA3 #2 ED2 ED10 EA2 #1 ED1 ED9 EA1 #0 ED0 ED8 EA0
MFIN2
FIN TFIN SFIN *ABSM ST EFIN MFIN SRV
OVC
*ESP PN16 *JV4 *JV12 *FV4 PN3 *JV3 *JV11 *FV3 PN4 *JV2 *JV10 *FV2 PN2 *JV1 *JV9 *FV1
*IT PN1 *JV0 *JV8 *FV0
ROV2
ROV1
HS2A MP1
HS1D HS3D
HS1C HS3C
HS1B HS3B
HS1A HS2A
CR2 SAR
CR1
208
B62705EN/03
PMCCNC
#7 G030 G031 G032 G033 G034 G035 G036 G037 G038 G039 G040 G041 G042 G043 G044 G045 G046 G047 G048 G049 G050 G051 G052 G053 G054 G055 G056 G057 G058 G059 UI7 UI15 UI6 UI14 UI5 UI13 DRN KEY4 TL64 KEY3 TL32 HS2ID DMMC ZRN DNCI HS2IC HS2IB R08I SIND R0812 SIND2 R07I SSIN R0712 SSIN2 R06I SGN R0612 SGN2 SOV7 #6 SOV6 #5 SOV5
Bit No.
#4 SOV4 #3 SOV3 #2 SOV2 #1 SOV1 #0 SOV0
R05I
R04I R12I
R03I R11I R0312 R1112
R02I R10I R0212 R1012
R01I R09I R0112 R0912
R0512
R0412 R1212
HS2IA
HS1ID HS31D
HS1IC HS31C MD4
HS1IB HS31B MD2 MLK
HA1IA HS31A MD1 BDT1
KEY2 TL16
KEY1 TL08 TL04
SBK TL02 TL01
TLRST TLRST1 TLSKP *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV9 *TLV0 *TLV8
TMRON UI4 UI12 UI3 UI11 UI2 UI10 UI1 UI9 UI0 UI8
EXWT
EXSTP
EXRD
MINP
209
B62705EN/03
PMCCNC
#7 G060 G061 G062 G063 G064 G065 G066 G067 G068 G069 G070 G071 G072 G073 G074 G075 G076 G077 G078 G079 G080 G081 G082 G083 G084 G085 G086 G087 G088 G089 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 MRDYB ORCMB RCHB RSLB SFRB MRDYA ORCMA RCHA RSLA SFRA EKSET #6 #5
Bit No.
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RGTAP
ENBKY IGNVRY
SRVA
CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA *ESPA ARSTA INDXA

MORCMA
SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA
RCHHGAMFNHGAINCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA MPOFA SRVB
CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB *ESPB ARSTB INDXB

MORCMB
SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB
RCHHGBMFNHGBINCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB MPOFB SHA04 SHA03 SHA11 SHB04 SHB03 SHB11 SHA02 SHA10 SHB02 SHB10 SHA01 SHA09 SHB01 SHB09
SHA00 SHA08 SHB00 SHB08
Reserve for order made macro Reserve for order made macro
210
B62705EN/03
PMCCNC
#7 G090 G091 G092 G093 G094 G095 G096 G097 G098 G099 G100 G101 G102 G103 G104 G105 G106 G107 G108 G109 G110 G111 G112 G113 G114 G115 G116 G117 G118 G119 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 #6 #5
Bit No.
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
EKC4
EKC3
EKC2
EKC1
EKC0
+J4
+J3
+J2
+J1
J4
J3
J2
J1
MI4
MI3
MI2
MI1
MLK4
MLK3
MLK2
MLK1
*+L4
*+L3
*+L2
*+L1
*L4
*L3
*L2
*L1
211
B62705EN/03
PMCCNC
#7 G120 G121 G122 G123 G124 G125 G126 G127 G128 G129 G130 G131 G132 G133 G134 G135 G136 G137 G138 G139 G140 G141 G142 G143 G144 G145 G146 G147 G148 G149 #6 #5
Bit No.
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SVF4
SVF3
SVF2
SVF1
*IT4
*IT3
*IT2
*IT1
+MIT4
+MIT3
+MIT2
+MIT1
MIT4
MIT3
MIT2
MIT1
EAX4
EAX3
EAX2
EAX1
EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA EMSBKA EC6A EIF7A EIF6A EC5A EIF5A EC4A EIF4A EC3A EIF3A EC2A EIF2A EC1A EIF1A EIF9A EIA1A EID9A
EFINA EC0A EIF0A EIF8A EIA0A EID8A
EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EID7A EID6A EID5A EIA4A EIA3A EIA2A
EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A
EID23A EID22A EID21A EID20A EID19A EID18A EID17A EID16A EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A
212
B62705EN/03
PMCCNC
#7 G150 G151 G152 G153 G154 G155 G156 G157 G158 G159 G160 G161 G162 G163 G164 G165 G166 G167 G168 G169 G170 G171 G172 G173 G174 G175 G176 G177 G178 G179 DRNE *FV7E #6 RTE *FV6E #5 OVCE *FV5E
Bit No.
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ROV2E ROV1E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E
EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EMSBKB EC6B EIF7B EIF6B EC5B EIF5B EC4B EIF4B EC3B EIF3B EC2B EIF2B EC1B EIF1B EIF9B EID1B EID9B
EFINB EC0B EIF0B EIF8B EID0B EID8B
EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B
EID15B EID14B EID13B EID12B EID11B EID10B
EID23B EID22B EID21B EID20B EID19B EID18B EID17B EID16B EID31B EID30B EID29B EID28B EID27B EID26B EID25B EID24B
EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC EMSBKC EC6C EIF7C EIF6C EC5C EIF5C EC4C EIF4C EC3C EIF3C EC2C EIF2C EC1C EIF1C EIF9C EID1C EID9C
EFINC EC0C EIF0C EIF8C EID0C EID8C
EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EID7C EID6C EID5C EID4C EID3C EID2C
EID15C EID14C EID13C EID12C EID11C EID10C
EID23C EID22C EID21C EID20C EID19C EID18C EID17C EID16C EID31C EID30C EID29C EID28C EID27C EID26C EID25C EID24C
EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D
EFIND EC0D
213
B62705EN/03
PMCCNC
#7 G180 G181 G182 G183 G184 G185 G186 G187 G188 G189 G190 G191 G192 EIF7D #6 EIF6D #5 EIF5D
Bit No.
#4 EIF4D #3 EIF3D #2 EIF2D #1 EIF1D EIF9D EID1D EID9D #0 EIF0D EIF8D EID0D EID8D
EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EID7D EID6D EID5D EID4D EID3D EID2D
EID15D EID14D EID13D EID12D EID11D EID10D
EID23D EID22D EID21D EID20D EID19D EID18D EID17D EID16D EID31D EID30D EID29D EID28D EID27D EID26D EID25D EID24D
IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1
214
B62705EN/03
D I/O card E (21TB, 210TB)

MT PMC
Address 7 X1000 X1001 X1002 X1003 X1004 SKIP SKIP X1005 X1006 X1007 X1008 X1009 X1010 X1011 *ESP *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1 ESKIP SKIP6 MIT2 SKIP5 +MIT2 SKIP4 MIT1 SKIP3 +MIT1 SKIP2 ZAE SKIP8 XAE SKIP7 6 5 Bit number 4 3 2 1 0
NOTE 1 The bit positions indicated with shading can be used only for I/O board (96/64). 2 The signals indicated in the box (heavy solid lines) are for highspeed receivers as well as for a group with a switchable common. 3 Address X1004 allows common switching.
215
B62705EN/03
PMC MT
Address Y1000 Y1001 Y1002 Y1003 Y1004 Y1005 Y1006 Y1007 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003 Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007 Bit number
NOTE The bit positions indicated with shading used only for I/O board (96/64).
can be
4.2.4
Builtin Debug Function
Function Display of sequence program Diagnostic function Contents Dynamic display of ladder diagram STitle data display S signal status (symbol can be displayed) S PMC alarm display S Signal trace S Memory contents display S Signal waveform display (*) S I/O connection status display (*) S Timer S Counter S Keep relay S Data table Ladder diagram editing a ladder edit module is required)
Setting and displaying data
Sequence program edit function
* Applicabe CNC is limited
216
B62705EN/03
4.2.5
System Reserve Area of Internal Relay
(1) R9000 (Operation output register for the ADD, SUB, MULB, DIVB, and COMPB functional instructions)
#7 R9000 #6 #5 V #4 #3 #2 #1 N #0 Z Operation result register Zero Sign is minus Overflow
(2) R9000 (Error output for the EXIN, WINDR, WINDW, MMCWR, MMCWW, MMC3R, and MMC3W functional instructions)
#7 R9000 The instruction ended in error. #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
(3) R9002 to R9005 (Operation output registers for the DIVB functional instruction) The data remaining after the DIVB functional instruction is executed in output.
#7 R9002 R9003 R9004 R9005 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Register for remainder (used by DIVB instruction)
(4) R9091 (System timer)

4 signals can be used as system timer. The specifications of every signal are as following.
#7 R9091 always OFF always ON Cyclic signal of 200 ms (104 ms ON, 96 ms OFF) Cyclic signal of 1 second. (504 ms ON, 496 ms OFF) #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE 1 Each signal is initially off. 2 R9091.0 and R9091.1 are set cyclically at the beginning of the first ladder level. 3 Each signal (ONOFF signal) has an accuracy of "8 ms.
217
B62705EN/03
R9091.5 104ms 96ms
200ms
R9091.6 504ms 1s 496ms
4.2.6
Execution Period of PMC
Sequence program From NC (1) END1 2nd level (Normal sequence) (2)1 1st level (Highspeed sequence)
Synchronized buffer (2)2
Head of 2nd level (2)n
From MT
8msec
END2
Period (1) 1st level (2)1 2nd level (2)2 (2)n (2)1 (1) (1) (1)
218
B62705EN/03
4.3
PMC SCREEN 4.3.1
Display Method
1. Press
SYSTEM
2. Press soft key [PMC], then PMC screen is displayed and the following soft keys are displayed:
PMC CONTROL SYSTEM MENU
MONIT RUN
SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM RUN/STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT
PMCLAD
: DYNAMIC LADDER DISPLAY : DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION : PARAMETER (T/C/K/D) : RUN/STOP SEQUENCE PROGRAM : EDIT SEQUENCE PROGRAM : I/O SEQUENCE PROGRAM : SYSTEM PARAMETER : PMC MONITOR
PMCDGN PMCPRM
When builtin programmer is running.
System parameter screen Status display of PMC I/O signal Dynamic display of sequence program STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT System parameter screen Input/output of sequence program Editing sequence program RUN/STOP of sequence
The no. of menus to be displayed changes depending on presence/ absence of builtin programmer.
PMCRA1/RA5 (Without memory card for editing)
RUN/STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM f f
PMCRA1/RA5 (With memory card for editing)

f f f f
: Cannot be displayed nor used.
219
B62705EN/03
4.3.2
PMCLAD Screen
Press soft key [PMCLAD], and a sequence program is displayed dynamically and operation monitoring can be confirmed :
Number of net displayed RUN/STOP status
Ladder display LADDER LOG1 LOG1 X008.4
NET 00010004 MONIT RUN LOG1 ALWAYS1 Comment
*ESP EMERGENCY STOP
END1 PORD POR POWER ON RESET

TOP BOTTOM SRCH WSRCH NSRCH
Other soft keys

FSCRH ADRESS
SYMBOL
Switched each time pressed
D Contents displayed D Search method
1. Green (Low brightness) display Contacts :open Relay :off 2. White (High brightness) display Contacts : closed Relay : on
PAGE
1. Use the cursor keys display positions. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
or the page keys
PAGE
to change
[TOP]:Searches top of ladder. [BOTTOM]:Search bottom of ladder. Address.bit,[SRCH] or Signal name, [SRCH] Address.bit,[WSRCH] or Signal name ,[WSRCH] Net no.[NSRCH]:Ladder is displayed from the specified net. Functional instruction no. [FSRCH] or Functional instruction name[FSRCH] 8. [ADRESS]:Signal is displayed by address and bit no. 9. [SYMBOL]:Signal is displayed by signal name (symbol). (If symbol is not registered at program preparation time, the address of the signal is displayed).
220
B62705EN/03
[Remarks] D The search function searches a signal in the forward direction and displays the ladder with the searched signal at its head. Because there may exist plural contacts, repeat the search operation to find plural locations, repeat the search operation to find plural locations with the specified signal. D If a specified signal is not found up to the end of the program (ladder), execution returns to the head of a program and search continues. D Dump display on ladder diagram Ladder diagram and signal status dump can displayed together. The dump is displayed over 2 lines at the last line of ladder diagram by pressing the [DUMP] soft key.
PAGE PAGE
keys or [SEARCH] soft key is used for changing of PMC
address. The [DUMP] soft key has the follwing functions. (1) [BYTE] : Byte type display (1 BYTE)
G0000 00 14 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 G0016 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
(2) [WORD]
: Word type display (2 BYTE)

G0000 1400 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 G0016 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
(3) [D.WORD] : Long word type display (4 BYTE)

G0000 00001400 00000001 00000000 00000000 G0016 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
D Parameter display on ladder diagram
The value of parameter of a functional instruction is displayed in the functional instruction of a ladder diagram. The function of the soft key is as follows: (1) [DPARA] : The value of parameter is displayed in functional instruction. (2) [NDPARA] : The value of parameter is not displayed in functional instruction.
D Stop of ladder diagram display by trigger of signal 4084 series
The ladder display can be stopped by manual operation or trigger of signal. The former ladder diagram display renews signal status every moment. But by using this function, all the ladder diagram at the specified moment can be checked. The stop conditions as a trigger are specified by rising or falling edge detection of the designated signal.
221
B62705EN/03
[Display of setting trigger] The setting address, condition and counter are displayed at the title line.
MODE:ON : X0000. 0 : 0 : 0001
COUNT: Trigger checking number (default 1) POINT: Trigger checking number (default 0) 0 : the top of the 1st level 1 : after END1 execution 2 : after END2 execution 3 : after END3 execution
ADR: Trigger setting address ON: Rising edge detection (TRGON) OFF: Falling edge detection (TRGOFF)
* Setting form adr ;p1 ;p2+[TRGON/TRGOFF]soft key NOTE ;=EOB adr (trigger address) ;p1 (trigger point) ;p2 (trigger checking number (1 to 65535)) * Because parameters are stored in the nonvolatile memory, they are not lost even if the power is turned off. When bit 2 of keep relay K18 is set to 1 after parameters for sampling are specified, the trigger function automatically starts when the power is turned on. For this operation, press [TRIGER] soft key to bring the following menu.
SEARCH RET ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW
TRGON
TRGOFF
START
NEXT
DUMP
DPARA
TRGSRC
INIT
The function of the [TRIGER] soft key is explained below: (1) [TRGON] : The trigger function is stopped when a specified address signal goes high (is turned ON). (2) [TRGOFF]: The trigger function is stopped when a specified address signal goes low (is turned OFF). (3) [START] : Pressing this key switches between trigger function execution and trigger function termination. While the trigger function is being executed, the TRG indication blinks.
222
B62705EN/03
(4) [TRGSRC]: An instruction at which the trigger function has been stopped by a specified address signal is searched for and indicated by blinking. (5) [INIT] : The trigger setting is initialized. D Divided display of ladder diagram 4084 series This function is used for displaying the divided screen. It can display max. six division. For this operation, depress [WINDOW] soft key to bring the following menu.
SEARCH RET ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW
DIVIDE
CANCEL
DELETE
SELECT
WIDTH
The function of the soft key [WINDOW] is as follows: (1) [DIVIDE] : The screen will be divided. The dividing display of ladder diagram can be displayed for the designated NET number. (NET number+[DIVIDE]) : The dividing display of ladder diagram display ends. (The screen returns to normal display.) : The screen division subject to operation is ended. : Change the screen subject to division operation. The screen in operation is displayed by purple title line, another screen is displayed by blue title line. In monochrome CRT, the screen is displayed by changing brightness. : Change the width of division by using [EXPAND] or [SHRINK] soft key. : The divided screen is expanded. : The divided screen is shrank.
(2) [CANCEL] (3) [DELETE] (4) [SELECT]
(5) [WIDTH] (6) [EXPAND] (7) [SHRINK] D ONLINE EDIT PMCRA3 in 4084 series
When bit 1 in the keep relay K17 is 1, this function is available and [ONLEDT] soft key is displayed. When the ladder program is executing, a part of the ladder program can be changed. S Change the type of contact (A contact, B contact) S Change address of contact and coil. S Change address parameter of functional instruction. (This function dont change the size.) (Cannot be Addition, deletion and chanegable data size) When bit 3 in the keep relay K18 is 1, this program is automatically transferred to backup RAM after online edit. When bit 3 in the keep relay K18 is 0, transfer to backup RAM with COPY function of I/O screen. If power is off without this operation, edited data is lost.
223
B62705EN/03
4.3.3
PMCDGN Screen
D TITLE screen
Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMCs diagnostic screen is displayed.
The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed.

Page number
PMC TITLE DATA #1
MONIT RUN
PMC PROGRAM NO. : EDITION NO. : PMC CONTROL PROGRAM SERIES : 4063 EDITION : 08 (SERIES : 4065 EDITION : 08) PMC TYPE CONTROL : RB3 PROGRAM : RB3 MEMORY USED : KB LADDER : KB SYMBOL : KB MESSAGE : KB SCAN TIME : MSEC SCAN MAX : 016 MS MIN : 008 MS
TITLE Other soft keys M.SRCH 1st page ANALYS STATUS ALARM TRACE
PMC PROGRAM NO. EDITION NO.
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM SERIES : EDITION : MEMORY USED LADDER SYMBOL MESSAGE SCAN TIME 2nd page : : : : :
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : MACHINE TOOL NAME : CNC & PMC TYPE NAME : PROGRAM DRAWING NO. : DATE OF DRAWING : PROGRAM DESIGNED BY : ROM WRITTEN BY : REMARKS :

: : KB KB KB KB MSEC
Set when PMC is prepared
Series and edition of PMC control software Memory used and execution time is displayed.
Set when PMC is prepared.
3rd page
224
B62705EN/03
D STATUS screen
On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed.
PMC SIGNAL STATUS ADDRESS G0000 G0001 G0002 G0003 G0004
MONIT RUN 0 ED0 0 ED8 0 EA0 0

Signal name Signal state 0:Off 1:On
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FIN 0 0 0 0 0
0 reverses for
signals with *.
Signal state
0 0: On
1: Off
SEARCH
[Search Method] Page keys Cursor keys

PAGE PAGE
:Forward and Backward by screen :Forward and Backward by diagnostic number
To search a specified address or signal name, input an address number or signal name and press [SEARCH]. D Alarm screen Displays an alarm generated in PMC.
PMC ALARM MESSAGE ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
MONIT RUN
Alarm display For details of alarms, refer to Appendix A List of Alarms.
ALM
TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE
Blinked
225
B62705EN/03
D TRACE screen
Every time a specified signal changes, the signal status is memorized in the trace memory. This function is useful for identifying intermittent troubles. 1 Trace parameter screen
PMC SIGNAL TRACE
MONIT RUN
TRACE MODE : (0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD) 1STTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY) ADDRESS : MASK DATA : 2NDTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY) ADDRESS : MASK DATA :
T.DISP
EXEC
Changes to a trace memory display screen (Screen on the next page) Select each item by cursor keys
a. TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode 0=Records changes of 1byte signals 1=Records changes of independent 2byte signals 2=Records changes of consecutive 2byte signals b. ADDRESS TYPE: 0=PMC address is used for tracing address. 1=Physical address is used for tracing address. (Mainly used for Clanguage program) c. ADDRESS:Set a tracing address. d. MASK DATA: The bits to be traced are specified by a hexadecimal number (2 digits). For example, to trace the signals at bit 7,6,5 and 0, set E1 (hexadecimal) to MASK DATA. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 E1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 However, even if bit 4,3,2 and 1 changes, tracing (memory registration) cannot be done but signal status is memorized when a tracing is executed. [Correspondence of binary and hexadecimal number] 00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316 01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716 10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16 11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16
226
B62705EN/03
2 Trace memory contents display screen
PMC SIGNAL TRACE
MONIT RUN
Trace address and mask data (in parentheses)
1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) NO. 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 7 . I I * . . . . . 6 . * I I . . . . . 5 . * * * . . . . . 4 . * * * . . . . . 3 . * * * . . . . . 2 . * * * . . . . . 1 . * * * . . . . . 0 . * * * . . . . . 7 . * * * . . . . . 6 . * * * . . . . . 5 . * * * . . . . . 4 . * * * . . . . . 3 . * * * . . . . . 2 . * * * . . . . . 1 . * * * . . . . . 0 . * * * . . . . .
STOP
Latest status I mark : 1 * mark : 0
TRCPRM
10LCD/14CRT is displayed by 1 and 0.
a. Soft key [TRCPRM]: Return to the trace parameter setting screen (screen of previous page) b. Soft key [EXEC]: Starts tracing. Trace memory is cleared and each time a specified signal changes, its status is recorded. Trace memory is 256 bytes and if tracing is executed 128 times by 2byte tracing, tracing is executed again from the head of memory. c. Soft key [STOP]: Ends the tracing. *The tracing parameters are held even if the power is turned off.
#7 K017 #6
#5 0 : Tracing starts by [EXEC].

#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
1 : Tracing starts automatically after power on
227
B62705EN/03
4.3.4
Memory Display (M.SRCH)
D Display of Screen and Operation 1) Pressing the [M.SRCH] soft key changes the screen to that shown in Fig. 3.5. The displayed soft keys also change. 2) Enter a physical address in hexadecimal from which the contents of the memory are to be displayed. Then pressing the [SEARCH] key displays 256 byte of stored data starting from the specified address. Example) Enter 100000, then pressing the [SEARCH] keydisplays the contents of the memory starting from 100000H.
PAGE
3) An address can be changed using the
or
PAGE
key.
4) Pressing either the [BYTE], [WORD], or [D.WORD] soft key displays data of the corresponding type. If an address at which the memory is not used is specified, a system error occurs. D Function of store memory To store data in memory, set bit 4 of keep relay K17 to 1, move the cursor to a position at which the address of the data to be changed in RAM is displayed, and enter data in units of data type in hexadecimal. Example) Entering 0F41, then pressing the
INPUT
key stores
0F41 at the address specified by the cursor

PMC CONTENTS OF MEMORY 100000 100010 100020 100030 100040 100050 100060 100070 100080 100090 1000A0 1000B0 1000C0 1000D0 1000E0 1000F0 0000 4142 2020 5152 0000 0000 0000 0000 4641 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 4344 2020 5354 0000 0000 0000 0000 4E55 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 4546 2020 5556 0000 0000 0000 0000 4320 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 4748 2020 5758 0000 0000 0000 0000 434F 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 494A 2020 595A 0000 0000 0000 0000 2E2C 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 4B4C 2020 2020 0000 0000 0000 0000 5444 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 4D4E 2020 2020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 4F50 2020 2020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 MONIT RUN ................ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ ................ ................ ................ ................ FANUC CO.LTD.... ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................ ................
SEARCH
INPUT
228
B62705EN/03
D ANALYS screen (Ladder editing card is required) PMCRA3 in 4084 series
Change of signals is displayed as the same display as that on the oscilloscope. 1 Parameter setting screen (1st page)
PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) SAMPLING TIME TRIGGER ADDRESS :
MONIT RUN
(a) (b) (c)
10 (110 SEC)
: G0007.2
CONDITION : 0 (0: START 1: TRIGGERON 2: TRIGGEROFF) TRIGGER MODE : 0 (0: AFTER 1: ABOUT 2: BEFORE 3: ONLY)
(d)
SCOPE
DELETE
INIT
ADDRESS
Select each item by cursor key
(a) Set a sampling time. (b) Specifies an address from which recording of signals is started. (c) Set a condition under which recording is initiated. 0 : Started by soft key [START] 1 : Started by rise of a trigger signal after you press the soft key [START] 2 : Started by fall of a trigger signal after you press the soft key [START] (d) Set a trigger mode 0 : Record signal status after the trigger condition is satisfied 1 : Record signal status before and after the trigger condition is satisfied. 2 : Record signal status before the trigger condition is satisfied. 3 : Record signal status when the trigger condition is satisfied. (Display is same as trace memory).
229
B62705EN/03
2 Parameter setting screen (2nd page)
PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) SIGNAL ADDRESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 : : : : : : : : X0000.0 X0000.1 X0002.0 X0005.0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 : Y0000.0 : R0000.1 : : : : : :
MONIT RUN
Up to 16 signals
SCOPE
DELETE
INIT
ADDRESS
a. b. c. d.
Soft key [SCOPE] : Select signal waveform display screen Soft key [DELETE] : Delete data on the cursor position Soft key [INIT] : Initialize parameters of signal waveform display Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] : Switch addresses and symbols for display
230
B62705EN/03
3 SCOPE screen
PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) MONIT RUN SAMPLING TIME : 10 CONDITION : 1 TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.2 TRIGGER MODE : 0
+---------+---------+---------+------
X0000.0 X0000.1 X0002.0 X0005.0

+---------+---------+---------+------
256(MSEC)
SGNPRM
START
T.SRCH
ADDRESS
The above screen is for a system with graphic display. J and are used for display if graphic function is not equipped. a. Soft key [SGNPRM] : Returns to parameter screen. b. Soft key [START] or [STOP] :Start or stop the record. (If TRIGGER MODE=3, signal is displayed when you press STOP key.) c. Soft key [T.SRCH] :Displayed for a specified time. d. Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :Switch addresses and symbols for display e. Soft key [EXCHG] : Change order of signals displayed. S Press soft key [EXCHG] S Move the cursor to a signal to be changed. S Press soft key [SELECT]. S Move the cursor to the destination. S Press [TO] and [EXEC], then the signal changes its order. f. Soft key [SCALE] : Changes time scale for graphic display. Scale changes from 256 to 512, and to 1024 msec every time you press the key. g. Cursor key : Scrolls time axis forward and backward
231
B62705EN/03
4.3.5
PMCPRM Screen
D Inputting PMC parameters from the MDI 1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state. 2 Set PARAMETER WRITE (on setting screen) to 1 or set the program protect signal (KEY4) to 1.
PWE Timer Counter Keep relay Data table f f f f KEY4 f f Either one Either one
3 Press a soft key and select a required screen. [TIMER] :Timer screen [COUNTR] :Counter screen [KEEPRL] :Keep relay screen [DATA] :Data table screen 4 Press cursor key and move the cursor to a desired number. 5 Input a numeric key and press
INPUT
key and data is input.
6 After the data is input, set PARAMETER WRITE or KEY4 on setting screen to 0. D TIMER screen This screen is used for setting timer time of the functional instruction (SUB 3).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key) Timer no. specified by functional instruction Address specified by ladder
PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001 NO.ADDRESS DATA 01 T00 480 02 T02 960 03 T04 0 04 T06 0 05 T08 0 06 T10 0 07 T12 0 08 T14 0 09 T16 0 10 T18 0
TIMER COUNTR
MONIT RUN DATA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NO.ADDRESS 11 T20 12 T22 13 T24 14 T26 15 T28 16 T30 17 T32 18 T34 19 T36 20 T38
KEEPRL DATA
Timer delay time (msec)
Timer set time : Timer no. 18 is max. 1572.8 sec and its accuracy is 48ms. Timer no. 9 is max. 262.1 sec and its accuracy is 8ms.
232
B62705EN/03
D COUNTER screen
This screen sets and displays max. value of counter and current value of the counter instruction (SUB 4).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key) Max. value of counter (Minimum value is specified by counter ins.) Current value of counter
PMC PARAMETER (COUNTER)#001 NO. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

TIMER
MONIT RUN CURRENT 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DATA
ADDRESS C00 C04 C08 C12 C16 C20 C24 C28 C32 C36
COUNTR
PRESET 100 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
KEEPRL
PRESET and CURRENT can be set up to 9999, respectively.
Address specified by ladder Counter number specified by functional instruction
D KEEP RELAY screen
Address specified by ladder
PMC PARAMETER (KEEP REALAY) #001 NO.ADDRESS 01 K00 02 K01 03 K02 04 K03 05 K04 06 K05 07 K06 08 K07 09 K08 10 K09
TIMER
MONIT RUN DATA 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
DATA 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
KEEPRL
NO.ADDRESS 11 K10 12 K11 13 K12 14 K13 15 K14 16 K15 17 K16 18 K17 19 K18 20 K19
DATA
COUNTR
Address specified by ladder
Used by PMC system
233
B62705EN/03
1 Nonvolatile memory control

K016

#7 #6 #7 #6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#6(MWRTF1) : Writing status in nonvolatile memory #7(MWRTF2) : For checking the writing status in nonvolatile memory
2 PMC system parameter The following keep relays are used by the system, therefore they cannot be used in the sequence program.
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 K017
#0(LADMASK) 0 : Dynamic display of ladder is executed. #1(PRGRAM) 0 : Builtin programmer is not used. 1 : Builtin programmer is used.
1 : Dynamic display of ladder is not executed.
#2(AUTORUN) 0 : A sequence program is executed automatically after the power is turned on. 1 : A sequence program is executed by sequence program soft key. #4(MEMINP) 0 : Data input cannot be done in memory contents display function. 1 : Data input can be done in memory contents display function. #5(TRCSTAT) 0 : Signal tracing starts by soft key [EXEC] in signal trace function. 1 : Signal tracing starts automatically by power on in signal trace function. #6(ANASTAT) 0 : Pressing [EXEC] key initiates sampling by signal waveform display function. 1 : Turning power to on initiates sampling by signal waveform display function. #7(DTBLDSP) 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed. 1 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is not displayed.
K018
K019
* The system uses the unused data areas for the PMC management software. The settings should not be changed. Usually, all bits are set to 0.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
234
B62705EN/03
D DATA TABLE screen
1 Data table setting screen

No. of screen
PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 GROUP TABLE COUNT = NO. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008
G.DATA
MONIT RUN 2 TYPE 0 1 NO.OF DATA 10 20

No. of data table groups
ADDRESS D0000 D0020
PARAMETER 00000000 00000011
G.CONT
NO.SRH
INIT
No. of data table Data length Table parameter Data table head address Group no. of data table
a. Soft key [G.DATA] : Select data display screen of data table. (Next screen) b. c.
NO. OF GROUPS
[G.CONT]: Set the no. of groups of data table. [NO.SRH]: Move the cursor to a specified group.
Group No.
d. Soft key [INIT]: Initializes the setting of data table. No. of groups is 1, ADDRESS is D0000, PARAMETER is 0000000, TYPE is 0, NO. OF DATA is 1860. This operation is done usually when a sequence program is prepared. When PMC parameters are set, internal parameters are not affected. PARAMETER
#7 K019 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2

#1 #0 0 : Binary format 1 : BCD format
0 : Without protection for input 1 : With protection for input
TYPE 0 : 1byte length 1 : 2byte length

PAGE
2 : 4byte length
e. Using the page key
PAGE
, next screen/previous screen can be
selected. (The screen cannot be switched when the field indicating the number of screens is blank.)
235
B62705EN/03
2 Data display screen

Group number Page number
PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 NO. 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009
C.DATA
MONIT RUN DATA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ADDRESS D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0006 D0007 D0008 D0009
GSRCH SEARCH
a. Soft key [C.DATA] b. c.

Group No. Address
: Returns to the data table setting screen. (Previous screen)
[GSRCH] : Head of the specified group is selected. [SEARCH] : Searches an address in a group currently selected.
236
B62705EN/03
4.4
LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE
Group SYMBOL *+L1 to *+L4 *-L1 to *-L4 *ABSM *DEC1 to *DEC4 *EAXSL *ESP *ESP *ESPA *ESPB *FLWU * *FV0 to *FV7 *FV0E to *FV7E *FV0O to *FV7O *HROV0 to *HROV6 *IT *IT1 to *IT4 *JV0 to *JV15 *JV0O to *JV15O *SP *SSTP *TLV0 to *TLV9 +J1 to +J4 + +J1O to +J4O +MIT1 to +MIT4 -J1 to -J4 -J1O to -J4O -MIT1 to -MIT4 ABTQSV ABTSP1 ABTSP2 AFL A AL ALMA ALMB ARSTA ARSTB Overtravel signal Overtravel signal Manual absolute signal Deceleration signal for reference position return Control axis selection status signal (PMC axis control) Emergency sto stop signal stop signal (serial s spindle) Emergency sto indle) Followup signal Feedrate override signal Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control) Software operators panel signal (*FV0 to *FV7) 1% step rapid traverse override signal Interlock signal Interlock signal for each axis Manual feedrate override signal Software operators panel signal (*JV0 to *JV15) Feed hold signal Spindle stop signal Tool life count override signal Feed axis and direction selection signal Software operators panel signal (+J1 to +J4) Interlock signal for each axis and direction Feed axis and direction selection signal Software operators panel signal (J1 to J4) Interlock signal for each axis and direction Servo axis abnormal load detected signal Firstspindle abnormal load detected signal Secondspindle abnormal load detected signal Miscellaneous function lock signal Alarm signal Alarm signal (serial s spindle) indle) Alarm reset signal (serial spindle) s indle) Signal names Address G114 G116 G006#2 X1013 F129#7 X1012#4 G008#4 G071#1 G075#1 G007#5 G012 G151 F078 G096#0 to #6 G008#0 G130 G010,G011 F079,F080 G008#5 G029#6 G049#0 to G050#1 G100 F081#0,#2,#4,#6 G132#0 to #3 G102 F081#1,#3,#5,#7 G134#0 to #3 F090#0 F090#1 F090#2 G005#6 F001#0 F045#0 F049#0 G071#0 G075#0
237
B62705EN/03
Group BAL BDT1 B BDTO BF BFIN
SYMBOL B00 to B31 Battery alarm signal
Signal names 2nd auxiliary function code signal Optional block skip signal Software operators panel signal (BDT) 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal 2nd auxiliary function completion signal Background editing signal Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle) Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle) Power line switch signal (serial spindle) s indle) Cs contour control change signal Clutch/gear signal (serial s spindle) indle) Cutting feed signal Differential mode command (serial spindle) s indle) Distribution end signal
Address F030 to F033 F001#2 G044#0 F075#2 F007#7 G005#7 F053#4 F046#1 F050#1 F046#0 F050#0 G027#7 G070#3,#2 G074#3,#2 F002#6 G072#3 G076#3 F001#3 F009#7 F009#6 F009#5 F009#4 G042#7 G043#5 G046#7 G150#7 F075#5 G002#0 to #6 F131#1 F134#1 F137#1 F140#1 F182 F112 G136 F130#7 F133#7 F136#7 F139#7 G142#7 G154#7 G166#7 G178#7
BGEACT CFINA CFINB CHPA C CHPB CON CTH1A,CTH2A CTH1B,CTH2B CUT DEFMDA DEFMDB DEN DM00 DM01 D DM02 DM30 DMMC DNCI DRN DRNE DRNO EA0 to EA6 EABUFA EABUFB EABUFC EABUFD EACNT1 to EACNT4 EADEN1 to EADEN4 E EAX1 to EAX4 EBSYA EBSYB EBSYC EBSYD EBUFA EBUFB EBUFC EBUFD
Decode M signal
Direct operation select signal DNC operation select signal Dry run signal Dry run signal (PMC axis control) Software operators panel signal (DRN) Address signal for external data input
Buffer full signal (PMC axis control)
Controlling signal (PMC axis control) Distribution completion signal (PMC axis control) Control axis select signal (PMC axis control) Axis control command read completion signal g (PMC axis control)
Axis control command read signal (PMC axis control)
238
B62705EN/03
Group
SYMBOL EC0A to EC6A EC0B to EC6B EC0C to EC6C EC0D to EC6D ECKZA ECKZB ECKZC ECKZD ECLRA ECLRB ECLRC ECLRD ED0 to ED15 EDENA EDENB EDENC EDEND EF EFD EFIN EFINA EFINB EFINC EFIND EGENA EGENB EGENC EGEND EIALA EIALB EIALC EIALD EID0A to EID31A EID0B to EID31B EID0C to EID31C EID0D to EID31D EIF0A to EIF15A EIF0B to EIF15B EIF0C to EIF15C EIF0D to EIF15D EINPA EINPB EINPC EINPD EKC0 to EKC7 EKENB Key code signal
Signal names
Address G143#0 to #6 G155#0 to #6 G167#0 to #6 G179#0 to #6 F130#1 F133#1 F136#1 F139#1 G142#6 G154#6 G166#6 G178#6 G000,G001 F130#3 F133#3 F136#3 F139#3 F008#0 F007#1 G005#1 G142#0 G154#0 G166#0 G178#0 F130#4 F133#4 F136#4 F139#4 F130#2 F133#2 F136#2 F139#2 G146 to G149 G158 to G161 G170 to G173 G182 to G185 G144,G145 G156,G157 G168,G169 G180,G181 F130#0 F133#0 F136#0 F139#0 G098 F053#7
Axis control command signal (PMC axis control)
Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control)
Reset signal (PMC axis control)
Data signal for external data input
Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control)
External operation signal External operation signal for highspeed interface External operation function completion signal
Auxiliary function com completion letion signal (PMC axis control)
Axis moving signal (PMC axis control)
Alarm signal (PMC axis control)
Axis control data signal (PMC axis control)
Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control)
In position In osition signal (PMC axis control)
Key code read completion signal
239
B62705EN/03
Group
SYMBOL EKSET EM11A to EM48A EM11B to EM48B EM11C to EM48C EM11D to EM48D EMBUFA EMBUFB EMBUFC EMBUFD EMFA EMFB EMFC EMFD EMSBKA EMSBKB EMSBKC EMSBKD ENB ENBKY EOTNA EOTNB EOTNC Spindle enable signal key code read signal
Signal names
Address G066#7 F132,F142 F135,F145 F138,F148 F141,F151 G142#2 G154#2 G166#2 G178#2 F131#0 F134#0 F137#0 F140#0 G143#7 G155#7 G167#7 G179#7 F001#4 G066#1 F130#6 F133#6 F136#6 F139#6 F130#5 F133#5 F136#5 F139#5 F129#5 F060#0 G008#7 G142#3 G154#3 G166#3 G178#3 F060#1 X1008#6 G142#4 G154#4 G166#4 G178#4 G002#7 G142#5 G154#5 G166#5 G178#5
Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control)
Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control)
Block stop sto disable signal (PMC axis control)
External key input mode selection signal
Negative direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) Negativedirection
EOTND EOTPA EOTPB EOTPC EOTPD EOV0 EREND ERS ESBKA ESBKB ESBKC ESBKD ESEND ESKIP ESOFA ESOFB ESOFC ESOFD ESTB ESTPA ESTPB ESTPC ESTPD Axis control tem temporary orary sto stop signal (PMC axis control) Read signal for external data input Servo off signal (PMC axis control) Search completion signal for external data input Skip signal (PMC axis control) Block sto stop signal (PMC axis control) Override 0% signal (PMC axis control) Read completion signal for external data input External reset signal Positive direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) Positivedirection
240
B62705EN/03
Group EXLM E EXRD
SYMBOL
Signal names Stored stroke check select signal External read start signal External read/punch stop signal External punch start signal Completion signal Cs contour control change completion signal Lockahead control mode signal Gear selection signal (input) Gear selection signal (output ) 1% step rapid traverse override select signal Manual handle feed axis selection signal Software operators panel signal (HS1A) Software operators panel signal (HS1B) Software operators panel signal (HS1C) Software operators panel signal (HS1D) Manual handle interruption axis select signal Manual handle feed axis selection signal Manual handle interruption axis select signal Manual handle feed axis selection signal Manual handle interruption axis select signal Allaxis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal Eachaxis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal Inch input signal Incremental command (Serial s spindle) indle) Incremental type ty e orientation signal (Serial spindle) s indle) stop position spindle) Change command of orientation sto osition (Serial s indle) Key input disable signal Inposition signal Memory protect signal Software operators panel signal (KEY1 to KEY4) Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle) s indle) Load detection signal 2 (serial spindle) s indle) Miscellaneous function code signal 2nd M function code signal 3rd M function code signal CNC ready signal Manual absolute check signal Miscellaneous function lock check signal Optional block skip check signal Power line switch completion com letion signal (serial s spindle) indle)
Address G007#6 G058#1 G058#2 G058#3 G004#3 F044#1 F066#0 G028#1,#2 F034#0 to #2 G096#7 G018#0 to #3 F077#0 F077#1 F077#2 F077#3 G041#0 to #3 G018#4 to #7 G041#4 to #7 G019#0 to #3 G042#0 to #3 G066#0 G192 F002#0 G072#5 G076#5 F047#1 F051#1 G072#0 G076#0 F053#0 F104 G046#3 to #6 F075#6 F045#4 F049#4 F045#5 F049#5 F010 to F013 F014 to F015 F016 to F017 F001#7 F004#2 F004#4 F004#0 G071#3 G075#3
EXSTP EXWT FIN FSCSL G08MD GR1,GR2 GR1O,GR2O,GR3O HROV HS1A to HS1D HS1AO HS1BO HS1CO
HS1DO HS1IA to AHS1ID HS2A to HS2D HS2IA to HS2ID HS3A to HS3D HS3IA to HS3ID IGNVRY IGVRY1 to IGVRY4 INCH INCMDA INCMDB
INCSTA INCSTB INDXA INDXB INHKY INP1 to INP4 KEY1 to KEY4 KEYO LDT1A LDT1B LDT2A LDT2B M00 to M31 M200 to M215 M300 to M315 MA
MABSM MAFL MBDT1 MCFNA MCFNB
241
B62705EN/03
Group MD1O MD2O MD4O
SYMBOL MD1,MD2,MD4 Mode selection signal
Signal names Software operators panel signal (MD1) Software operators panel signal (MD2) Software operators panel signal (MD4) Dry run check signal Memory edit select check signal Auxiliary function strobe signal 2nd M function strobe signal 3rd M function strobe signal Auxiliary function completion signal 2nd M function completion signal 3rd M function completion signal Main spindle MCC status signal g while changing g g spindles (serial spindle) Manual handle feed select check signal Mirror image signal Incremental feed select check signal External program input start signal JOG feed select check signal Allaxis machine lock signal Eachaxis machine lock signal Software operators panel signal (MLK) Manual data input select check signal Automatic operation select check signal Mirror image check signal Allaxis machine lock check signal Signal g for completion of spindle orientation with a magnetic g sensor (serial spindle) Signal g for approximate spindle orientation with a magnetic g sensor (serial spindle) Command for spindle orientation with a magnetic g sensor (serial spindle) Manual handle feed amount selection signal (incremental feed signal) Software operators panel signal (MP1) Software operators panel signal (MP2) Motor power ower sto stop signal (serial s spindle) indle) Machine ready signal (serial spindle) s indle) Manual reference position return selection check signal DNC operation select check signal Single block check signal TEACH IN select check signal Axis moving signal Axis moving direction signal
Address G043#0 to #2 F073#0 F073#1 F073#2 F002#7 F003#6 F007#0 F008#4 F008#5 G005#0 G004#4 G004#5 G072#6 G076#6 F003#1 G106 F003#0 G058#0 F003#2 G044#1 G108 F075#4 F003#3 F003#5 F108 F004#1 F046#6 F050#6 F046#7 F050#7 G073#7 G077#7 G019#4,#5 F076#0 F076#1 G073#2 G077#2 G070#7 G074#7 F004#5 F003#4 F004#3 F003#7 F102 F106
MDRN MEDT MF MF2 MF3 MFIN MFIN2 MFIN3 MFNHGA MFNHGB MH MI1 to MI4 MINC MINP MJ MLK MLK1 to MLK4 MLKO M MMDI MMEM MMI1 to MMI4 MMLK MOAR1A MOAR1B MOAR2A MOAR2B MORCMA MORCMB MP1,MP2 MP1O MP2O MPOFA MPOFB MRDYA MRDYB MREF MRMT MSBK MTCHIN MV1 to MV4 MVD1 to MVD4
242
B62705EN/03
Group N
SYMBOL NRROA NRROB OP ORARA ORARB ORCMA ORCMB OUT0 to OUT7 OVC OVCE OVRA OVRB PC1DTA PC1DTB POAR2A POAR2B
Signal names Shortdistant movement command while changing g g the orientation stop position (serial spindle) Automatic operation signal Orientation completion com letion signal (serial spindle) s indle) Orientation command signal (serial spindle) s indle) Orientation command signal (serial spindle) Override cancel signal Override cancellation signal (PMC axis control) Analog override command (serial s spindle) indle) Signal g indicating g the status of the detected onerotation position coder signal (serial spindle) Signal g for approximate spindle orientation with a position coder (serial spindle) Workpiece number search signal program screen display mode signal Target parts count reached signal Position switch signal Spindle S indle motor s speed eed command signal S12bit code signal Output Out ut switch com completion letion signal (serial s spindle) indle) Power line status check signal (serial s spindle) indle) Highoutput g MCC status signal g while changing g g output (serial spindle) Output Out ut switch signal (serial s spindle) indle) Spindle S indle rotation direction signal Rigid tapping signal Rigid tapping spindle selection signal Rotation direction command while changing g g the orientation stop position (serial spindle) Rapid traverse override signal Rapid traverse override signal (PMC axis control) Software operators panel signal (ROV1) Software operators panel signal (ROV2) Read/punch alarm signal Read/punch busy signal
Address G072#2 G076#2 F000#7 F045#7 F049#7 G070#6 G074#6 F072 G006#4 G150#5 G072#4 G076#4 F047#0 F051#0 F046#5 F050#5 G009#0 to 4 F053#1 F062#7 F070#0 to F071#1 G032#0 to G033#3 G034#0 to G035#3 F036#0 to F037#3 F046#3 F050#3 G071#7 G075#7 G072#7 G076#7 F046#2 F050#2 F065#1 F065#0 G061#0 G061#4,#5 G072#1 G076#1 G014#0,#1 G150#0,#1 F076#4 F076#5 F053#3 F053#2
PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,P N16 PRGDPL PRTSF PSW01 to PSW10 R01I to R12I R01I2 to R12I2 R01O to R12O RCFNA RCFNB RCHA RCHB RCHHGA RCHHGB RCHPA RCHPB
RGSPM RGSPP RGTAP RGTSP1,RGTSP2 ROTAA ROTAB ROV1,ROV2 ROV1E,ROV2E ROV1O ROV2O RPALM RPBSY
243
B62705EN/03
Group RPDO RRW RSLA RSLB R RST RT RTAP RTE RTO RWD
SYMBOL Rapid traversing signal Reset&rewind signal
Signal names
Address F002#1 G008#6 G071#6 G075#6 F001#1 G019#7 F076#3 G150#6 F077#6 F000#0 F022 to F025 F000#6 G029#4 F045#3 F049#3 G046#1 F075#3 F045#2 F049#2 F007#2 G005#2 G070#5 G074#5 G033#5 G035#5 G078#0 to G079#3 G080#0 to G081#3 G033#7 G035#7 X1008#7 G071#4 G075#4 G029#5 G030 F000#4 F075#7 G071#2 G075#2 G028#6 G006#0 F002#4 G070#4 G074#4 G033#6 G035#6
Output Out ut switch request signal (serial spindle) s indle) Reset signal Manual rapid traverse selection signal Rigid tapping inprogress signal Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis control) Software operators panel signal (RT) Rewinding signal Spindle speed code signal Servo ready signal Spindle speed arrival signal Speed S eed arrival signal (serial spindle) s indle) Single block signal Software operators panel signal (SBK) Speed S eed detection signal (serial spindle) s indle) Spindle speed strobe signal Spindle function completion signal CW command signal (serial spindle) s indle) Spindle S indle motor command polarity olarity select signal Spindle S indle orientation external sto stop position osition command signal Spindle S indle motor speed s eed command select signal Skip signal Soft start/stop start/sto cancel signal (serial spindle) s indle) Spindle orientation signal Spindle speed override signal Feed hold lamp signal Software operators panel signal (*SP) Spindle S indle select signal (serial spindle) s indle) Spindle stop complete signal Program restart signal Program restart under way signal CCW command signal (serial s spindle) indle) Spindle S indle motor command polarity olarity select signal
S00 to S31 SA SAR SARA SARB SBK SBKO SDTA SDTB SF SFIN SFRA SFRB SGN SGN2 SHA00 to SHA11 SHB00 to SHB11 S SIND SIND2 SKIP SOCNA SOCNB SOR SOV0 to SOV7 SPL SPO SPSLA SPSLB SPSTP SRN SRNMV SRVA SRVB SSIN SSIN2
244
B62705EN/03
Group SSTA SSTB S ST STL
SYMBOL
Signal names Speed spindle) S eed zero signal (serial s indle) Cycle start lamp signal Cycle start signal Servo off signal Tool function code signal Tapping signal Tool function strobe signal Tool function completion signal Tool group number select signal Tool change signal Individual tool change signal Torque limit signal (serial s spindle) indle) Torque limit command HIGH signal (serial s spindle) indle) Torque limit command LOW signal (serial s spindle) indle) New tool select signal Tool change reset signal Individual tool change reset signal Tool skip signal Generalpurpose integrating meter start signal Input signal for custom macro Interrupt signal for custom macro Output Out ut signal for custom macro Reference position return end signal 2nd reference position return end signal Reference position establishment signal Manual reference position return selection signal Software operators panel signal (ZRN)
Address F045#1 F049#1 G007#2 F000#5 G126 F026 to F029 F001#5 F007#3 G005#3 G047#0 to #6 F064#0 F064#2 F045#6 F049#6 G070#1 G074#1 G070#0 G074#0 F064#1 G048#7 G048#6 G048#5 G053#0 G054,G055 G053#3 F054,F055 F056 to F059 F094 F096 F120 G043#7 F073#4
SVF1 to SVF4 T00 to T31 TAP TF TFIN TL01 to TL64 TLCH TLCHI TLMA T TLMB TLMHA TLMHB TLMLA TLMLB TLNW TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP TMRON UI000 to UI015 U UINT UO000 to UO015 UO100 to UO131 ZP1 to ZP4 ZP21 to ZP24 Z ZRF1 to ZRF4 ZRN ZRNO
245
5. DIGITAL SERVO
B62705EN/03
DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of digital servo and adjustment of reference position.
5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . 5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . .
247 250 253 255
246
B62705EN/03
5. DIGITAL SERVO
5.1
INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS
This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is used for field adjustment of machine tool. 1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition. 2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 3111 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed. 1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed. 3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again. 4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following operation:
SYSTEM
key
[SV.PARA].
5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.
SERVO SETTING (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) X AXIS 00000000 MOTOR ID NO. 47 AMR 00000000 CMR 2 FEED GEAR N 1 (N/M) M 125 DIRECTION SET 111 VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8192 POSITION PULSE NO. 12500 REF.COUNTER 8000
INITIAL SET BIT
Y AXIS 00000000 47 00000000 2 1 125 111 8192 12500 8000
PRM PRM PRM PRM PRM PRM PRM PRM PRM PRM
2000 2020 2001 1820 2084 2085 2022 2023 2024 1821
(1) Initial set bit

#7 2000 #6 #5 #4 #3
PRMCAL
#2
#1 DGPRM
#0 PLC01
#0 (PLC01) 0 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as they are: 1 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10. #1 (DGPRM)l 0 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done. 1 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done. #3 (PRMCAL) 1 : Turns to 1 when the initial setting is done. The following parameters are set automatically in accordance with the no. of pulses of pulse coder: PRM 2043(PK1V), PRM 2044(PK2V), PRM 2047(POA1), PRM 2053(PPMAX),PRM 2054(PDDP), PRM 2056(EMFCMP), PRM 2057(PVPA), PRM 2059(EMFBAS), PRM 2074(AALPH),PRM 2076(WKAC)
247
5. DIGITAL SERVO
B62705EN/03
(2) Motor number See Manuals for servo amplifier a series. (3) Arbitrary AMR function (for 50S to 30S)
PRM 2001 #7 AMR7 #6 AMR6 #5 AMR5 #4 AMR4 #3 AMR4 #2 AMR3 #1 AMR2 #0 AMR1
For each axis
#7
1 0 0
#6
0 0 0
#5
0 0 0
#4
0 0 0
#3
0 0 0
#2
0 0 0
#1
1 1 0
#0
0 1 0
Motor model
50S 40S, 30S other than above
NOTE Set 00000000 for serial pulse coder C. (4) CMR

PRM 1820 Command multiply ratio
1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27 2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48
Set value=
1 +100 CMR Set value=2CMR
(5) Turn off the power then back on. (6) Feed gear N/M
PRM PRM 2084 2085 n for flexible feed gear m for flexible feed gear
1) For serial pulse coder A or B, and serial a pulse coder.

n m =
Number of feedback pulses per revolution of motor 1000000
NOTE For serial pulse coder B, use a value not exceeding 250,000 as the number of feedback pulses per revolution.
<<Examples of calculation>>
1/1000 mm
One revolution 8mm of motor 10mm 12mm n=1/m=125 n=1/m=100 n=3/m=250
1/10000 mm
n=2/m=25 n=1/m=10 n=3/m=25
248
B62705EN/03
5. DIGITAL SERVO
(7) Direction of travel

PRM 2022 Rotational direction of motor
111 : Normal (clockwise) 111 : Reverse (counterclockwise) (8) Number of velocity pulses and position pulses 1) For serial pulse coder A or B, or serial a pulse coder
No Paramter No.
High resolution setting Separate detector No. of velocity feedback pulses No. of position feedback pulses 2000 1815 2023 2024 NS 0010 0010 8192 12500 NS/10
Increment system : 1/1000mm Closed loop Semiclosed loop

0010 0000 xxxx xxx 0
Increment system : 1/10000mm Closed loop

0010 0010 819 1250
Semiclosed loop
0010 0000
xxxx xxx 1
NOTE 1 NS is the number of position feedback pulses per one revolution of the motor (multiplied by four) 2 The 50S to 30S motors have different numbers of poles. Set parameter 2001. 3 Even if the system employs a closed loop, bit 3 of parameter 2002 is 1 and bit 4 is 0. (9) Reference counter
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis (0 to 99999999)
6. Turn off the power then back on.
249
5. DIGITAL SERVO
B62705EN/03
5.2
SERVO TUNING SCREEN
5.2.1
Parameter Setting
Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.

#7 3111 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SVS
#0 (SVS)
0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed. 1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.
5.2.2
Displaying Servo Tuning Screen
1. Press
SYSTEM
key
and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
2. Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.

SERVO TUNING (PAMAMETER) FUN.BIT LOOP GAIN TURNING SET. SET PERIOD INT.GAIN PROP.GAIN FILER VELOC.GAIN 01234 N12345 (MONITOR) ALARM 1 00000000 ALARM 2 00000000 ALARM 3 10000000 ALARM 4 00000000 ALARM 5 00000000 LOOP GAIN 2999 POS ERROR 556 CURRENT% 10 SPEED RPM 100
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
00000000 3000 0 50 113 1015 0 125
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
SV SET
SV TUN
OPE
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Function bit : PRM 2003 Loop gain : PRM 1825 Tuning start : (Used by automatic servo tuning function) Set period : (Used by automatic servo tuning function) Integral gain : PRM 2043 Proportional gain : PRM 2044 Filter : PRM 2067
Set value= (PRM 2021)+256 256 100
(8) Velocity gain (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
Alarm 1 : DGN 200 (Details of alarm 400 and 414) Alarm 2 : DGN 201 (Details of disconnection alarm, overload) Alarm 3 : DGN 202 (Details of alarm 319) Alarm 4 : DGN 203 (Details of alarm 319) Alarm 5 : DGN 204 (Details of alarm 414) Loop gain : Actual loop gain Position error : Actual position error(DGN 300) Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value. Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation
250
B62705EN/03
5. DIGITAL SERVO
Alarm1
#7 OVL
#6 LV
#5 OVC
#4 HCA
#3 HVA
#2 DCA
#1 FBA
#0 OFA
DGN (200) : #0 (OFA) : #1 (FBA) : #2 (DCA) : #3 (HVA) : #4 (HCA) : #5 (OVC) : #6 (LV) : #7 (OVL) :
Alarm2
Overflow alarm Disconnection alarm Discharge alarm Excessive voltage alarm Abnormal current alarm Overcurrent alarm Insufficient voltage alarm Overload alarm
#7 ALD #6 #5 #4 EXP #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN (201)
Overload alarm Disconnection alarm 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 Amplifier overheat Motor overheat Builtin pulse coder disconnection (Hardware) Separate type pulse coder disconnection (Hardware) Pulse coder disconnection (software)
#7 Alarm3
#6 CSA
#5 BLA
#4 PHA
#3 RCA
#2 BZA
#1 CKA
#0 SPH
DGN (202) : #0 (SPH) : #1 (CKA) : #2 (BZA) : #3 (RCA) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty. Counting the feedback signal is in error. Serial pulse coder is faulty. Internal block has stopped. Battery voltage becomes 0. Replace batteries and set the reference position. Serial pulse coder is faulty. Counting is in error. If the RCA bit is set to 1 when both the FBA bit (bit 1 of alarm 1) and ALD bit of alarm 2 are set to 1 and the EXP bit of alarm 2 (internal hardware disconnection) is set to 1, a count miss alarm (CMAL) occurs in the pulse coder. Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is abnormal. Counting the feedback signal is in error. Battery voltage is in low (warning). Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal.
251
#4 (PHA) : #5 (BLA) : #6 (CSA) :
5. DIGITAL SERVO
B62705EN/03
Alarm4
#7 DTE
#6 CRC
#5 STB
#4 PRM
#3
#2
#1
#0
DGN (203) : #4 (PRM) : #5 (STB) : #6 (CRC) : #7 (DTE) : Parameter detected by the Digital servo is invalid. Communication error of serial pulse coder. Transmitted data is in error. Communication error of serial pulse coder. Transmitted data is in error. Communication error of serial pulse coder. There is no response.
#7 Alarm5 #6 OFS #5 MCC #4 LDM #3 PMS #2 #1 #0
DGN (204) : #3 (PMS) : #4 (LDM) : #5 (MCC) : #6 (OFS) : No. of feedback pulses are in error because pulse coder series or feedback cable is faulty. LED of pulse coder series is abnormal. Contacts of electromagnetic contactor of servo amplifier is blown A/D conversion of current value of digital servo is abnormal.
252
B62705EN/03
5. DIGITAL SERVO
5.3
ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD)
5.3.1
General
Speed Rapid traverse (PRM1420) FL rate (PRM1425 ) Time Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (PRM1620 ) *DEC
PCZ Grid
Grid shift amount (PRM1850)
Reference counter capacity (PRM1821) 10mm/rev
10000P CMR Command
+ f
Error counter 4
Position gain
Speed loop
M (Serial)
GRID
Reference counter
FFG
PC 10000P/rev (Flexible feed gear)
Counter capacity 10000P
D Parameter
#7 PRM 1002 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DLZ #0
#1(DLZ)l 0 : Reference position return method is normal (dog). 1 : Dogless reference position setting is used.
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity [P]
No. of feedback pulses or its division by an integer is set.

253
5. DIGITAL SERVO
B62705EN/03
PRM
1850
Grid shift amount per axis
[P]
When the resolution is 0.0001mm, set the value in the unit ten times the detection unit.
#7 PRM 1815
#6
#5 APC
#4 APZ
#3
#2
#1 OPT
#0
#1(OPT) 0 : Position detection is performed by the pulse coder built in the motor. 1 : Separate type pulse coder or linear scale is used. #4(APZ) Zero position of absolute pulse coder is : 0 : Not established 1 : Established (Turns to 1 after establishment) To manually change the value of the APZ bit from 0 to 1 without first returning to the reference position when using serial pulse coder , follow this procedure: Back up the data with the battery and give the motor one or more turns. Turn the power off then on again, then change the APZ bit setting from 0 to 1. #5(APC) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder. 1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder. D Separate Type Pulse Coder or Linear Scale is Used
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]
Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set to the reference counter capacity. When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of the distance between the reference marks divided by an interfer may be used as a reference counter capacity: Example)
(1 m)
300mm reference counter 30000 20000 15000 10000
etc
254
B62705EN/03
5. DIGITAL SERVO
5.4
DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING
When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return, this function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set by MTB. When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position once set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is replaced or absolute position is lost, perform this setting.
5.4.1
General
Speed Reference position return FL rate (PRM 1425) Time JOG ZRN +J GRID ..........................
ZP
5.4.2
Operation
1 Move the tool near the reference position using a manual operation. 2 Select the reference position return mode or switch. 3 Press a button for an axisanddirectionselectsignal + or , and the machine moves to the next grid, then stops. (This position is set as the reference position). After the reference position has been set, select the reference position return mode(ZRN signal is 1) and turn on an axisanddirection select signal, then the tool returns to the reference position.
255
5. DIGITAL SERVO
B62705EN/03
5.4.3
Associated Parameters
#7 PRM 1002 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DLZ #0
#1(DLZ) 0 : Dog is used for reference position return l 1 : Dogless reference position setting
#7 PRM 1006 #6 #5 ZMI #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#5(ZMI) 0 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is +. 1 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is . After ZRN signal becomes 1, manual feed direction is always the direction set by this parameter irrespective of an axis selection signal.
256
B62705EN/03
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)
This chapter outlines the serial interface and analog interface spindle amplifiers and explains related parameters.
6.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters . . . . . . . 6.2 AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258 258 260 267 268 268
The following drawing number is indicated on the upper part of the spindle unit of the serial interface spindle amplifier:
257
B62705EN/03
6.1
AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 6.1.1
Outline of Spindle Control
S instruction NC M instruction PMC M03,M04,M05,M19 FIN *SSTP(Spindle stop) Motor speed SOVx( Spindle override) SF,GR10,GR20,GR30 (For machining center) GR1,GR2 (For lathe) S (PRM 3735 to 3752) 0 1 Orientation speed (PRM 3705#1, 3732, 3706#5) Output polarity (PRM 3706#7,6) 0 1 SIND SGN(0=+,1=) 0 1 SSIN *ESP,MRDY, SFR,SRV,ORCM etc. SST, SDT, SAR, LDT1, LDT2 ORAR, ALM etc. Interface function Optical cable Serial spindle amplifier Operators panel Load meter Interface function Spindle motor LM PC R01O to R12O R01I to R12I SOR( Orientation)
Speed meter SM
Spindle
258
B62705EN/03
6.1.1.1
Method A of Gear Change for Machining Center
Output Motor speed 4095 Max Gear 2 Gear 1 Gear 3 PRM 3736
0 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742
PRM 3735 PRM 3743 S code
6.1.1.2
Method B of Gear Change for Machining Center(PRM 3705#2=1)
Output 4095 Motor speed Max PRM 3736 Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
0 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742
PRM 3735 S code PRM 3743
6.1.1.3
For Lathe
Output
4095
Motor speed Max Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 Gear 4
0 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743
S code PRM 3744
259
B62705EN/03
6.1.2
Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen
6.1.2.1
Display method
(1) Confirm the parameters
#7 3111 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 SPS #0
Bit1 (SPS) 0 : The spindle tuning screen is not displayed. l 1 : The spindle tuning screen is displayed. (2) Press the data. (3) Press the continuous menu key . (4) Press the soft key [SP.PRM]. Then, the spindle setting and tuning screen appears. (5) The following screens are provided. These screens can be selected using soft keys. 1) [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen 2) [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen 3) [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen
SYSTEM
key to select the screen for setting parameters and other
6.1.2.2
Spindle setting screen
SPINDLE SETTING (1)GEAR SELECT (2)SPINDLE : 1 : S11
(PARAMETER) (3)GEAR RATIO (4)MAX SPINDLE SPEED (5)MAX MOTOR SPEED (6)MAX C AXIS SPEED
50 3000 6000 100
D Gear selection
The gear select status on the machine side is displayed.

Indication 1 2 3 4 CTH1 0 0 1 1 CTH2 0 1 0 1
D Spindle
Select a spindle for which data is to be set. S11: Main spindle amplifier for the 1st spindle S12: Subspindle amplifier for the 1st spindle S21: Main spindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle S22: Subspindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
260
B62705EN/03
D Parameters
S11:1st Main S12:1st Sub S21:2nd Main S22:2nd Sub Gear ratio(HIGH) Gear ratio(MIDIUM HIGH) Gear ratio(MIDIUM LOW) Gear ratio(LOW) Max. spindle speed (gear1) Max. spindle speed (gear2) Max. spindle speed (gear3) Max. spindle speed (gear4) Max. motor speed Max. C axis speed 4020 4021 4056 4057 4058 4059 3741 3742 3743 3744 4196 None 4020 4021 4216 4217 4056 4057 4058 4059 3741 3742 3743 3744 4196 None 4216 4217
6.1.2.3
Spindle tuning screen
SPINDLE TUNING OPERATION : SPEED CONTROL GEAR SELECT : 1 SPINDLE : S11 (PARAMETER) PROP.GAIN 20 INT.GAIN 50 LOOP GAIN 3000 MOTOR VOLT 30 TIME CONST 100 REF. SHIFT 2046 (MONITOR) MOTOR SPEED SPINDLE SPEED POS ERR S1 POS ERR S2 SYN.ERR 100 150 100 103 3
D Operation mode
1 2 3 4 5 6
: Normal operation : Orientation : Synchronization control : Rigid tapping : Cs contour control : Spindle positioning control
261
B62705EN/03
D Displayed parameters
Spindle positioning control
Proportional gain Integral gain Loop gain Motor voltage ZRN gain (%) Shift reference position
The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.

Orientation
Proportional gain Integral gain Loop gain Motor voltage ORAR gain (%) Shift spindle stop position Shift reference position
Normal operation
Proportional gain Integral gain Motor voltage Regenerative power
Synchronization control
Proportional gain Integral gain Loop gain Motor voltage Acceleration/deceleration constant (%) Shift reference position
Rigid tapping
Proportional gain Integral gain Loop gain Motor voltage ZRN gain Shift reference position
Cs contour control
Proportional gain Integral gain Loop gain Motor voltage ZRN gain (%) Shift reference position
Note) For the parameter numbers corresponding to the displayed parameter items, see Section 6.4.5. D Displayed monitoring items
Spindle positioning control
Motor speed Feedrate Position deviation S1
The displayed monitoring items vary depending on the operation mode.

Synchronization control
Motor speed Spindle speed Position deviation S1 Position deviation S2 Synchronous deviation
Normal operation
Motor speed Spindle speed
Orientation
Motor speed Spindle speed Position deviation S1
Rigid tapping
Motor speed Spindle speed Position deviation S1 Position deviation Z Synchronous deviation
Cs contour control
Motor speed Spindle speed Position deviation S1
Note 1) Motor speed [rpm] + |Spindle data| 16383 Max. Motor speed.(* 1)
(*1) Parameter 4020: Main spindle Parameter 4196: Subspindle
Note 2) The spindle speed in Cs contour control mode is in degrees/min.
262
B62705EN/03
6.1.2.4
Spindle monitor screen
SPINDLE MONITOR ALARM : OPERATION : SPINDLE SPEED : MOTOR SPEED : SCREEN AL27(POSITION CODER DIS.) Cs AXIS OONTROL 100 DEG/MIN 150 RPM 200
0 50 100 150 JJJJJ CONTROL INPUT : ORCM MRDY *ESP CONTROL OUTPUT : SST SDT ORAR LOAD METER (%)
D Spindle alarm
1: Motor overheated 2: Speed deviation excessive 3: Fuse blow of DC link 4: Fuse blow of AC inputline 5: Fuse blow of DC voltage 7: Excessive speed 9: Heat sink overheat 10: Low voltage of AC input 11: Excess voltage in DC link 12: Excess current in DC link 13: CPU internal data memory error 18: ROM SUM check error 19: U phase current offset excessive 20: V phase current offset excessive 24: Serial data transmission abnormal 25: Serial data transmission stop 26: Cs axis speed detecting signal failure 27: Position coder signal disconnection 28: Cs pos.detect signal disconnection 29: Short time overload 30: Input circuit excess current 31: Speed detecting signal disconnection 32: SLC LSI internal RAM abnormal 33: DC link charging insufficient 34: Parameter abnormal setting 35: Gear ratio data excessive 36: Error counter overflow 37: Speed detecting unit error setting 38: Magnetic sensor signal abnormal 39: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is detected 40: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is not detected 41: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal 42: Undetection of the position coder one revolution signal 46: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal on threading 47: Abnormal position coder signal 48: Erroneous detection of position coder one revolution signal
263
B62705EN/03
D Operation
Following 6 modes are available: a. b. c. d. e. f. Normal operation Orientation Synchronous operation Rigid tapping Cs contour cotrol Spindle positioning control
D Load meter
The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%. 1) Load meter[%] + Load meter data Max.output value 3276 of load meter (*)
(*) PRM 4127: Main PRM 4274: Sub.
D Control input signal
Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
TLML TLMH CTH1 CTH2 SRV SFR ORCM MEDY ARST *ESP : Torque limit command (low) : Torque limit command (high) : Gear signal 1 : Gear signal 2 : Spindle reverse rotation : Spindle forward rotation : Spindle orientation : Machine ready : Alarm reset signal : Emergency stop
SPSL MCFN SOCN RSL RCH INDX ROTA NRRO INTG DEFM
: : : : : : : : : :
Spindle selection signal Power line switching Soft start/stop cancel Output switching request Power line state confirm Orientation stop pos. change Rotation direction of ORCM Shorcut of ORCM Speed integral control signal Referencial mode command
D Control output signals
Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
ALM SST SDT SAR LDT1 LDT2 : : : : : : Alarm signal Speed zero signal Speed detecting signal Speed arrival signal Load detecting signal 1 Load detecting signal 2 TML5 ORAR CHP CFIN RCHP RCFN : : : : : : Torque limitation Orientation end signal Power line switched signal Spindle switch complete Output switch signal Output switch complete signal
264
B62705EN/03
6.1.2.5
Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle tuning screen
D Normal operation mode
S11: 1st Main
Proportional gain(HIGH) Proportional gain (LOW) Integral gain(HIGH) Integral gain(LOW) Motor voltage Regenerative power 4040 4041 4048 4049 4083 4080
S12: 1st Sub

4206 4207 4212 4236 4231
S21: 2nd Main

4040 4041 4048 4049 4083 4080
S22: 2nd Sub

4206 4207 4212 4236 4231
D Orientation mode
S11: 1st Main
Proportional gain(HIGH) Proportional gain (LOW) Integral gain(HIGH) Integral gain(LOW) Loop gain (HIGH) Loop gain (MID, HIGH) Loop gain (MID, LOW) Loop gain (LOW) Motor voltage Gain change upon completion of orientation Stop position shift PCtype orientation stop position 4042 4043 4050 4051 4060 4061 4062 4063 4084 4064 4077 4031
S12: 1st Sub

4208 4209 4213 4218 4219 4237 4220 4228 4204
S21: 2nd Main

4042 4043 4050 4051 4060 4061 4062 4063 4084 4064 4077 4031
S22: 2nd Sub

4208 4209 4213 4218 4219 4237 4220 4228 4204
D Synchronization control mode

Proportional gain(HIGH) Proportional gain(LOW) Integral gain(HIGH) Integral gain(LOW) Position loop gain(HIGH) Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) Position loop gain(MID,LOW) Position loop gain(LOW) Motor voltage Acc./Dec. time constant Shift amount
S11: 1st Main

4044 4045 4052 4053 4065 4066 4067 4068 4085 4032 4034
S12: 1st Sub

4210 4211 4214 4221 4222 4238
S21: 2nd Main

4044 4045 4052 4053 4065 4066 4067 4068 4085 4032 4034
S22: 2nd Sub

4210 4211 4214 4221 4222 4238
265
B62705EN/03
D Rigid tapping mode
Numerals are parameter numbers :

S11: 1st Main
Proportional gain(HIGH) Proportional gain(LOW) Integral gain(HIGH) Integral gain(LOW) Position loop gain(HIGH) Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) Position loop gain(MID,LOW) Position loop gain(LOW) Motor voltage ZRN gain % Grid shift amount 4044 4045 4052 4053 4065 4066 4067 4068 4085 4091 4073 4238 4239 4223 4222
S12: 1st Sub

4210 4211 4214 4221
S21: 2nd Main

4044 4045 4052 4053 4065 4066 4067 4068 4085 4091 4073
S22: 2nd Sub

4210 4211 4214 4221 4222 4238 4239 4223
D Spindle contouring control mode (Cs axis control)
Numerals are parameter numbers :

S11: 1st Main
Proportional gain(HIGH) Proportional gain (LOW) Integral gain(HIGH) Integral gain(LOW) Position loop gain(HIGH) Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) Position loop gain(MID,LOW) Position loop gain(LOW) Motor voltage ZRN gain % Reference position shift 4046 4047 4054 4055 4069 4070 4071 4072 4086 4092 4135
S12: 1st Sub
S21: 2nd Main

4046 4047 4054 4055 4069 4070 4071 4072 4086 4092 4135
S22: 2nd Sub
D Spindle positioning control mode

Proportional gain(HIGH) Proportional gain (LOW) Integral gain(HIGH) Integral gain(LOW) Position loop gain(HIGH) Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) Position loop gain(MID,LOW) Position loop gain(LOW) Motor voltage ZRN gain % Reference position shift
S11: 1st Main

4044 4045 4052 4053 4065 4066 4067 4068 4085 4091 4073
S12: 1st Sub

4210 4211 4214 4221 4222 4238 4239 4223
S21: 2nd Main

4044 4045 4052 4053 4065 4066 4067 4068 4085 4091 4073
S22: 2nd Sub

4210 4211 4214 4221 4222 4238 4239 4223
266
B62705EN/03
6.1.3
Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters
The standard parameters related to each motor model can be set automatically. D The specifications for controlling a motor depend on the specifications defined by the machine tool builder. The parameters defined by the machine tool builder are set as the standard values (initial values) by this automatic setting function. Therefore, when performing automatic operation, always set parameters properly according to the parameter list (parameters 4000 and later). 1. Turn on the power in the emergency stop state. 2. Set bit 7 of parameter 4019 to 1.
#7 LDSP #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019
Bit 7 (LDSP) The parameters for the serial interface spindle are: 0 : Not set automatically. l 1 : Set automatically. 3. Set a motor model code.
4133 Motor model code
Code
100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 a1
Motor mode
a 0.5 (3000/8000min1) (3000/8000min1) a 1.5 (1500/8000min1) a 2 (1500/8000min1) a 2/1500 a6 (3000/1500min1) a 3 (1500/8000min1) (1500/8000min1) a 8 (1500/6000min1) a 12 (1500/6000min1) a 15 (1500/6000min1) a 18 (1500/6000min1) a 22 (1500/6000min1) a P8 (750/6000min1) a P12 (750/6000min1) a P15 (750/6000min1) a P18 (750/6000min1) a P22 (750/6000min1) a P30 (575/4500min1)
Amplifier
SPM2.2 SPM2.2 SPM5.5 SPM5.5 SPM5.5 SPM5.5 SPM11 SPM11 SPM15 SPM22 SPM22 SPM26 SPM11 SPM11 SPM15 SPM15 SPM22 SPM22
4. Turn off the power then back on. Then, the parameters are read.
267
B62705EN/03
6.2
AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) 6.2.1
Outline of Spindle Control
6.2.1.1
Block diagram
S command NC Spindle speed conversion Motor speed Gear 1 Gear 2 GR1O, GR2O, GR3O Gear selection (16M/18M) GR1, GR2 Gear information (16T/18T) S *SSTP Spindle stop M command PMC M03 to M05, M06, M19 CW/CCW command, orientation, etc. FIN Miscellaneous function end
Maximum spindle speed and other parameters PRM 3714 to 3743, 3735, 3736, 3751 and 3752 (M series) PRM 3741 to 3744 (T series)
*ESP, MRDY SFR, SRV ORCM, TLM D/A converter PRM 3730 (gain) PRM 3731 (offset) DV
SAR, LDT SST, ORAR SDT, ALM
Position coder interface
SVC
RV
Spindle amplifier
I/O card or I/O unit
Operators panel PC Spindle motor LM Load meter
Speed meter Spindle SM
268
B62705EN/03
6.2.1.2
Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters
[M series] 1 Gear change method A (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 0)
SVC Motor speed Gear 1 (4095) 10V PRM 3736 Max Gear 2 Gear 3
PRM 3735 0V 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743
S code (RPM)
2 Gear change method B (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 1)

SVC (4095) 10V PRM 3736 PRM 3752 PRM 3751 PRM 3735 0V 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 Motor speed Gear 1 Max Gear 2 Gear 3
S code (RPM)
[T series] Constant surface speed control

SVC (4095) 10V Motor speed Max Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 Gear 4
0V 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744
S code (RPM)
269
B62705EN/03
3706
#7 TCW
#6 CWM
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
TCW
0 0 1 1
CWM
0 1 0 1
Sign of output voltage

Analog voltage (+) with both M03 and M04 Analog voltage () with both M03 and M04 (+) with M03, () with M04 () with M03, (+) with M04
[M series]
#7 3705 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 SGB #1 #0
SGB Spindle speed set when gear change is performed is: 0 : Maximum speed for each gear. 1 : Set by respective parameters. (Parameters 542, 543, 585, 586)
3741 3742 3743 3736 3735 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm] Max. spindle speed of gear 2 (1 to 9999) [rpm] Max. spindle speed of gear 3 (1 to 9999) [rpm] Upper limit of the output to the spindle motor Lower limit of the output to the spindle motor Spindle speed (upper limitlower limit) Max. spindle speed
Setting + value
4095
[T series]
3741 3742 3743 3744 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm] Max. spindle speed of gear 2 (1 to 9999) [rpm] Max. spindle speed of gear 3 (1 to 9999) [rpm] Max. spindle speed of gear 4 (1 to 9999) [rpm]
270
B62705EN/03
6.2.1.3
Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter)
(1) For M series, change the upper and lower limits as follows: S When gear change method A is used: Parameter 3736 = 4095, parameter 3735 = 0 S When gear change method B is used: Parameter 3751 = 4095, parameter 3735 = 0 . For T series, these changes are not required. (2) Tuning the D/A converter offset Specify zero as the spindle speed. Then, by using a digital multimeter, adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at the test pin DA2 on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is 0 mV. 1 For M series
S0; (Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)
2 For T series (in case of Gcode system A)

G97 S0; (Specify the command by MDI in the same manner as for M series.)
3731
Spindle speed (D/A converter) offset compensation value
(3) Tuning the D/A converter gain Specify the maximum spindle speed of gear 1. Then, by using a digital multimeter, adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at the test pin DA2 on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is 10.0 V. 1 For M series
Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.) (Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)
3741
Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]
2 For T series (in case of Gcode system A)

G97 Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.) (Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)
3741
Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]
. Usually a voltage is output from the D/A converter by only executing an S command. However, the clockwise rotation command (M03) may be required on some machines. (4) If the output voltage is not correct, perform the following calculation, and change the value of parameter 3730 to adjust the gain of the D/A converter:
10V Setting + Measured voltage value (Current value of PRM 3730)
(5) Execute an S command again and confirm that the output voltage is correct.
.Restore the original parameter values.
271
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.22 7.23 7.24 7.25 7.26 7.27 7.28 7.29 7.30 7.31 7.32 7.33 7.34 7.35 7.36 7.37 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . NO DISPLAY APPEARS AT POWERUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . ALARM 301 TO 305 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 306 TO 308 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW) . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 350 (SERIALA PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 351 (SERIALA PULSE CODER COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED ON) . . . . . . ALARM 410 (EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT DURING STOP) . . ALRAM 411 (EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE) . . . . . . . . . ALARM 414 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . ALRAM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM) . . . ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED) . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 751,761 (SPINDLE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 910 TO 913 (RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 920 TO 921 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . ALARM 924 (SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR) . . . . . . . ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 970 (NMI ALARM IN PMC CONTROL MODULE) . . . ALARM 971 (NMI ALARM IN SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM BY UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . . . . . . . 273 275 279 282 284 291 293 294 300 302 303 304 305 306 307 309 310 312 313 315 316 317 318 319 320 322 323 324 325 326 328 329 330 331 332 333 334
272
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1
CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES
When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of failure occured and take appropriate action, to promptly recover the machine. Check for the failure according to the following procedure :
With what operation? Grasp the kind of failure
When?
What failure?
Appropriate action
Recovery
7.1.1
Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred
(1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences) (2) With what operation (3) What failure occurred
1 When did the failure occur? D Date and time? D Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?) D Occurred when the power was turned on? D Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other disturbances to the power supply? How many times has it occurred D Only once? D Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day, or per month?) 2 With what operation did it occur ? D What was the NC mode when the failure occurred? D Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference position return mode If during program operation, 1) Where in the program ? 2) Which program No. and sequence No. ? 3) What program ? 4) Occurred during axial movement ? 5) Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ? 6) Failure specific to the program ? D Does the same operation cause the same failure ? (Check the repeatability of the failure.) D Occurred during data input/output ? <Feed axes and spindles> D For a failure related to feed axis servo 1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ? 2) Ocurred only for a certain axis ? D For a failure related to spindles When did the failure occur ? (during poweron, acceleration, deceleration, or constant rotation)
273
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
3 What failure occurred ? D Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen on the CRT? (Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for alarms 300 to 599.) D For alarm 350 : Examine diagnostic 202 For alarm 351 : Examine diagnostic 203 For alarm 414 : What does diagnostic display 200,201,204 indicate ? D For alarm 751 or 761 : Which spindle alarm is indicated ? (indicated by ALXX (XX is a number)) D Is the screen correct ? D If machining dimensions are incorrect 1) How large is the error ? 2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ? 3) Are the offsets correct ? 4 Other information D Is there noise origin around machine? If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be external noise to the power supply or inductive noise on machinery cables. Operate other machines connected to the same power line and see if noise come from the relays or compressors. D Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side? See Sec. 2.13 Action against Noise D Check the following for the input power supply voltage : 1) Is there variation in the voltage ? 2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ? 3) Is the standard voltage supplied ? D How high is the ambient temperature of the control unit? (0_C to 45_C during operation without PC function, 5_C to 40_C operation with PC function) Refer to manual about noise. D Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit? (0.5 G or less during operation) 5 When you contact our service center, specify the following items : 1) Name of the NC unit 2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine 3) Software series/version of the NC 4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor (for a failure related to the servo) 5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor (for a failure related to a spindle) D See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for the locations of the NC unit and servo/spindle amplifiers. D We use the following specification codes : Servo /spindle amplifier : A06BVVVVHVVV Servo/spindle motor : A06BVVVVBVVV (V represents a number)
274
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2
NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED
Points
(1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic operation is done (2) Check whether position display shows correct position (3) Check CNC status display (4) Check CNC internal status using diagnostic function
Causes and Countermeasures

1. Position display (relative, absolute, machine coordinate) does not change (1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section 1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY for detail.) (a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on) If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is input. Check the following signal using the PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 X1008 X1012 G0008 #6 #5 #4 *ESP *ESP *ESP #3 #2 #1 #0 (T series) (M series)
ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input. (b) It is a reset status When RESET is displayed, any of a reset is functioned. Check the following signal using the PMCs diagnostic funciton (PMCDGN). 1) An input signal from the PMC functions
G0008 #7 ERS #6 RRW #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
When RRW is 1, reset & rewing signal is input. When ERS is 1, external reset signal is input. 2) RESET key on the MDI keyboard functions When the signals in 1) are 0, Check the contact of
RESET RESET
key may be functioning.
key using a tester.
When it is abnormal, change the keyboard. (c) Confirm the status of modes Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of CRT as follows : If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input. Check mode select signal using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN). For details, refer to section 1.9 STATUS DISPLAY.
275
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
(Example of display) JOG : HND : MDI : MEM EDIT:

#7 G0043
Manual operation (JOG) mode Manual handle (MPG) mode Manual data input (MDI) mode : Automatic operation (Memory) mode EDIT (Memory edit) mode
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 MD4 #1 MD2 0 0 0 0 1 #0 MD1 1 0 0 1 1
<Mode select signal>
Manual operation (JOG) mode Manual handle (MPG) mode Manual data input (MDI) mode Automatic operation (Memory) mode EDIT (Memory edit) mode
1 1 0 0 0
(2) Check diagnostic data 000 to 025 of the CNC Check an item for which 1 is displayed No. Message Display 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0 001 MOTION :0 002 DWELL :0 a.003 INPOSITION CHECK :0 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0 b.005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1 (Example) 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0 010 PUNCHING :0 011 READING :0 012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0 c.013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0 d.014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0 015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0 Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its detail is shown below. a. Inposition check is being done It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition) DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 Inposition width
1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.

1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)
2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and 411.
276
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
b. Interlock or start lock signal is input
There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 3003 #6 #5 #4 #3 DIT #2 ITX #1 #0 ITL
#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1) #2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2) #3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal"MITn is effective. To 3) Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function (PMCDGN) of the PMC. 1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 G0008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input. 2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 G0130 #6 #5 #4 #3 *IT4 #2 *IT3 #1 *IT2 #0 +IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input. 3) Interlock signal per axis and direction ("MITn) is input. S M series
#7 G0132 G0134 #6 #5 #4 #3 +MIT4 MIT4 #2 +MIT3 MIT3 #1 +MIT2 MIT2 #0 +MIT1 MIT1
S T series
#7 X0004 #6 #5 MIT2 #4 +MIT2 #3 MIT1 #2 +MIT1 #1 #0
"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input. * For the T series,"MITn is valid only for manual operation. c. Jog feedrate override is 0% Check the signals using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
G0010 G0011 #7 *JV7 *JV15 #6 *JV6 *JV14 #5 *JV5 *JV13 #4 *JV4 *JV12 #3 *JV3 *JV11 #2 *JV2 *JV10 #1 *JV1 *JV9 #0 *JV0 *JV8
When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes 1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override 0.00% 0.01% : 100.00% : 655.34% 0.00% 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1110 : 1101 1000 1110 1111 : 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000
d. NC is in a reset state
In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using the procedure of 1 above.
277
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
2. When machine coordinate value does not update on position display
(1) Machine lock signal (MLK) is input.

#7 G0044 G0108 MLK4 MLK3 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 MLK MLK2 #0
MLK1
MLK : All axes machine lock MLKn : Each axis machine lock When the signal is 1, the corresponding machine lock signal is input.
278
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3
JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE
Points
(1) Check whether position display is operating. (2) Check CNC status display. (3) Check internal status using Diagnostic funciton. (1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected). When status display shows JOG, it is normal. When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is not selected correctly. Confirm the mode select signal using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN). <Mode select signal>
#7 G0043 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 MD4 Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 #1 MD2 0 #0 MD1 1
Causes and Remedies

1. Position display (relative, absolute, machine cooordinate) does not change
(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 G0100 G0102 #6 #5 #4 #3 +J4 J4 #2 +J3 J3 #1 +J2 J2 #0 +J1 J1
Example) When +X button is pressed on the operators panel, signal+J1 turns to 1. This signal is effected at its rise. If axis selection signal is input before JOG mode is selected, axis movement does not occur. Turn the signal to off, then on. (3) Check CNCs diagnostic function 000 to 015. Check the items for which 1 is displayed at right side. No. Message Display 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0 001 MOTION :0 002 DWELL :0 a. 003 INPOSITION CHECK :0 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0 b. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1(Example) 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0 010 PUNCHING :0 011 READING :0 012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0 c. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0 d. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0 015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0 Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its detail is shown below.
279
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
a. Inposition check is being done
It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition) DGN 0300 Position Error
1825
>PARAM 1826 Inposition width

(Normal : 3000)
1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.

Servo loop gain per axis
2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and 411. b. Interlock or start lock signal is input
PARAM
There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 3003 #6 #5 #4 #3 DIT #2 ITX #1 #0 ITL
#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1) #2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2) #3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal"MITn is effective. To 3) Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function (PMCDGN) of the PMC. 1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 G0008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input. 2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 G0130 #6 #5 #4 #3 *IT4 #2 *IT3 #1 *IT2 #0 +IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input. 3) Interlock signal per axis and direction ("MITn) is input D M series
D T series
#7 X0004 #6 #5 MIT2 #4 +MIT2 #3 MIT1 #2 +MIT1 #1 #0
"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input. * For the T series,"MITn is valid only for manual operation.
280
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
c. Jog feedrate override is 0%
Check the signals using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN)

G0010 G0011 #7 *JV7 *JV15 #6 *JV6 *JV14 #5 *JV5 *JV13 #4 *JV4 *JV12 #3 *JV3 *JV11 #2 *JV2 *JV10 #1 *JV1 *JV9 #0 *JV0 *JV8
When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes 1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override 0.00% 0.01% : 100.00% : 655.34% 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1110 : 1101 1000 1110 1111 : 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000
d. NC is in a reset state
In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using the procedure of 1 above. (4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct.
1423 Jog feedrate per axis
(5) Manual feed per revolution is selected ( T series) This funciton feeds an axis synchronized with spindle rotation and whether this function is used or not is selected by the following parameter:
#7 1402 #6 #5 #4 JRV #3 #2 #1 #0
#4 (JRV) 0 : Jog feed is of feed per minute 1 : Jog feed is of feed per revolution (a) When parameter JRV is set to 1, feed rate of the axis is calculated by synchronizing with rotation of the spindle. Therefore, rotate the spindle. (b) If the axis does not move even when the spindle is rotated, check the detector of the spindle (position coder) and the cable between the position coder and the CNC if it is shortcircuited or ungrounded.
281
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.4
HANDLE OPERATION (MPG) CANNOT BE DONE
Points Causes and Countermeasure
1 JOG operation is not acceptable, either 2 When only handle operation (MPG) cannot be done Consult with item 7.2 and 7.3. (1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the CRT. (Refer to 1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY for details) When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct. If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the mode select signal using the PMCs diagnostic function(PMCDGN).
#7 G0043 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 MD4 Manuale handle mode 1 #1 MD2 0 #0 MD1 0
(1) Check another manual operation (JOG) is accepted. (2) Check CNC status display.
(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input. Check the signals using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
G0018 G0019 #7 HS2D #6 HS2C #5 HS2B #4 HS2A #3 HS1D HS3D #2 HS1C HS3C #1 HS1B HS3B #0 HS1A HS3A
When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the machine operators panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is normal.
Selected axis
no selection 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis
HSnD
0 0 0 0 0
HSnC
0 0 0 0 1
HSnB
0 0 1 1 0
HSnA
0 1 0 1 0
NOTE 1 In the above table, n is the number of the manual pulse generator (MPG) and up to 3 MPGs can be used. 2 A feed axis is selected by 4bit code of A to D.
282
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) Manual handle feed multiplication is not correct Check the following signals using PMCs PCDGN. Also confirm the following parameters based on the parameter list.
#7 G0019 #6 #5 MP2 #4 MP1 #3 #2 #1 #0
MP2 0 1 0 1
MP1 0 0 1 1
Multiplication 1 10 m n
7113 7114 #7 7102 #6
Magnification of handle feed Magnification of handle feed #5 #4 #3
m(1 to 127) n(1 to 1000) #2 #1 #0 HNGx
#0(HNGx) Direction of MPG and travel of machine 0 : same direction 1 : reverse direction
7110 No. of MPGs used (1 to 3)
(4) Checking manual pulse generator (a) Incorrect of cable Check disconnection of cable or short circuit. (b) Manual pulse generator is faulty When you rotate the MPG, the following signal is output. Measure the signal with synchroscope at screw terminal on back of MPG. If no signal is output, measure +5V voltage.
Back of MPG Screw terminal HA: A phase signal HB: B phase signal
+5V 0V HA HB
Rotation in plus 1:1
Rotation in minus
+5V HA on off on off 0V +5V HB on off on off 0V
1:1 1/4 phase difference
1/4 phase difference
Check on and off ratio and phase difference of HA and HB.

283
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.5
AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE
Points
(1) Check manual operation is possible. (2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operators manual. (3) Check status of CNC.
Causes and Remedies
When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure, based on the previous item Jog operation cannot be done. Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select status of CNC status display. Also, by confirming the automatic operation status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold and cycle stop state. **** is displayed at status display on CRT. (1) Mode select signal is not correct. When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status display is done. MDI :Manual data input mode (MDI) MEM :Memory operation mode RMT :Remote operation mode If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode signal with following diagnosis function of PMC side (PMCDGN).
#7 G0043 #6 #5 DNCI #4 #3 #2 MD4 #1 MD2 #0 MD1
1. When cycle operation is not started (Cycle start LED does not light)
DNCI 0 1
MD4 0 0 0
MD2 0 0 0
MD1 0 1 1
Mode select Manual data input mode Memory operation mode Remote operation mode
(2) Cycle start signal is not input This signal turns 1 when cycle start button is pressed and turns 0 when it is released. The cycle start actuates when it changes from 1 to 0. Check the state of the signal using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 G0007 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 ST #1 #0
#2 (ST) : Cycle start signal (3) Feed hold signal is input Under normal state, the feed hold signal is 1 when the feed hold button is not pressed. Check the state of this signal using the PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN) .
#7 G0008 #6 #5 *SP #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#5 (*SP) : Feed hold signal

284
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
2. When an automatic operation is in progress (Cycle start LED is lit)
CNCs status display shows STRT on the CRT. (1) Check the contents of diagnostic nos. 000 to 015. No. Message Display : 1(Example) a. 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL b. 001 MOTION :0 c. 002 DWELL :0 d. 003 INPOSITION CHECK :0 e. 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0 f. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK :0 g. 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0 010 PUNCHING :0 011 READING :0 012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0 h. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0 i. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0 015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0 Items with a to i relate with an automatic operation and their details are as follows : An auxiliary function (M/S/T/B) specified in a program is not ended. Check according to the following procedure. At first, confirm the kind of interface of an auxiliary function.
3001 #7 HSIF #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
a. An auxiliary function is being executed (waiting for FIN signal)
#7(HSIF) 0 : M/S/T/B is of normal interface. 1 : M/S/T/B is of highspeed interface. 1) Normal interface When the auxiliary function finish signal turns from 1 to 0, the auxiliary function is supposed to be ended and the next block is read for operation. Confirm the status of this signal using PMCs diagnostic function(PMCDGN).
#7 G0004 #6 #5 #4 #3 FIN #2 #1 #0
#3 (FIN) : Auxiliary function finish signal 2) Highspeed interface The auxiliary function is supposed to be ended when the signals are in the following state. Confirm it using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
285
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
<M series>
G0005 #7 BFIN #6 #5 #4 #3 TFIN #2 SFIN #1 #0 MFIN
#0(MFIN) #2(SFIN) #3(TFIN) #4(BFIN)
: M function finish signal : S function finish signal : T function finish signal : 2nd auxiliary function finish signal
#7 BF #6 #5 #4 #3 TF #2 SF #1 #0 MF
F0007
#0(MF) : M function strobe signal #2(SF) : S function strobe signal #3(TF) : T function strobe signal #7(BF) : 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal <T series>
#7 G0005 #6 #5 #4 BFIN #3 TFIN #2 SFIN #1 #0 MFIN
#0(MFIN) : M function completion signal #2(SFIN) : S function completion signal #3(TFIN) : T function completion signal #4(BFIN) : Second auxiliary function completion signal
#7 F0007 #6 #5 #4 BF #3 TF #2 SF #1 #0 MF
#0(MF) : M function strobe signal #2(SF) : S function strobe signal #3(TF) : T function strobe signal #4(BF) : Second auxiliary function strobe signal <M/T series>
#7 G0004 #6 #5 MFIN3 #4 MFIN2 #3 #2 #1 #0
#4(MFIN2) : Second M function completion signal #5(MFIN3) : Third M function completion signal
#7 F0008 #6 #5 MF3 #4 MF2 #3 #2 #1 #0
#4(MF2) : Second M function strobe signal #5(MF3) : Third M function strobe signal * The second and third M functions are enabled only when bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1.
Signal Finish signal Strobe signal End state 0 0 1 1
286
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
b. Travel command is being executed c. A dwell command is being executed d. Inposition check (confirming positioning) is being done
CNC is reading an axis command (X,Y,Z,...) in a program and giving the command to the axis. CNC is reading a dwell command (G04) in a program and is executing the dwell command. Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis is not completed. Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the servo position error amount. Check it CNCs diagnostic function as follows: DGN no.300 Position Error > PARAM 1826 Inposition width Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning of an axis completes and when the amount becomes within the inposiiton width, it is assumed that positioning completes and the next block is exected. If position error amount does not become within the inposition width, refer to servo alarm 400, 4n0 and 4n1.
e. Feedrate override is at 0%
Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a programmed feedrate. Check the override signals using the PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN). <Normal override signal>
G0012 #7 *FV7 #6 *FV6 #5 *FV5 #4 *FV4 #3 *FV3 #2 *FV2 #1 *FV1 #0 *FV0
*FVn :Feedrate override <State of override signal>

*FV7@@@@@@@*FV0 11 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 : 10 0 1 1 0 : 00 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 : 1 1 : 0 1 0 0 254% 0% 100% 0% 1%
f. Interlock signal or start lock signal is input
<T series> Start lock signal is input

#7 G0007 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 STLK #0
#1 (STLK) With this signal being 1, start lock signal is input. <Common to T series and M series> There are a plural number of interlock functions. Parameters are set by machine tool builders for which interlock function is used. Therefore, confirm the following parameters at first:
#7 3003 #6 #5 #4 #3 DIT #2 ITX #1 #0 ITL
#0 (ITL) 0 : Interlock signal(*IT) is valid. #2 (ITX) 0 : Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid. #3 (DIT) 0 : Interlock signal ("MITn) is valid. Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN) .
287
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input

#7 G0008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 *IT
#0 (*IT)
: When this bit is 0, interlock signal is input. 2) Interlock signal per each axis (*ITn) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 *IT4 #2 *IT3 #1 *IT2 #0 *IT1
G0130
*ITn When the bit is 0, the corresponding axiss interlock signal is input. 3) Interlock signal per axis and direction(+/ MITn) is input D M series
D T series
#7 X0004 #6 #5 MIT2 #4 +MIT2 #3 MIT1 #2 +MIT1 #1 #0
"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input. * For the T series,"MITn is valid only for manual operation. 4) Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached axis is specified for travelling. *This function is valid when CNC parameter No.1005#7=1. For whether this function is running or not, confirm the following signal using PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN). Check the axis concerned.
#7 F0110 #6 #5 #4 #3
MDTCH4
#2
MDTCH3
#1
MDTCH2
#0
MDTCH1
When signal MDTCHn is 1 ,the axis detach function is in valid. The control axis detach function becomes valid by the following signal issued from the PMC or a CNC side parameter. Check as in the following procedure : 1) The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input.
#7 G0124 #6 #5 #4 #3 DTCH4 #2 DTCH3 #1 DTCH2 #0 DTCH1
If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached. 2) The following parameter enables the control axis detach function to the corresponding axis.
0012 #7 RMVx #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7(RMVx) 0 : Controlled axis is connected 1 : Controlled axis is detached
288
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
g. CNC is waiting for spindle speed arrival signal to be input
Actual spindle speed does not arrive at a speed specified in a program. Confirm the signal state using the PMCs diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 G0029 #6 #5 #4 SAR #3 #2 #1 #0
#4(SAR) : When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the specified speed. This function is valid when PARAM 3708#0=1. h. Manual feedrate override is 0% (dry run) Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog feed. But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an auomatic operation,override values set with these signals become valid to the following speed set by a parameter.
G0046 #7 DRN #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7(DRN) : Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.

1410 Dry run rate
The rate when the following override value is 100%.

#7 *JV7 #6 *JV6 #5 *JV5 #4 *JV4 #3 +JV3 #2 *JV2 *JV10 #1 *JV1 *JV9 #0 *JV0 *JV8
G0010
G0011
*JV15
*JV14
*JV13
*JV12
+JV11
When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is [1111 . . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . . 0000].
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JV0 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1110 1101 1000 1110 1111 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 Override 0.00% 0.01% : 100.00% : 655.34% 0.00%
i. NC is in a reset state
In this case, the CNCs status display shows RESET. Refer to item 1. (2) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function Confirm the following parameter and signals from the PMC. (a) Setting value of rapid traverse rate
1420 Rapid traverse rate per axis
289
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
(b) Rapid traverse override signals

#7 G0014 G0096 HROV
*HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1 ROV2
*HROV1
#0 ROV1
*HROV0
(HROV0) ROV1 0 1 0 1 ROV2 0 1 1 1 Override 100% 50% 25% Fo *HROV6
(HROV=1) *HROV0 Override 0% 1% : 100%
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 : 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
1421
Rapid traverse override F0 rate
(3) Only feed (other than G00) does not function (a) Maximum feedrate set by parameter is incorrect.
1422 Maximum feedrate
Feedrate is clamped at this upper feedrate. (b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev) 1) Position coder does not rotate Check the connection between spindle and position coder The following failure is considered: D Timing belt is broken D Key is removed D Coupling is loose D Connector of signal cable is loosened 2) Position coder is faulty (c) Thread cutting does not operate 1) Position coder does not rotate Check the connection between spindle and position coder The following failure is considered: D Timing belt is broken D Key is removed D Coupling is loose D Connector of signal cable is loosened 2) Position coder is faulty Position coder is connected to the spindle amplifier when serial interface spindle is used or connected to the CNC when analog interface spindle is used. <T series> Whether A/B phase signals from the position coder are read correctly, can be judged also by the spindle speed display on the CRT screen (position screen). (However, it is not displayed when PARAM 3105#2=0).
290
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.6
CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF
Points
(1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows: (2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operators panel. (3) Confirm CNCs diagnostic function. The reason why cycle start LED signal (STL) has turned off are displayed on CNCs diagnostic numbers 020 to 025 as follows:
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 021 RESET BUTTON ON 022 RESET AND REWIND ON 023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 024 RESET ON 025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Emergency stop signal External reset signal Reset button on MDI Reset & rewind signal Servo alarm Feed hold by switching mode Single block stop 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Causes and Remedies
Details of signals a to g are as follows: Confirm the signals concerned using diagnostic function (PMCDGN). a. Emergency stop is input
#7 X1008 X1012 G0008
1) When I/O card is used :

#6 #5 #4 *ESP *ESP *ESP #3 #2 #1 #0 (T series) (M series)
*ESP=0 b. External reset signal is input
: Emergency stop signal is input :
G0008
#7 ERS
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7(ERS) : When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input. This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02 when an M02 is specified in a program as the end of a program. Therefore, when M02 is executed, this signal is input. c. Reset button on the MDI is pressed An automatic operation is put into a reset status when RESET key on the MDI panel is pressed.
291
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
d. Reset & rewind signal is input

G0008
#7
#6 RRW
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#6(RRW) : When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input. This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M30 when an M30 is specified in a program as the end of a program. Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input. e. Servo alarm has generated f. Cycle operation is in a feed hold state When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the reset state and operation stop. The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases: 1) Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a manual operation mode. 2) Feed hold signal is input. <Mode select signal>
#7 G0043 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 MD4 #1 MD2 #0 MD1
memory edit(EDIT) Automatic operation Automatic operation (AUTO) Manual data input (MDI) Jog feed (JOG) Manual operation o eration Handle/step TEACH IN HANDLE TEACH IN JOG
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 0
<Feed hold signal>

#7 G0008 #6 #5 *SP #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#5(*SP) : When this signal is 0, the feed hold signal is input. g. It become single block stop during automatic operation
#7 G0046
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1 SBK
#0
#1(SBK) When this signal is 1, the single block signal is input.
292
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.7
NO DISPLAY APPEARS AT POWERUP
Points Judgement of the point
Check whether it is a trouble of display or a trouble of the system. Check whether the STATUS LED on the main board shows the following state.
1 2 f 3 4
STATUS
(f : on,
: off)
If the status shows the above state, the system is normal. Therefore, display system may be faulty. If the status shows other state, a hardware other than the display system may be troublesome.
Causes and remedies

1. When the display system is in troulde (1) Confirmation item 1 Is power supplied to the display? 2 Is a video signal connected? Isnt it disconnected? or braked? (2) Causes and remedies 1 Power to the display is faulty. (Exchange power supply unit). 2 Cable connection is faulty. (Correct the connection). 3 CRT control circuit on the I/O board is faulty. (Exchange the I/O board) 4 Display is faulty.
2. When system is in trouble

STATUS 1 2 f 3 4 (f : on, : off)
When STATUS LED on the main board is other than above, check LEDs on the main CPU board, identify the trouble and make an appropriate action. See Subsec. 2.2.1 for LED display.
293
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.8
ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM)
(START)
YES Alarm 85? NO YES Alarm 86? NO S Check baud rate and other I/O parameters S I/O device is faulty NO
Is I/O parameter correct? YES
Set correct parameters
OFF Is power of I/O ? ON
Turn on I/O device
Is cable connection right? YES S I/O device is faulty S I/O interface module is faulty Alarm 87
NO
Connect the cable
S I/O device is faulty S I/O interface module is faulty
Causes
(a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct. Check the following setting data and parameters. (b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty. (c) I/O board is faulty. (d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
Countermeasures
(a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct. Check the following setting data and parameters: <Setting> PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO) Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device. If punch code does not match, alarm 86 will generate.
294
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
<Parameter>
Value of parameter 0020
0
0101#7 0101#3 0101#0 102 103
1
0111#7 0111#3 0111#0 112 113
2
0121#7 0121#3 0121#0 122 123 RS232C 0
3
0131#7 0131#3 0131#0 132 133 1 RS422 Option 1 board JD5C JD6A
Function
Feed Data input code Stop bit Type of I/O device Baud rate
C Communicau ca tion method
0135#3
Connector
I/O printed circuit board JD5A JD5B
NOTE 1 Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit numbers. Example) 101#7:bit7 of parameter 101. 2 For data communications by RS422, refer to parameters 134 and 135.
0101 0111 0121 0131
#7 NFD
#6
#5
#4
#3 ASI
#2
#1
#0 SB2
#0(SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1. 1 : No. of stop bits is 2. #3(ASI) 0 : Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition) 1 : Data input code is ASCII. #7(NFD) 0 : Feed is output before and after data in data output (FANUC PPR) 1 : Feed is not output (standard).
0102 0112 0122 0132 Type of I/O device
Value
0 1 2 3
TYPE OF I/O DEVICE

RS232C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used) FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2 (bubble cassette) FANUC CASSETTE F1 (Old type FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR) FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL H, FANUC Handy File Not used Portable tape reader FANUC PPR, FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM PMODEL H
4 5 6
295
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
0103 0113 0123 0133 Value 7 8 9 Baud rate 600 1200 2400 10 11 12
Baud rete 4800 9600 19200
When bit#3 of parameter no. 0135=1 (RS422 interface), the following setting is also available.
Value 13 14 15 Baud rate 38400 76800 86400
Check the following parameters also, when parameter no.0020 is 3.

#7 0134 #6 #5 CLK #4 NCD #3 #2 SYN #1 PRY #0
#1(PRY) 0 : No parity bit 1 : With parity bit #2(SYN) 0 : In protocol B, NC reset/alarm is not informed to the host. 1 : In protocol B, NC reset/alarm is informed to the host by SYN and NAK code. #4(NCD) 0 : CD (signal quality detection) of RS232C interface is checked. 1 : CD (signal quality detection) of RS232C interface is not checked. #5(CLK) 0 : Internal clock is used for baud rate clock of RS422 interface. 1 : External clock is used for baud rate clock of RS422 interface.
#7 RMS #6 #5 #4 #3 R42 #2 PRA #1 ETX #0 ASC
0135
#0(ASC) 0 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ISO code. 1 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ASCII code. #1(ETX) 0 : End code of protocol A or extended protocol A is CR of ASCII/ISO. 1 : End code of protocol A or extended protocol A is ETX of ASCII/ISO. #2(PRA) 0 : Communication protocol is protocol A 1 : Communication protocol is protocol B #3(R42) 0 : Interface is of RS232C. 1 : Interface is of RS422. #7(RMS) In protocol A, status of remote / tape operation of SAT command is 0 : Always transmitted by 0. 1 : Transmitted by the contents of remote / tape switching request issued by SET command from the CNC.
296
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
(b) External I/O device or Host computer is in trouble (i) Check whether the setting on communication of external I/O device or host computer is the same as that of the CNC. (baud rate, stop bits,etc.) If they are not the same, change the setting. (ii) When spare I/O device presents, check whether it is possible to realize communication using the spare I/O device. (c) I/O printed circuit board or option 1 board is faulty (i) When parameter no.0020 is 0 or 1 or 2 (JD5A, JD5B of I/O printed circuit board) Because I/O printed circuit board may be faulty, replace it. (ii) When parameter no. 0020 is 3 (JD5C, JD6A of option 1 board) Because option 1 board may be faulty, replace it. (d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty. Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection. <Connection>
I/O printed circuit board
R232C(JD5A) Punch panel
R232C(JD5B) Tape reader
Option 1 board R232C(JD5C) Host computer
R232C(JD6A) Host computer
297
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
< Cable connection>

RS232C (JD5A) RS232C (JD5B) RD 0V DR 0V CS 0V CD 0V (01) (02) (03) (04) (05) (06) (07) (08) (09) +24V (10) SD (11) 0V (12) ER (13) 0V (14) RS (15) 0V (16) (17) (18) +24V (19) (20) Shield G Connector : Halfpitch 20pins G Connector :DBM25S
Punch panel
(03) RD (06) DR (05) CS (08) CD
(02) SD (20) ER (04) RS (07) SG
(25) +24V (01) FG
RS232C (JD5C)
Host computer
RD 0V DR 0V CS 0V CD 0V
(01) (02) (03) (04) (05) (06) (07) (08) (09) +24V (10) SD (11) 0V (12) ER (13) 0V (14) RS (15) 0V (16) (17) (18) +24V (19) (20) Shield G Connector : Halfpitch 20pins
(02) SD (20) ER (04) RS (08) CD
(03) RD (06) DR (05) CS (07) SG
(25) +24V (01) FG Connector DSUB 25 pins
298
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE 1 When CS is not used, connect it to RS. 2 For protocol A or extended protocol A: When DR is not used, connect it to ER. Always connect CD to ER.
RS422(JD6A) RD (01) *RD (02) RT (03) *RT (04) CS (05) *CS (06) DM (07) Note) *DM (09) 0V (08) (+24V) (10) SD (11) *SD (12) TT (13) *TT (14) RS (15) *RS (16) TR (17) *TR (18) (+24V) (19) (20) Shield G Connector : Halfpitch 20 pins (PCR)
Host computer (04) (22) (17) (35) (07) (25) (12) (30) (19) (06) (24) (08) (26) (09) (27) (11) (29) RD *RD TT *TT RS *RS TR *TR SG RD *RD RT *RT CS *CS DM *DM
(01) FG
Connector : DSUB 25 pins
NOTE Always use a twisted pair cable.
299
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.9
ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL)
Contents
Reference position return was executed when the following condition is not satisfied: The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis is moving to the reference position at a speed higher than a speed equivalent to 128 pulses of position error amount(DGN300).
Countermeasures
(START)
Check whether position gain is greater than 128 pulses (DGN 300) before or during reference position return.
Position error amount : 300
128 or more NO Raise the speed
YES
(1) Next page
Check feed rate command: PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min) PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate (mm/min) PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain (0.01sec1) F 5000/3 Position error= G detection unit[m/PLUSE]
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1m) In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is 4 on the position display screen, detection unit is 0.1 m.
Check rapid traverse override signals : ROV1 G014.0 ROV2 G014.1 PRM 1421 Fo rate
ROV1 0 0 1 1
ROV2 0 1 0 1
Override 100% 50% 25% Fo rate
Check reference position return deceleration signal *DEC1 to DEC4 : X1013.0 to X1013.3 (M series), X1009.0 to X1009.3 (T series) When reference position return is started from deceleration signal 0, feed rate becomes FL rate. PRM 1425 FL rate
300
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
(1)
Check whether the motor ratated more than one rotation (one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than 128 pulses of position error amount.
NO Rotated ? YES
Return start position is too close S Chagne the return start position. S Move the machine at faster that 128 pulses for more than one rotation to wards RP.
Check that voltage of pulse coder is higher than 4.75 V. To measure pulse coder voltage, remove the motor cover and measure on pulse coder PCB at across + and or +5V and 0V terminals.
More than 4.75V YES Hardware failure
NO
Pulse coder power voltage is low
S Pulse coder is faulty Change pulse coder or motor
NOTE After the pulse coder or motor is exchanged, reference position or machines standard point may be different from former one. Please set it correctly. D Reference A speed more than 128 pulses is required because if speed is lower that this, onerotation signal does not function stably, causing improper position detection. If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a speed corresponding to a positional deviation of 1280 pulses or more is required. Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as the minimum positional deviation with which reference position return is possible. (If the parameter is set to 0, 128 is assumed as the minimum positional deviation. If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value equal to ten times the set value is used for checking.)
301
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.10
ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN)
Remedies
D When reference position return function is present
Absolute position data in the serial pulse coder was lost. (This alarm will be generated when serial pulse coder is exchanged or position feedback signal cable of the serial pulse coder is disconnected).
Machine position must be memorized using the following method: (1) Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for which this alarm was generated.When manual reference position return cannot be executed because of an another alarm, set parameter 1815#5 to 0 and release the alarm and perform manual operation. (2) Press RESET key at the end of reference position return to release the alarm.
D When reference position return function is not present D When serial pulse coder is changed
Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference position. Since the reference position is different from the former one, change the grid shift value (PRM 1850) to correct the position.
Related parameters
#7 1815 #6 #5 APC x #4 APZx #3 #2 #1 #0
#4(APZx) Reference position of absolute pulse coder is : 0 : not established 1 : established #5(APCx) 0 : Position detector is incremental pulse coder. 1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.
System configuration
Main board SERVOn (JSnA)
Servo amplifer module Battery 6V (JSnB) Feed back signal (JFn) Feedback cable TB2 Power cable PWM signal PC Servo motor
*Above figure is for builtin absolute pulse coder.
302
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.11
ALARM 301 TO 305 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY)
Countermeasures
The absolute pulse coder cable, or a module (servo control module, servo interface module, or servo module) on the main board may be faulty.
1 Agitate the cable connected to the SERVO 1 to 4 or the cable connected to the ENC 1 to 4 of servomodule. If an alarm is issued, replace the cable. 2 Replace the module or main board. When the A16B22010721 is being used as the main board, replace the servo interface module corresponding to the axis for which an alarm was issued. When the A16B22020900 and A16B32000020 are being used as the main board, the first/second axis servo interface circuit is mounted on the main board, and the third/fourth axis servo interface circuit is mounted on the servo module. Therefore, replace either the main board or servo module according to the axis for which an alarm was issued. See Subsec.2.2.1 for details of the module specifications and mounting locations.
303
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.12
ALARM 306 TO 308 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW)
Remedies
This alarm is generated when absolute pulse coder battery becomes low.
1 Battery for builtin absolute pulse coderReplace the battery connected to connector CX5X (or CX5Y) of the servo amplifier module. (Battery specification: A06B6073K001) 2 Battery for separate absolute pulse coder Exchange the battery connected to the connector JF25 on the main board. NOTE 1 Change the batteries while power of NC is supplied. 2 Do not change the battery (memory backup battery) for the control unit.
304
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.13
ALARM 350 (SERIAL PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL)
Points
An error is generated in the control section of the serial pulse coder.
1 Alarm No. 351 has also generatedRefer to alarm 351. 2 Only alarm No. 350 has generatedRefer to the following Confirm the details by diagnostic number 0202 and 0204.
D When diagnostic number 0202 shows 1

DGN 0202
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3 CMAL
#2
#1
#0 SPH
#3(CMAL) Speed count abnormal alarm has generated. #0(SPH) Soft phase data abnormal alarm has generated. 1 Check the contens using the above diagnostic function if the alarm generates repeatedly. If diagnostic data is the same, serial pulse coder may be faulty.Refer to Note 2 When diagnostic result does not the same, or other abnormality is detected, an external noise may be generated. D When diagnostic number 0204 shows 1
DGN 0204
#7
#6
#5
#4 LDAL
#3 PMAL
#2
#1
#0
#4(LDAL) LED of serial pulse coder is abnormal #3(PMAL) Pulses are not issued correctly by abnormality of serial pulse coder or feedback cable. (1) #4(LDAL) : LED in the serial pulse coder is abnormal. Serial pulse coder is faultyRefer to Note (2) #3(PMAL) : Pulses are not issued correctly by abnormality of feedback cable. 1 Fault of serial pulse coder Refer to Note 2 Feedback cable. (Failure of the cables connecting the pulse coder and servo amplifier module and those connecting the servo amplifier module and main board) NOTE Reference position and machines standard position are different from the ones before, adjust and set them correctly.
305
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.14
ALARM 351 (SERIAL PULSE CODER COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL)
Points
DGN
An error is generated in communication with serial pulse coder.
Check the details by the diagnostic function of the CNC.

#7 0202 DTE #6 CRC #5 STB #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7(DTE) Data error has generated. #6(CRC) Serial communication error has generated. #5(STB) Stop bit error has generated.
Causes
1) #7(DTE):Response from serial pulse coder is absent. 1 Signal cable is disconnected 2 Serial pulse coder is faulty. See Note 1. 3 +5V to the serial pulse coder is lowered. 2) #6(CRC),#5(STB):Serial communication is in faulty 1 Signal cable (between the pulse coder and servo amplifier module and between the servo amplifier module and main board) is faulty. 2 Serial pulse coder is faulty See Note 1. 3 Failure of the servo interface module, servo control module, or servo module on the main board. See Note 2. 4 Main board is faulty See Note 3. NOTE 1 After the serial pulse coder is changed, reference position or machines standard point is different from the one before replacement. Therefore reset and adjust it again. 2 Replace the module corresponding to the axis for which an alarm was issued. The configuration and mounting locations of the modules vary with the specification of the main board. For details, see Subsec. 2.2.1. 3 All the data stored in memory is lost when the main board is changed. Set NC data again, referring to Chapter 3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA.
306
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.15
ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD)
Amplifier or overheat of motor is detected.
400 SERVO ALM :X OVERLOAD
Example of CRT display. Axis name is also displayed.
Points
DGN
Confirm the detail by the diagnostic function of CNC.

#7 0200 OVL #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7(OVL) 1 OVERLOAD ALARM is displayed. Check details of alarms by DGN 201.

#7 DGN 0201 ALD #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1 0 Overheat of servo motor Overheat of Power supply module
Overheat of servo motor

(START)
NO Is it hot ? YES Overheat of motor Defective thermostat
(Next page) 1
NOTE After the motor is changed, reference position or machines reference point is different from the one before replace ment. Set it again.
307
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
D Overheat of power supply module
(START)
Check LED status of power supply module
[3] ? YES
NO
[-] ? YES
NO(Not light)
Is amplifier hot ? YES
NO
Check input power voltage of power supply module NO Normal ? YES
S Check whether the ambient temperature has increased. S Check whether the cutting conditions are too severe. S Check whether excessive load is being imposed on the machine. S Check that the motor insulation is normal.
Power supply module is faulty
Check magnetic circuit
308
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.16
ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF)
Ready signal (*DRDY) of servo amplifier is not turned on or turned off during operation.
(START) *When alarm 414 is also generated, LED shows a number. Consult with alarm 414. Check LED status of servo amplifier module
[-] ? YES
NO(Not lit)
Check input power supply of servo amplifier module YES Servo amp. module is faulty Normal ? NO
Check DC Link voltage
100VAC is normal ? YES
NO
Check power supply module
S Cable disconnection between servo amp. module and main board. S Module failure on main board: 1 Servo control module failure 2 Servo amplifier module failure 3 Servo module failure S Main CPU board is faulty
NOTE 1 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules mounted on the main board vary with the specification of the main board. For details, see Subsec. 2.2.1. 2 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to Chapter 3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA.
309
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.17
ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED ON)
D Alarm 404 D Causes *DRDY signal is turned on before MCON signal is turned on. Or *DRDY is not turned off after MCON signal is turned off. 1 Servo amplifier module is faulty. 2 Between servo amplifier module and main board is faulty. 3 A module on the main board is faulty: S Servo interface module failure S Servo control module failure S Servo module failure 4 Main board is faulty. NOTE 1 The configuration and mounting locations of the mounted modules vary with the specification of the main board. For details, see Subsec. 2.2.1. 2 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. Set the NC data again, referring to Chapter 3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA. Power on sequence (NCServo amplifier)
=*Power supply unit failure =*Input fuse disconnection
Power ON
Servo enable
=*SVF1 to 4 (Servo off signal)
Position, velocity control ready (*MCON)
=*System alarm (ALM900 to 973) =*Servo alarm (ALM400 to 417) =*Emergency stop (*ESP) =* Servo amp. alarm (1 to 9,b) =*Emergency stop signall (*ESP) =*100VAC Lack of 3phase input voltage
Servo amp. ready (*DRDY)
S Main board JSnA 10 DV *MCOM 20 20 JSnB 10
Servo amplifier (module)
RV
RLY
MCC
RV
DV
*DRDY
310
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
D Alarm 405 (Reference positin return is abnormal) D Causes Main board is faulty. NOTE When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. Set the NC data again, referring to Chapter 3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA.
311
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.18
ALARM 410 (EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT DURING STOP)
Position error amount at stop (DGN 300) exceeds a value set by parameter No. 1829.
(START)
YES Is it vertical axis? NO Check parameters 1825 and 1829 if they are correct (see parameter list attached) Check servo off signal of each axis. The servo off function is valid when DGN G126 bits 0 to 7 is 1. Servo off funciton is used to escape overload of an axis when the axis is mechanically clamped.
NO Correct ? YES Note) Perform initial setting of servo parameters
Set correct parameters. YES 1 ? NO Check PMC NO
Recovered ? YES Set digital servo parameters according to parameter list
Be carefull vertical axis does not drop.
Turn off NC power and remove power line of motor then turn on power Check the motor power interphase voltage at terminal block TB2 of the power supply module. Power supplied? YES
Note) Save current CNC parameters in a floppy disk or such before performing initial setting for safety.
Measure in DC range
( No power ) ON
S Servo amp. module is faulty. S Module failure on main board: 1 Servo interface module failure 2 Servo control module failure 3 Servo module failure S Main board or option 2 board is faulty.
Motor power line is broken
NOTE 1 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules vary with the specification of the main board. For details, see Subsec. 2.2.1. 2 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to Chapter 3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA.
312
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.19
ALARM 411 (EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE)
Position error amount during movement (DGN 300) execeeds a value set by parameter 1828.
(START)
With a move command, does this alarm occur after machine moves ?
Moves and alarmed?
YES (Move) 1
NO (No move) Turn off NC power, remove power line and turn on power
Be careful that vertical axis does not drop by its weight.
Check the motor power interphase voltage at terminal Measure by DC voltage block TB1 of the servo amplifier module.
NO (Not output) Power output ? YES Mechanical load is excessive Disconnection of power line Confirm eachaxis servo off signal G126.0 to 3=1
YES 1 ? NO
Check PMC suquence, release servo off and check operation again
Signal line between main CPU board and servo amplifier module is disconnected YES Normal ? NO
Servo amplifier module is faulty
Cable is faulty
313
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
Move the machine at constant low speed and check DGN 300.
YES Value fluctuate ?
NO Compare the value Note 1) obtained by the following formula and DGN 300 S Check whether the cutting conditions are too severe. S Check whether excessive load is being imposed on the machine. S Check that the motor insulation is normal.
NO Correct ?
YES
Compare value of PRM1828 and the list Note2)
S Servo amplifier module failure S Module failure on main board: 1 Servo interface module failure 2 Servo control module failure 3 Servo module failure S Main board failure
NO Correct ?
YES
Servo amplifier module is faulty
Correct parameters
NOTE Feed rate (mmmin) 1 1 Position error= 60 PRM1825 Detection unit 2 Parameter 1828yPosition error at rapid traverse 1.2 3 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules vary with the specification of the main board. For details, see Subsec. 2.2.1. When the main board is replaced, all the data in memory is lost. Reset NC data, referring to Chapter 3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA.
314
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.20
ALARM 414 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL)
414 SERVO ALARM:XAXIS DETECTION SYSTEM ERROR
EXAMPLE OF DISPLAY AXIS NAME DETECTED IS DISPLAYED
Points
Check details by CNCs diagnostic fucntion and LED display on the servo amplifier module and power supply module. 1
#7 DGN DGN DGN 0200 0201 0204 ALD RAM OFS MCC #6 LV #5 OVC #4 HCA EXP FSA #3 HVA #2 DCA #1 FBA #0 OFA
See Subsec. 1.8.2 for details of each bit. 2 LED display on the servo amplifier module and power supply module (Front panel)
STATUS
The LED display indicates that the user should refer to the FANUC Control Motor series Maintenance Manual (B65165E).
7 segments
315
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.21
ALARM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM)
Point
DGN DGN
Position detection signal line is disconnected or shortcircuited.
Check the details using the CNCs diagnostic fucntion.

#7 0200 0201 ALD EXP #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 FBA #0
FBA only is set to 1. FBA and ALD are set to 1.
The pulse coder is disconnected (software)(Note). The builtin serial pulse coder is disconnected.
FBA, ALD, and EXP are set to 1. The separate position detector is disconnected (SCALEn).
NOTE This alarm is related with fullclosed system.
Causes
1 Signal cable is disconnected or shortcircuitted. 2 Serial pulse coder or position detector is faulty. Refer to Note 1. 3 A module on the main board is faulty: S Servo interface module failure S Servo control module failure S Servo module failure See Note 2. 4 Main board is faulty. Refer to Note 3. NOTE 1 After the pulse coder is replaced, reference position or machines standard position is different from former one. Adjust and set it correctly. 2 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules vary with the specification of the main board. For details, see Subsec. 2.2.1. 3 When the main board is replaced, all the data stroed in memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to chapter 3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA.
Linearscale Servo amp. module PC (JFn)
(SERVOn) (SCALEn)
(JSnB)
n is an axis number
316
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.22
ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL)
D Causes
Digital servo parameters are abnormal. (Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.)
1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters: PRM 2020 : Motor format number PRM 2022 : Motor rotation direction PRM 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks PRM 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback PRM 1023 : Servo axis number PRM 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio PRM 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side. 2 Change the setting of this parameter to 0. PRM 2047 : Observer parameter 3 Perform initial setting of digital servo parameters. Refer to setcion 5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC. If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203) is set to 1.
#7 0280 #6 AXS #5 #4 DIR #3 PLS #2 PLC #1 #0 MOT
#0(MOT) : The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the predetermined range. #2(PLC) : The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid. #3(PLS) : The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in parameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid. #4(DIR) : The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No. 2022 (the value is other than 111 or 111). #6(AXS) : In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the parameter are not consecutive.
317
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.23
ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM)
Remedies
Spindle speed changes abnormally due to load.
Check whether spindle speed is constant by view of the speed meter on CRT.
Constant ? NO
YES
Is a heavy cutting being performed ? Confirm spindle load on CRT.
YES Reduce cutting condition
Heavy cutting? NO
Confirm the following parameter : PRM 4911 PRM 4912 PRM 4913 PRM 4914
Doesnt the cutting tool worn ?
Worn ?
YES Replace tool
NO
Spindle servo unit is faulty Spindle motor is faulty
Remedies
PRM 4911 : A ratio of spindle speed at which actual spindle speed is regarded as arrived at a command spindle speed. PRM 4912 : Spindle speed fluctuation ratio up to which the spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm is not issued. PRM 4913 : Spindle speed fluctuation that is not regarded as the spindle speed fluctuation alarm. PRM 4914 : Time when a spindle speed changed to when spindle speed fluctuation detection is started.
318
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.24
ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR)
Causes and Remedies
A communication error has ocuured in serial spindle.
Improper connection between the main board and the serial spindle. The following reason is considered. S System control module or memory & spindle module is faulty S A cable between the main board and spindle amplifier module disconneted or shortcircuited. S Spindle amplifier module is faulty NOTE 1 Replacing whether system control module or memory & spindle module is decided by the specification of main board. Subsec. 2.2.1. 2 When the system control module is replaced, replace it as soon as possible (within 30 minutes) . When the system control module is kept removed, memory contents of CNC is lost. 3 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the ladder program stored in memory is lost. See PMC data and set ladder program again. 4 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the NC data stored in memory is lost. See input/output item of data and set NC data again. 5 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, with using the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro data again after replacing.
319
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.25
ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED)
Points
When the spindle amplifier does not become normal state immediately after power is turned on in the serial spindle system, this alarm is informed.
This alarm does not occur once the system becomes ready including the spindle system . This alarm occurs during power on sequence before the system becomes ready. After the system becomes ready, serial spindle alarm is issued by alarm 749. (1) Optical cable is in poor contact or spindle amplifier power is off. (2) When display of spindle amplifier shows SU01 or an alarm other than AL24 is displayed, power to the NC is turned on. In this case, this alarm usually occurs when the NCs power is turned off while the serial spindle is operating. Turn off the power of serial spindle once, then turn it on and starts the system. (3) When the 2nd spindle is at the state of (1) or (2). When the 2nd spindle is used, parameter is set as follows : Bit 4 of parameter no.3701 is 1: No. of serial spindles connected is 2.
Causes
Details of Alarms
DGN
Confirm the details of troubles on diagnostic 409.

#7 0409 #6 #5 #4 #3 SPE #2 S2E #1 S1E #0 SHE
#0(SHE) 0 : Serial communication module on the CNC side is normal. 1 : Serial communication module was detected to be abnormal on the CNC side. #1(S1E) 0 : The serial communication module of the CNC side is normal. 1 : The serial communication module of the CNC side is abnormal. #2(S2E) 0 : At the start of spindle serial control, the spindle is normal. 1 : At the start of spindle serial control, the spindle is abnormal. #3(SPE) 0 : In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters satisfies the starting conditions for spindle amplifier. 1 : In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not satisfy the starting conditions for spindle amplifier.
320
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
Remedies
Reform the following countermeasures based on the above configurations: (1) #0(SHE)1: The serial communication module is detected to be abnormal. Replace the system control module or memory and spindle module. To replace the system control module or memory and spindle module, see the description of the main printed circuit board. (2) #1(SIE)1: When an abnormality is found in the 1st spindle at the start of serial spindle control, exchange the unit if the following check items are not concerned.
Check the parameters and connections at the 1st spindle to see whether the 1st spindle is mechanically and electrically connected.
If the above settings and connections are right, the system control module memory and spindle module, or the spindle amplifier itself may be defective. (3) #2(S2E)1: At the start of spindle serial control, when an abnormality is found in the 2nd spindle side.
Check the 2nd spindle parameters and connections to see whether the spindle is mechanically and electronically connected to the spindle.
If the above settings and connections are right, the system control module memory and spindle module, or the spindle amplifier itself may be defective. (4) #3(SPE)1: In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters does not satisfy the starting conditions for spindle amplifier.
Confirm the settings of parameters 4000s. Especially checks the parameters those are changed from the standard parameters. NOTE 1 The contents of CNC memory are lost if the system control module remains removed for a long time. When replacing the system control module, therefore, complete the replacement work promptly (within 30 minutes). 2 When the memory and spindle module is replaced, the ladder programs stored in memory are lost. Reenter the ladder programs as explained in the section describing PMC data I/O. 3 When the memory and spindle module is replaced, the NC data stored in memory may be lost. Reenter the NC data as explained in the section describing data I/O. 4 If a macro executor is being used, macro data is also lost when the memory and spindle module is replaced. Therefore, reenter the macro data after the module is replaced.
321
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.26
ALARM 751,761 (SPINDLE ALARM)
D Causes and Remedies
With serial spindle system, an alarm on the spindle unit is informed to the CNC. The alarm contents is displayed by ALxx on the display of spindle amp. The CNC holds an alarm number display (ALxx). Refer to the FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (Serial Interface) Maintenance Manual (B65045E) for details. Repair the spindle system as described in the manual.
322
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.27
ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE)
Remedies
Because an ambient temperature of the control unit becomes high, a thermostat mounted on the main board functions and informs an alarm.
(START)
Check fan on the top of the control unit is operating when power is on.
NO Operating YES
Check temperature around the control unit is high (more than 45_C)
Fun motor is faulty Replace fan motor
High temperature ? NO
YES
Thermostat on the main board is faulty. Replace the main board. (Note)
Lower temperature around the control unit
NOTE When the main board is replaced, all data stored in memory is lost. So, set the NC data again as explained in the section describing data I/O.
323
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.28
ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR)
Causes and Remedies
1. Main board specification: A16B22010721
ROM parity error occurred.
(1) When this alarm occurs before the start of operation. FROM module mounted on the main board is defective. (2) When this alarm occurs during operation. RAM module mounted on the main board is faulty.
SYSTM ALARM 900 ROM PARITY CNC ROM : FC0 Names of softwares those are in trouble are displayed. D20104
MACRO ROM SERVO ROM
2. Main board specification: A16B22020900
FROM module on the main board or main board is defective.

SYSTM ALARM 900 ROM PARITY CNC FLASH ROM BASIC OPTION A1 FROM files those are in trouble are displayed. DDA101
MACRO FLASH ROM SERVO FLASH ROM
3. Main board specificaton: A16B32000030
Defect in system ROM on the main board, or on the main board itself.
SYSTEM ALARM 900 ROM PARITY F01 Indicates the number of the defective ROM. DE0101
NOTE 1 Confirm the series and versions of control software those are displayed on upper right of the screen. 2 When FROM module is exchanged, exchange it with one that contains the software equal to or later than the previous software. 3 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. See data input/output item and reset NC data. 4 See Subsec.2.2.1 for specifications and locations of modules.
324
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.29
ALARM 910 TO 913 (RAM PARITY)
Causes and Remedies
Parity error of RAM module.
(1) RAM module is faulty or data in RAM module is faulty When this alarm occurs immediately after power is turned on, once turn off power, then perform memory all clear (see 1.12 list of operation) . (2) If parity error is not released by clearing all memory, RAM module may be faulty. Change RAM module on main board. * Set all the data again, referring to the data input/ output item. 1 Main board specification : A16B22010721 Replace RAM module on the main board. See Data input/output then set all data again. 2 Main board specification : A16B22020900 Replace the main board when the specifications of memory and spindle module are A20B29010764, A20B29010765. Replace the main board or memory and spindle module when the specifications of memory and spindle module are A20B29010762, A20B29010763. 3 Main board specification : A16B32000200 When the A20B29010764 or A20B29010765 memory and spindle module is installed, replace the main board. When the A20B29010760 or A20B 29010761 memory and spindle module is installed, replace the main board or memory & spindle module. NOTE 1 See Subsec. 2.2.1 for the specifications of module and the locations. 2 When the main board is replaced, the data stored in memory is lost. See data input/output item and reset NC data. 3 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the ladder program stored in memory is lost. See Input/output item of PMC data and set ladder program again. 4 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the NC data stored in memory is lost. See Input/output item of data and set NC data again. 5 When the memory & spindle module is replaced with using the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro data again after replacing. (3) Low voltage of memory back up battery Battery alarm occurs if voltage is 26V or less (3. 0V rating) . When the memory back up battery voltage is lowered, BAT is displayed at lower part of the screen. When battery alarm is lit, replace with new lithium battries as soon as possible. Refer to Subsec. 2.6.1.
325
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.30
ALARM 920 AND 921 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY)
points
D Watch dog timer alarm
920: Watch dog alarm or RAM parity in servo control circuit has occurred in the 1st or 2nd axis 921: Above alarm has occurred in the 3rd or 4th axis
The timer used to monitor the operation of CPU is called the watch dog timer. The CPU resets timer time every time a constant time has passed. When an error occurs in CPU or peripheral device, timer is not reset but the alarm is informed. RAM parity error was detected in the servo control module.
D RAM parity error
Causes and Remedies

1. Main board specification: A16B22010721 (1) Servo control module is faulty The servo control module includes servo RAM, watch dog timer circuit, etc. Defectiveness of hardware, abnormality or malfunctioning of detection circuit or the like is considered. Change the servo control module. (2) Servo interface module is faulty Change servo interface module. (3) Main board is faulty CPU or a circuit is defective or malfunctioning on the main board. Change the main board. NOTE When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. Refer to data input/ output item and set NC data again. 2. Main board specification: A16B22020900 and A16B32000020 (1) Main board is faulty The main board includes RAM for servo of 1st/2nd axis, watch dog timer circuit, etc. Defectiveness of hardware, abnormality on malfunctioning of defection circuit or the like is considered. Change the main board. NOTE When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. Refer to data input/ output item and set NC data again.
326
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Servo interface module is faulty The servo module includes RAM for servo of 3rd /4th axis, watch dog timer circuit, etc. Defectivenss of hardware, abnormality or malfunctioning of detection circuit or the like is considered. Change the servo module. NOTE See Subsec. 2.2.1 for the each specifications and locations of modules. (3) Malfunction by noise The watch dog timer circuit or CPU may malfunction due to noise intruded in the control unit. A noise to the power supply or an inductive noise to a signal line may be considered. Check operation of the other machine that is connected to the same power line, relays and compressers which may cause noise, then perform measures to supress noises. (See Sec. 2.13).
327
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.31
ALARM 924 (SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR)
D Causes and remedies
The digital servo module is not mounted. NOTE This alarm may not occur during normal operaion. This alarm may be generated when a PCB is changed for maintenance. (1) Check whether servo control module or servo interface module is mounted or not, whether it is mounted correctly or not, and whether it is mounted securely. (2) If cause 1 is not identified, the control module, servo interface module, servo
module or main board may be faulty. Replace each module, referring to the alarm 920 and 921 in the previous sections.
328
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.32
ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR)
Causes and Remedies
D Mother board or CPU card
930: CPU error (abnormal interrupt) has generated.
An interrupt which will not occur during usual operation has generated. Peripheral circuit of the CPU may be abnormal. Change the mother CPU board or CPU card. If operation is performed normally by power off and on, noise may be a cause. Refer to Sec. 2.13.
329
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.33
ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM)
Causes and Remedies
An error occurred when RAM test is being executed.
The following causes are considered : S PMC control module is faulty. S PMC user program is faulty (F ROM module or memory & spindle module is faulty. Replacing whether FROM module or memory & spindle module is decided by the specification of main board) . S RAM module is faulty. S Main board is faulty. NOTE 1 when the main board or the RAM module is replaced, all the data stored in memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to the Data input/output item. 2 when replacing FROM module, replace it with one that has software equal to or more than current software version. 3 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the ladder program stored in memory is lost. See input/output item of PMC data and set ladder program again. 4 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the NC data stored in memory is lost. See input/output item of data and set NC data again. 5 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, with using the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro data again after replacing. 6 When the main board is replaced, the NC data stored in memory is lost. See input/output item of data and set NC data again. 7 See Subsec. 2.2.1 for the specifications and locations of module.
330
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.34
ALARM 970 (NMI ALARM IN PMC CONTROL MODULE)
Causes and Remedies
RAM parity error or NMI has occurred in the PMC control module.
Following cause is considered. S PMC control module is faulty. S PMC user program error (FROM module or memory and spindle module failure) For information relating to module replacement, see the description of alarm 950.
331
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.35
ALARM 971 (NMI ALARM IN SLC)
Causes and Remedies
A communication error is detected between the CNC and FANUC I/O unit at SLC in the PMC control module.
Following cause is considered. S PMC control module is faulty. Refer to alarm 950 for changing of PMC control module. S FANUC I/O unit is faulty. S +24V power to the FANUC I/O unit is faulty. Remove connector CP32 of the interface module (AF01A,AF01B) and measure voltage across 1st and 2nd pins using tester. (Normally+24VDC+10%)
Interface module AF01A/AF01B CP32
1 2 3
+24V GND Unused
Disconnection or broken of cable.
332
B62705EN/03
7.TROUBLESHOOTING
7.36
ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM)
Causes and Remedies
NMI has generated in a board other than the main printed circuit board.
1) Any of option boards shown below may be faulty.

S
Option 1 board S Loader control board

SYSTEM ALARM 972 NMI OCUURRED IN OTHER MODULE SLOT 02 915 SRAM PARITY : (2N+1)
Indicates the slot No. where an NMI occurred, and the relevant message.
DDF102
<SUB
NOTE When you change Loader control board, you must input data (parameters, programs, etc.) on sub side.
333
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
B62705EN/03
7.37
ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM BY UNKNOWN CAUSE)
Causes and Remedies
An unknown NMI has generated.
1) Power supply printed circuit board or main board is faulty NOTE When the main CPU board is replaced, all the data in memory is lost. Set the NC data (parameter, offset and program etc) again. 2) Option boards may be faulty.
S
Option 1 board NOTE When you change the Loader control boards board, you must input data (parameters, programs,etc.) on the sub side.
334
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
ALARM LIST
A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 A.3 LIST OF ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . 361
337
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
A.1
LIST OF ALARM CODES
(1) Program errors /Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm)
Number 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 Message PLEASE TURN OFF POWER TH PARITY ALARM TV PARITY ALARM TOO MANY DIGITS ADDRESS NOT FOUND NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN Contents A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power. TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape. TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will be generated only when the TV check is effective. Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input. (Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.) A numeral or the sign was input without an address at the beginning of a block. Modify the program . The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed by another address or EOB code. Modify the program. Sign input error (Sign was input after an address with which it cannot be used. Or two or more signs were input.) Modify the program. Decimal point . input error (A decimal point was input after an address with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were input.) Modify the program. Unusable character was input in significant area. Modify the program. An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not provided is specified. Modify the program. Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was inadequate. Modify the program. A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading / synchronous feed. In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental outputted by address K exceed the maximum command value or a command such that the lead becomes a negative value is given. Modify the program. An attempt was made to move the machine along the axes, but the number of the axes exceeded the specified number of axes controlled simultaneously. Modify the program. An attempt has been made to move the tool along more than the maximum number of simultaneously controlled axes. Alternatively, no axis movement command or an axis movement command for two or more axes has been specified in the block containing the command for skip using the torque limit signal (G31 P99/98). The command must be accompanied with an axis movement command for a single axis, in the same block. In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the distance between the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No. 3410. An axis not included in the selected plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was commanded in circular interpolation. Modify the program. The command for circular interpolation lacks arc radius R or coordinate I, J, or K of the distance between the start point to the center of the arc. In circular interpolation by radius designation, negative value was commanded for address R. Modify the program. F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 digit column feed in circular interpolation. Modify the program.
007
ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT
009 010 011
ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT IMPROPER GCODE NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED CAN NOT COMMAND G95 (M series)
014
ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND (T series)
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED (M series) TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED (T series)
015
020
OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS
021 022 023 025
ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMANDED NO CIRCLE RADIUS ILLEGAL RADIUS COMMAND (T series) CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN G02/G03 (M series)
338
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Number 027
Message NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 (M series)
Contents No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type C. Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset type C. Modify the program. In the plane selection command, two or more axes in the same direction are commanded. Modify the program. The offset values specified by H code is too large. Modify the program. The offset values specified by T code is too large. Modify the program. The offset number specified by D/H code for tool length offset or cutter compensation is too large. Modify the program. The offset number in T function specified for tool offset is tool large. Modify the program. In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following address P was excessive or it was not specified. Modify the program. In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by system variables, the offset amount was excessive. A point of intersection cannot be determined for cutter compensation. Modify the program. A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program. The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 mode in cutter compensation C. Modify the program. The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03 mode in tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program. Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool nose radius compensation mode. Modify the program. Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation mode. Modify the program.
028
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT
029
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE (M series) ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE (T series) ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER (M series) ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER (T series) ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10
030
031
032
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 NO SOLUTION AT CRC (M series) NO SOLUTION AT CRC (T series) NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP /EXT BLK (M series) NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP /EXT BLK (T series) CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 (T series) CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 (M series)
033
034
035 036
037
CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN CRC G40 is commanded on the plane other than offset plane in cutter com(M seires) pensation B. The plane selected by using G17, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter compensation C mode. Modify the program. CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN NRC The offset plane is switched in tool nose radius compensation. (T seires) Modify the program. INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR BLOCK (M seires) Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation because the arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center. Modify the program. Chamfering or corner R was specified with a startup, a cancel, or switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in canned cycle G90 or G94. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C. Two or more blocks are consecutively specified in which functions such as the auxiliary function and dwell functions are performed without movement in the cutter compensation mode. Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
038
INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR BLOCK (T series) CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN NRC (T series)
039
040
INTERFERENCE IN G90/G94 BLOCK (T series) INTERFERENCE IN CRC (M seires)
041 INTERFERENCE IN NRC (T seires)
339
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
Number 042 044 046 050
Message G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC (M series)
Contents Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in cutter compensation. Modify the program.
G27G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode. CYC (M series) Modify the program. ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN COMMAND Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return command.
CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Optional chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting BLK (M series) block. Modify the program. CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block. BLK(T series) Modify the program.
051
MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR (M series) MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR (T series) CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR (M series)
Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block next to the optional chamfering or corner R block. Modify the program. Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the program. The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01,G02 or G03. Modify the program. The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01. Modify the program. For systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting, a comma was specified. For systems with this feature, a comma was followed by something other than R or C Correct the program. In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I, K and R are specified. Otherwise, the character after a comma , is not C or R in direct drawing dimensions programming. Modify the program. A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the program. In the arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer or corner R amount. In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer or corner R amount. Neither the end point nor angle is specified in the command for the block next to that for which only the angle is specified (A). In the chamfering comman, I(K) is commanded for the X(Z) axis. Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension drawing programming. In a arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R cutting block, a specified axis is not in the selected plane. Correct the program. Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing programming. In an external program number search, a specified program number was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being edited in background processing. Check the program number and external signal. Or discontinue the background eiting.
052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR (T series) TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS (M series) 053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS (T seires) NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER CHF/CNR (T series) MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR (M series) MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR (T series) NO END POINT & ANGLE IN CHF/CNR (T series) NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END (T series) END POINT NOT FOUND (M series) END POINT NOT FOUND (T series) PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND
054
055
056
057
058
059
060 061
SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Commanded sequence number was not found in the sequence number search. Check the sequence number. ADDRESS P/Q NOT FOUND IN G70G73 (T series) Address P or Q is not specified in G70, G71, G72, or G73 command. Modify the program.
340
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Number 062
Message ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71G76 (T series) 1. 2. 3. 4.
Contents The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or negative value. The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value. the negative value is specified to i or k is zero in G74 or G75. A value other than zero is specified to address U or W though i or k is zero in G74 or G75. 5. A negative value is specified to d, thoughthe relief direction in G74 or G75 is determined. 6. Zero or a negative value is specified to the height of thread or depth of cut of first time in G76. 7. The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater than the height of thread. 8. An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76. Modify the program.
063 064 065
SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G71, G72, or G73 (T series) command cannot be searched. Modify the program. SHAPE PROGRAM NOT MONOTONOUSLY (T series) ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71G73 (T series) A target shape which cannot be made by monotonic machining was specified in a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or G72). 1. G00 or G01 is not commanded at the block with the sequence number which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 command. 2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a sequence number which is specified by address P in G71 or G72, respectively. Modify the program. An unallowable G code was commanded beween two blocks specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73. Modify the program. G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q. Modify the program. The final move command in the blocks specified by P and Q of G70, G71, G72, and G73 ended with chamfering or corner R. Modify the program. The memory area is insufficient. Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry. The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with specified program number was not found in program number search. Check the data. The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option), 200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000 (option). Delete unnecessary programs and execute program registeration again. The commanded program number has already been used. Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and execute program registeration again. The program number is other than 1 to 9999. Modify the program number. An attempt was made to register a program whose number was protected. Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program. The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the program. A program number or a sequence number which was specified by address P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not found. Otherwise, a called program is being edited in background processing. Correct the program, or discontinue the background editing. In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in memory and those from the external device.
066 067 069
IMPROPER GCODE IN G71G73 (T series) CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE (T series) FORMAT ERROR IN G70G73 (T series) NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY DATA NOT FOUND
070 071
072
TOO MANY PROGRAMS
073
PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER PROTECT ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR NUMBER NOT FOUND
074 075 076 077 078
079
PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR
341
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
Number
Message G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED (M series)
Contents In the automatic tool length measurement function (G37), the measurement position reach signal (XAE, YAE, or ZAE) is not turned on within an area specified in parameter 6254 6255 (value ). This is due to a setting or operator error. In the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37), the measurement position reach signal (XAE or ZAE) is not turned on within an area specified in parameter 6254 (value ). This is due to a setting or operator error. Tool length automatic measurement (G37) was specified without a H code. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the program. Automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) was specified without a T code. (Automatic tool compensation function) Modify the program. H code and automatic tool compensation (G37) were specified in the same block. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the program. T code and automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) were specified in the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function) Modify the program. In automatic tool length measurement, an invalid axis was specified or the command is incremental. Modify the program. In automatic tool compensation (G36, G37), an invalid axis was specified or the command is incremental. Modify the program. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is incorrect. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was turned off. Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is defective. When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, though the read terminate command is specified, input is not interrupted after 10 characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective. The reference position return cannot be performed normally because the reference position return start point is too close to the reference position or the speed is too slow. Separate the start point far enough from the reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference position return. Check the program contents. Manual reference position return cannot be performed when automatic operation is halted. The commanded axis by G27 (Reference position return check) did not return to the reference position. P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system setting operation was performed.) Perform the correct operation according to th operators manual. P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset amount changed.) Perform the correct operation according to th operators manual. P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset amount changed.) Perform the correct operation according to the operators manual. P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After power ON, after emergency stop or P / S 94 to 97 reset, no automatic operation is performed.) Perform automatic operation.
080
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED (T series) OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN G37 (M series) OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN G37 (T series) HCODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 (M series)
081
082
TCODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 (T series) ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 (M series) ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 (T series) COMMUNICATION ERROR
083
085
086
DR SIGNAL OFF
087
BUFFER OVERFLOW
090
REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE
091 092 094
REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE POINT P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG)
095
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (EXT OFS CHG)
096
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (WRK OFS CHG)
097
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (AUTO EXEC)
342
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Number 098
Message G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE RETURN
Contents A command of the program restart was specified without the reference position return operation after power ON or emergency stop, and G28 was found during search. Perform the reference position return. After completion of search in program restart, a move command is given with MDI. Move axis before a move command or dont interrupt MDI operation. On the PARAMETER(SETTING) screen, PWE(parameter writing enabled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset the system. The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit operation. If this alarm has occurred, press <RESET> while pressing <PROG>, and only the program being edited will be deleted. Register the deleted program. The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the allowable range. Modify the program. The result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an alarm No.111 is issued. 1047 to 1029, 0, 1029 to 1047 Modify the program. Division by zero was specified. (including tan 90) Modify the program. A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded. Modify the program. There is an error in other formats than <Formula>. Modify the program. A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom macro. Modify the program. The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution is inhibited. Modify the program. The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple). Modify the program. The SQRT argument is negative. Or BCD argument is negative, and other values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument. Modify the program. The macro modal call is specified four fold. Modify the program.
099
MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. SEARCH PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY
100 101
110 111
DATA OVERFLOW CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW
112 113 114 115
DIVIDED BY ZERO IMPROPER COMMAND FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER
116 118 119
WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR ILLEGAL ARGUMENT
122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130
FOUR FOLD MACRO MODALCALL
CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND Macro control command is used during DNC operation. IN DNC Modify the program. MISSING END STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME BLOCK ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE NUMBER ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION DOEND does not correspond to 1 : 1. Modify the program. <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the program. In DOn, 1x n x3 is not established. Modify the program. NC and custom macro commands coexist. Modify the program. The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the program. An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation > is used. Modify the program. An axis control command was given by PMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC. Modify the program. Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message. Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause. No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear. Check the PMC ladder diagram.
131 132
TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGES ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND
343
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
Number 133
Message ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM MSG ILLEGAL ANGLE COMMAND (M series)
Contents Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external operator message. Check the PMC ladder diagram. The index table indexing positioning angle was instructed in other than an integral multiple of the value of the minimum angle. Modify the program. Without any spindle orientation , an attept was made for spindle indexing. Perform spindle orientation. In index table indexing.Another control axis was instructed together with the B axis. Modify the program. A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as spindle indexing addresses C, H. Modify the program. A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as Mcode related to spindle indexing. Modify the program. An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control. Modify the program. G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode. Modify the program. Scaling magnification is commanded in other than 1 to 999999. Correct the scaling magnification setting (G51 Pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or parameter 5411 or 5421). The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius exceed the maximum command value. Correct the program or scaling mangification. The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C plane must be the same. Modify the program. The conditions are incorrect when the polar coordinate interpolation starts or it is canceled. 1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified. 2) An error is found in the plane selection. Parameters No. 5460 and No. 5461 are incorrectly specified. Modify the value of program or parameter. G codes which cannot be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation mode was specified. See section II to 4.4 and modify the program. Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the settable range of judgement angle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 to No.1714) A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was specified as the life count type in the extended tool life management. Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value. Modify the program. The tool group commanded in the machining program is not set. Modify the value of program or parameter. The number of tools within one group exceeds the maximum value registerable. Modify the number of tools. In tool life data registration, a T code was not specified where one should be. Correct the program. When the group is not commanded, H99 or D99 was commanded. Correct the program. In the machining program, M06 and T code in the same block do not correspond to the group in use. Correct the program. Group No. which is specified with T 88 of the machining program do not included in the tool group in use. Correct the program. P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group is set. Correct the program. The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maximum allowable value. (See parameter No. 6800 bit 0 and 1) Modify the program.
135 SPINDLE ORIENTATION PLEASE (T series) ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND (M series) 136 C/HCODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME BLK. (T series) 137 139 141 142 MCODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME BLK. CAN NOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC (M series) ILLEGAL SCALE RATE (M series) SCALED MOTION DATA OVERFLOW (M series) ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED (M series) ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
143
144 145
146 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155
IMPROPER G CODE ILLEGAL SETTING DATA (M series) FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 (M series) ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT FOUND NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY TCODE NOT FOUND NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP (M series) ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06 (M series) ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06 (T series)
156 157
P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS
344
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Number 158 159 175
Message ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA TOOL DATA SETTING INCOMPLETE ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND
Contents The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify the setting value. During executing a life data setting program, power was turned off. Set again. Conditions when performing circular interpolation start or cancel not correct. To change the mode to the cylindrical interpolation mode, specify the command in a format of G07.1 rotation to axis name radius of cylinder. Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode was specified. 1) G codes for positioning: G28, G76, G81 to G89, including the codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle 2) G codes for setting a coordinate system: G50, G52 3) G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54 to G59 Modify the program. Check sum error Modify the program. G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode. Correct the program. The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510 exceeds the maximum number. Modify the parameter setting value. Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm the number of cables, parameters and I/O device. In the constant surface speed control, the axis specification is wrong. (See parameter No. 3770.) The specified axis command (P) contains an illegal value. Correct the program. A contour control mode, spindle positioning (Csaxis control) mode, or rigid tapping mode was specified during the serial spindle synchronous control mode. Correct the program so that the serial spindle synchronous control mode is released in advance. Switching command to contouring mode, Cs axis control or rigid tap mode or switching to spindle command mode is not correctly completed. (This occurs when the response to switch to the spindle control unit side with regard to the switching command from the NC is incorrect. This alarm is not for the purposes of warning against mistakes in operation, but because continuing operation in this condition can be dangerous it is a P/S alarm.)
IMPROPER GCODE IN G107 (T series) 176
177 178 179 180 190
CHECK SUM ERROR (G05 MODE) G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 MODE PARAM. (NO. 7510) SETTING ERROR COMMUNICATION ERROR (REMOTE BUF) ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT (M series)
194
SPINDLE COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE
195
MODE CHANGE ERROR
197
CAXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE The program specified a movement along the Csaxis when the signal MODE CON(DGN=G027#7) was off. Correct the program, or consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason the signal is not turned on. MACRO WORD UNDEFINED ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID TAP POSITION LSI OVERFLOW PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro. In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified. Modify the program. In the rigid tap, no F value is specified. Correct the program. In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. (System error) In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S command is incorrect. Modify the program. In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between the rigid M code (M29) block and G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or G88 for T series) block. Modify the program. Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or G88 for T series) is executed though the rigid M code (M29) is specified.Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason the DI signal (DGNG061.1) is not turned on. Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode. Correct the program.
199 200 201 202 203 204
205
RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF
206
CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (RIGID TAP) (M series)
345
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
Number 210
Message CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199
Contents M198 and M199 are executed in the schedule operation. M198 is executed in the DNC operation. Modify the program. 1) The execution of an M198 or M99 command was attempted during scheduled operation. Alternatively, the execution of an M198 command was attempted during DNC operation. Correct the program. 2) The execution of an M99 command was attempted by an interrupt macro during pocket machining in a multiple repetitive canned cycle.
211
G31 (HIGH) NOT ALLOWED IN G99 G31 is commanded in the per revolution command when the high speed skip option is provided. Modify the program. ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT (M series) ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT (T series) ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE The arbitrary angle chamfering or a corner R is commanded or the plane including an additional axis. Correct the program. The direct drawing dimensions programming is commanded for the plane other than the ZX plane. Correct the program. Movement is commanded for the axis to be synchronously controlled. Any of the following alarms occurred in the operation with the simple synchronization control. 1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis. 2) The program issued the manual continuous feed/manual handle feed/incremental feed command to the slave axis. 3) The program issued the automatic reference position return command without specifying the manual reference position return after the power was turned on. 4) The difference between the position error amount of the master and slave axes exceeded the value specified in parameter NO.8313. Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type is executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program. G51.2/G251 is further commanded in the G51.2/G251 mode. Modify the program. P or Q is not commanded in the G251 block, or the command value is out of the range. Modify the program. G251 and G250 are not independent blocks. In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis. Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or balance cutting are executed at a time. Modify the program. Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic operation starts. Perform reference position return only when bit 0 of parameter 1005 is 0. Reference position return is necessary before cycle start. Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the programmableparameter input. 1 Address N or R was not entered. 2 A number not specified for a parameter was entered. 3 The axis number was too large. 4 An axis number was not specified in the axistype parameter. 5 An axis number was specified in the parameter which is not an axis type. Correct the program. 6 An attempt was made to reset bit 4 of parameter 3202 (NE9) or change parameter 3210 (PSSWD) when they are protected by a password. Correct the program. When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via the RS232C interface, other users were using it. While punching was being performed with the function for controlling external I/O units ,background editing was performed.
212
213
214 217 218 219 220 221 224
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHROMODE DUPLICATE G51.2 (COMMANDS) (T series) NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND IN G251 (T series) COMMAND G250/G251 INDEPENDENTLY (T series) ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRMODE (T series) ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRMODE (T series) RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT (M series) TURN TO REFERENCE POINT (T series)
231
ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50
233 239
DEVICE BUSY BP/S ALARM
346
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Number 240 244 BP/S ALARM P/S ALARM (T series)
Message
Contents Background editing was performed during MDI operation. In the skip function activated by the torque limit signal, the number of accumulated erroneous pulses exceed 32767 before the signal was input. Therefore, the pulses cannot be corrected with one distribution. Change the conditions, such as feed rates along axes and torque limit, and try again. One of the G codes, G50, G10, and G04, which cannot be specified in the same block as a T code, was specified with a T code. Alarm details Binary input operation using highspeed remote buffer (G05) or high speed cycle machining (G05) has been specified in advance control mode (G08P1). Execute G08P0; to cancel advance control mode, before executing these G05 commands. The end of record (%) was specified. I/O is incorrect. modify the program. Transfer cannot be performed because no trace data exists. An erroneous parameter was specified for restarting a program. A parameter for program restart is invalid. The end command (G110) was specified before the registratioin start command (G101, G102, or G103) was specified for the Baxis. While a registration start command (G101, G102, or G103) was being executed, another registration start command was specified for the Baxis.
245 253
TCODE NOT ALOWEE IN THIS BLOCK (T series) G05 IS NOT AVAILABLE (M series)
5010 5014 5020 5030 5031
END OF RECORD TRACE DATA NOT FOUND (M series) PARAMETER OF RESTART ERROR ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100) (T series) ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100, G102, G103) (T series)
5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040
NEW PRG REGISTERED IN BAXS While the machine was moving about the Baxis, at attempt was made MOVE (T series) to register another move command. NO PROG SPACE IN MEMORY BAXS (T series) PLURAL COMMAND IN G110 (T series) NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED BAXS (T series) ADDRESS R NOT DEFINED IN G81G86 (T series) Commands for movement about the Baxis were not registered because of insufficient program memory. Multiple movements were specified with the G110 code for the Baxis. A feedrate was not specified for cutting feed about the Baxis. Point R was not specified for the canned cycle for the Baxis.
ADDRESS Q NOT DEFINED IN G83 Depth of cut Q was not specified for the G83 code (peck drilling cycle). (T series) Alternatively, 0 was specified in Q for the Baxis. TOO MANY START MCODE COMMAND (T series) START UNREGISTERED BAXS PROG (T series) CAN NOT COMMANDED BAXS MOVE (T series) CAN NOT COMMANDED G110 BLOCK (T series) G68 FORMAT ERROR (M series) More than six M codes for starting movement about the Baxis were specified. An attempt was made to execute a program for the Baxis which had not been registered. The machine could not move about the Baxis because parameter No.8250 was incorrectly specified, or because the PMC axis system could not be used. Blocks containing the G110 codes were successively specified in tool tip radius compensation for the Baxis. A G68 command block contains a format error. This alarm is issued in the following cases: 1. I, J, or K is missing from a G68 command block (missing coordinate rotation option). 2. I, J, and K are 0 in a G68 command block. 3. R is missing from a G68 command block. The same address has been specified two or more times in a single block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same group have been specified in a single block.
5041 5044
5074
ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR
347
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
(2) Background edit alarm

Number ??? 140 BP/S alarm BP/S alarm Message Contents BP/S alarm occurs in the same number as the P/S alarm that occurs in ordinary program edit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074 085,086,087 etc.) It was attempted to select or delete in the background a program being selected in the foreground. (NOTE) Use background editing correctly.
NOTE Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the background edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation. (3) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm
Number 300 301 Message nthaxis origin return APC alarm: nthaxis communication Contents Manual reference position return is required for the nthaxis (n=1 8). nthaxis (n=1 4) APC communication error. Failure in data transmission Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. nthaxis (n=1 4) APC overtime error. Failure in data transmission. Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. nthaxis (n=1 4) APC framing error. Failure in data transmission. Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. nthaxis (n=1 4) APC parity error. Failure in data transmission. Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. nthaxis (n=1 4) APC pulse error alarm. APC alarm.APC or cable may be faulty. nthaxis (n=1 4) APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so that the data cannot be held. APC alarm. Battery or cable may be faulty. nthaxis (n=1 4) axis APC battery voltage reaches a level where the battery must be renewed. APC alarm. Replace the battery. nthaxis (n=1 4) APC battery voltage has reached a level where the battery must be renewed (including when power is OFF). APC alarm .Replace battery. An attempt was made to perform reference position return without rotating the motor through one or more turns. Rotate the motor through one or more turns, turn off the power then on again, then perform reference position return.
302
APC alarm: nthaxis over time
303 304
APC alarm: nthaxis framing APC alarm: nthaxis parity
305 306
APC alarm: nthaxis pulse error APC alarm: nthaxis battery voltage 0 APC alarm: nthaxis battery low 1
307
308
APC alarm: nthaxis battery low 2
309
APC ALARM : n AXIS ZRN IMPOSSIBL
348
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
(4) Serial pulse coder (SPC) alarms When either of the following alarms is issued, a possible cause is a faulty serial pulse coder or cable.
Number 350 351 Message SPC ALARM: n AXIS PULSE CODER SPC ALARM: n AXIS COMMUNICATION Contents The n axis (axis 14) pulse coder has a fault. Refer to diagnosis display No. 202, 204 for details. n axis (axis 14) serial pulse coder communication error (data transmission fault) Refer to diagnosis display No. 203 for details.
D The details of serial pulse coder alarm No.350

202
The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 350 (pulse coder alarm) are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 202) as shown below.
#7 #6 CSA #5 BLA #4 PHA #3 RCA #2 BZA #1 CKA #0 SPH
CSA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it. BLA : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm No. 350 (serial pulse coder alarm). PHA : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. replace the serial pulse coder or cable. RCA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it. BZA : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first time. Make sure that the batteries are connected. Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform a reference position return. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm No. 350 (serial pulse coder alarm). CKA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it. SPH : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. Replace the serial pulse coder or cable. D The details of serial pulse coder alarm No.351
203
The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351 (communication alarm) are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 203) as shown below.
#7 DTE #6 CRC #5 SRB #4 PRM #3 #2 #1 #0
DTE : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error. The pulse coder, feedbak cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or servo control module. CRC : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error. The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or servo control module. STB : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error. The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or servo control module. PRM : An invalid parameter was found. Alarm No. 417 (invalid servo parameter) is also issued.
349
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
(5) Servo alarms

Number 400 401 404 Message SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS OVERLOAD SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS VRDY OFF SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS VRDY ON Contents The nth axis (axis 14) overload signal is on. Refer to diagnosis display No. 200, 201 for details. The nth axis (axis 14) servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off. Even though the nth axis (axis 14) READY signal (MCON) went off, the servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) is still on. Or, when the power was turned on, DRDY went on even though MCON was off. Check that the servo interface module and servo amp are connected. Position control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in the reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position return could not be executed correctly. Try again from the manual reference position return. The difference in synchronous axis position deviation exceeded the set value. An abnormal load on the servo motor was detected. Alternatively, an abnormal load on the spindle motor was detected in Cs mode. The position deviation value when the nth axis (axis 14) stops is larger than the set value. Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1829 for each axis. The position deviation value when the nth axis (axis 14) moves is larger than the set value. Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1828 for each axis. The contents of the error register for the nth axis (axis 14) are beyond the range of 231 to 231. This error usually occurs as the result of an improperly set parameters. Nth axis (axis 14) digital servo system fault. Refer to diagnosis display No. 200, 201, and No.204 for details. A speed higher than 511875 units/s was attempted to be set in the nth axis (axis 14). This error occurs as the result of improperly set CMR. Position detection system fault in the nth axis (axis 14) pulse coder (disconnection alarm). Refer to diagnosis display No. 200, 201 for details. This alarm occurs when the nth axis (axis 14) is in one of the conditions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm) 1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 (motor form) is out of the specified limit. 2) A proper value (111 or 111) is not set in parameter No.2022 (motor revolution direction). 3) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2023 (number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution). 4) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2024 (number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution). 5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flexible field gear rate) have not been set. 6) A value outside the limit of {1 to the number of control axes} or a non continuous value (Parameter 1023 (servo axis number) contains a value out of the range from 1 to the number of axes, or an isolated value (for example, 4 not prceded by 3).was set in parameter No. 1023 (servo axisnumber). SYNC TORQUE : EXCESS ERROR When simple synchronous control is applied, the torque command difference between the master and slave axes exceeded the value set in parameter No. 2031.
405
SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT RETURN FAULT)
407 409 410
SERVO ALARM: EXCESS ERROR TORQUEALM : EXCESS ERROR SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EXCESS ERROR SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EXCESS ERROR SERVO ALARM: nth AXIS LSI OVERFLOW SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS DETECTION RELATED ERROR SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EXCESS SHIFT SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS DISCONNECTION SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS PARAMETER INCORRECT
411
413
414 415 416
417
420
350
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Number 421
Message EXCESS ER(D) : EXCESS ERROR
Contents While the dual position feedback function is being applied, an excessive difference was detected between a semiclosed loop error and closed loop error. Check the dual position conversion factor set in parameter Nos. 2078 and 2079. The specified allowable speed has been exceeded while torque control for PMC axis control is applied. The allowable total amount of travel, set in a parameter, has been exceeded while torque control for PMC axis control is applied.
422 423
EXCESS ER(D) : SPEED ERROR EXCESS ER(D) : EXCESS ERROR
D Details of servo alarm No.414

200
The details of servo alarm No. 414 are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 200 and No.204) as shown below.
#7 OVL #6 LV #5 OVC #4 HCA #3 HVA #2 DCA #1 FBA #0 OFA
OVL : An overload alarm is being generated. (This bit causes servo alarm No. 400. The details are indicated in diagnostic data No.201). LV : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp. Check LED. OVC : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo. HCA : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp. Check LED. HVA : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp. Check LED. DCA : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp. Check LED. FBA : A disconnection alarm is being generated. (This bit causes servo alarm No.416.The details are indicated in diagnostic data No. 201) OFA : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
201 #7 ALD #6 #5 #4 EXP #3 #2 #1 #0
When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 400 is being generated): ALD 0 : Motor overheating 1 : Amplifier overheating When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 416 is being generated):
ALD
1 1 0
EXP
0 1 0
Alarm details
Builtin pulse coder disconnection (hardware) Separately installed pulse coder disconnection (hardware) Pulse coder is not connected due to software.
351
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
#7 204
#6 OFS
#5 MCC
#4 LDA
#3 PMS
#2
#1
#0
OFS : A current conversion error has occured in the digital servo. MCC : A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has welded. LDA : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective. PMS : A feedback pulse error has occured because the feedback cable is defective. (6) Over travel alarms
Number 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 Message OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL : n OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL : n OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL : n OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL : n Contents Exceeded the nth axis + side stored stroke limit I. (Parameter No.1320 or 1326 NOTE) Exceeded the nth axis side stored stroke limit I. (Parameter No.1321 or 1327 NOTE) Exceeded the nth axis + side stored stroke limit II. (Parameter No.1322 ) Exceeded the nth axis side stored stroke limit II. (Parameter No.1323) Exceeded the nth axis + side stored stroke limit III. (Parameter No.1324 ) Exceeded the nth axis side stored stroke limit III. (Parameter No.1325 ) Exceeded the nth axis + side hardware OT. Exceeded the nth axis side hardware OT.
NOTE Parameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when EXLM(stroke limit switch signal) is on.
(7) Overheat alarms

Number 700 701 704 Message OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Contents Control unit overheat Check that the fan motor operates normally, and clean the air filter. The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for the contorl unit is overheated. Check the operation of the fan motor and replace the motor if necessary. Spindle overheat in the spindle fluctuation detection (1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the cutting condition. (2) Check whether the cutting tool is share. (3) Another possible cause is a faulty spindle amp.
(8) Rigid tapping alarms

Number 740 741 742 Message RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ERROR RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ERROR RIGID TAP ALARM: LSI OVERFLOW Contents The positional deviation of the stopped spindle has exceeded the set value during rigid tapping. The positional deviation of the moving spindle has exceeded the set value during rigid tapping. An LSI overflow has occurred for the spindle during rigid tapping.
352
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
(9) Serial spindle alarms

Number 749 Message SSPINDLE LSI ERROR Contents It is serial communication error while system is executing after power supply on. Following reasons can be considered. 1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable is cut. 2) MAIN CPU board is fault. 3) Spindle amp. printed board is fault. If this alarm occurs when CNC power supply is turned on or when this alarm can not be cleared even if CNC is reset, turn off the power supply also turn off the power supply in spindle side. 750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START FAULT This alarm is generated when the spindle control unit is not ready for starting correctly when the power is turned on in the system with the serial spindle. The four reasons can be considered as follows: 1) An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control units power is OFF. 2) When the NC power was turned on under alarm conditions other than SU01 or AL24 which are shown on the LED display of the spindle control unit. In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off once and perform startup again. 3) Other reasons (improper combination of hardware) This alarm does not occur after the system including the spindle control unit is activated. 4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of parameter No. 3701, is 1) is in one of the above conditions 1) to 3). See diagnostic display No. 409 for details. This alarm indicates in the NC that an alarm is generated in the spindle unit of the system with the serial spindle. The alarm is displayed in form ALXX (XX is a number). Refer to A.3 Alarms displayed on spindle servo unit .The alarm number XX is the number indicated on the spindle amplifier. The CNC holds this number and displays on the screen. This alarm is generated if the system does not properly terminate a mode change. The modes include the Cs contouring, spindle positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle control modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle control unit does not respond correctly to the mode change command issued by the NC. Abnormal first spindle motor load has been detected. Refer to alarm No.751. (For 2nd axis) Refer to alarm No.752.(For 2nd axis) Same as alarm No.754 (for the second spindle)
751
FIRST SPINDLE ALARM DETECTION (ALXX)
752
FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE FAULT
754 761 762 764
SPINDLE1 ABNORMAL TORQUE ALM SECOND SPINDLE ALARM DETECTION (ALXX) SECOND SPINDLE MODE CHANGE FAULT SPINDLE2 ABNORMAL TORQUE ALM
353
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
D The details of spindle alarm No.750

409
The details of spindle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 409) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 SPE #2 S2E #1 S1E #0 SHE
#0 (SHE) 0 : The serial communications module in the CNC is normal. 1 : The serial communications module in the CNC was detected to have a fault. #1 (S1E) 0 : The first spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup. 1 : The first spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle axis serial control startup. #2 (S2E) 0 : The second spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup. 1 : The second spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle serial control startup. #3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters fulfill the spindle unit startup conditions. 1 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not fulfill the spindle unit startup conditions.
354
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
(10) System alarms

Number 900 910 911 912 913 920 Message ROM PARITY DRAM PARITY : (Low) DRAM PARITY: (High) SRAM PARITY: (Low) SRAM PARITY : (High) SERVO ALARM (1/2 AXIS)
(These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)

Contents FROM parity error in a ROM file (control software), such as CNC, macro, or digital servo. The FROM module may be defective. For an SRAM parity error, initialize the memory. If the error subsequently l recurs, or i in the h case of f a DRAM parity i error, replace l the h RAM module module. q y set the parameters and all other data again. g Subsequently, Servo alarm (1st or 2nd axis). A watchdog alarm or a RAM parity error in the servo module occurred. Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board. Servo alarm (3rd or 4th axis). A watchdog alarm or a RAM parity error in the servo module occurred. Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board. The digital servo module is not installed. Check that the servo control module or servo interface module on the main board is mounted securely. CPU error (abnormal interrupt) The main board is faulty. PCB ID error. The main board or the memory module may be defective. Fault occurred in the PMC. The PMC control module on the main board or the RAM module may be defective. An alarm condition occurred in the interface with an I/O unit. Check the connection between the PMC control module on the main board and the I/O Unit. Also, check that the power of the I/O Unit is on and that the interface module is operating normally. NMI occurred in a board other than the main board. The main board or the back panel may be defective. NMI occurred for an unknown reason. The printed board of the power unit or the main board may be defective. Or, there may be noise interference. Bus error The main board may be defective.
921
SERVO ALARM (3/4 AXIS)
924
SERVO MODULE SETTING ERROR CPU INTERRUPUT PCB ERROR PMC SYSTEM ALARM NMI OCCURRED IN SLC
930 940 950 971
972 973
NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MODULE NON MASK INTERRUPT
974
BUS ERROR
355
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
A.2
LIST OF ALARMS (PMC)
(1) Alarm messages (PMC)
Message ALARM NOTHING ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR(RAM) Normal status The sequence program in the debugging RAM is defective. (solution) Please clear the debugging RAM and input LADDER again. The debugging RAM is not installed though the RAM is selected. (solution) Please install the debugging RAM or install ROM for sequence program and select ROM with K17#3=0. The size of sequence program exceeds the maximum size of LADDER(PMCRC only). (solution) Please change MAX LADDER AREA SIZE at the SYSPRM screen and restart the system. The size of sequence program exceeds the option specification size. (solution) Please increase the option specification size. Or, reduce the size of sequence program. The PMC model setting of the sequence program is not corresponding to an actual model. (solution) Please change the PMC model setting by the offline programmer. The module type of the PMC engine is not correct. (solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine for a correct one. Contents and solution
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR(OPTION) ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH
ER05 PMC MODULE TYPE ERROR ER07 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP) ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING (series name) ER11 OPTION AREA NOTHING (series name) ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR (series name) ER13 OPTION AREA ERROR (series name) ER14 OPTION AREA VERSIION ERROR (series name) ER15 OPTION AREA VERSIION ERROR (series name) ER 16 RAM CHECK ERROR (PROGRAM RAM) ER17 PROGRAM PARITY
There is no step number option of LADDER. The management software for the PMCRB has not been transferred. (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC. The management software for the PMC C board has not been transferred. (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC. The series of the management software for the PMCRB differs between BASIC and OPTION. (solution) Contact FANUC. The series of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC and OPTION. (solution) Contact FANUC. The edition of the management software for the PMCRB differs between BASIC and OPTION. (solution) Contact FANUC. The edition of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC and OPTION. (solution) Contact FANUC. The debugging RAM cannot be read/written normally. (solution) Please exchange the debugging RAM. The parity error occurred on ROM for sequence program or the debugging RAM. (solution) ROM: The deterioration of ROM may be deteriorated Please exchange ROM for the sequence program RAM: Please edit the sequence program once on PMC Still the error occurs, exchange the debugging RAM. Transferring the sequence program from offline programmer was interrupted by the power off etc. (solution) Please clear the sequence program and transfer the sequence program again. Editing the LADDER was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to the CNC screen by the function key etc. (solution) Please edit LADDER once on PMC. Or, please input LADDER again.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR
356
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Message ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA ERROR
Contents and solution Editing the symbol and comment was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to the CNC screen by the function key etc. (solution) Please edit symbol and comment once on PMC. Or, please input symbol and comment again. Editing the message data was interrupted by the power off or the switch to the CNC screen by the function key etc. (solution) Please edit message data once on PMC. Or, please input message data again. There is no sequence program There is a change in setting LADDER MAX AREA SIZE etc. (solution) Please restart the system to make the change effective. The PMCRB management software editions are inconsistent. (solution) Contact FANUC. The PMCRB management software cannot be initialized. (solution) Contact FANUC. Any DI/DO unit of I/O Unit or the connection unit etc. is not connected. When builtin I/O card is connected, this message is not displayed. (solution) When builtin I/O card is used: Please confirm whether the builtin I/O card is certainly connected with. When I/O Link is used: Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turning on. Or please confirm the connection of the cable. The LSI for I/O Link is defective. (solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine. The communication with the DI/DO units of the xx group failed. (solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable connected to the DI/DO units of the xx group. Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turned on earlier than CNC and PMC. Or, please exchange the module of PMC engine on the DI/DO units of the xx group The number of the output data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective. (solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group. FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual (B61813E) FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL B Connection Manual(B62163E) The number of the input data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective. (solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group. FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual (B61813E) FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL B Connection Manual(B62163E) The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes. (The assignment data of output side of xx group or later become ineffective.) (solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number of the output data of each group. The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes. (The assignment data of input side of xx group or later become infective.) (Solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number of the input data of each goup.
ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR
ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION ERROR (PMCAOPT) ER26 SOFTWARE VERSION ERROR (PMCAOPT) ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
ER33 SLC ERROR ER34 SLC ERROR(xx)
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATA IN GROUP(xx)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA IN GROUP(xx)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT DATA OVER(xx)
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATA OVER(xx)
357
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
*When ER00 to ER26 occur, sequence program is not available.

Message WN02 OPERATE PANEL ADDRESS ERROR WN03 ABORT NC to WINDOW/ EXIN Contents and solution The address setting data of the operators panel for FS to 0 is illegal. (solution) Please correct the address setting data. LADDER was stopped while CNC and PMC were communicating. The functional instruction WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, DISPB, and etc. may not work normally. (solution) When restarting the system, this alarm will be released. Execute the sequence program(Press RUN key) after confirming whether there is a problem in LADDER or not. A ladder program for the PMC to RA3/RA5 was transferred to the PMC to RB5. (solution) Correct the ladder type. Some user tasks are stopped by break point of the debugging function. When functional instruction CALL(SUB65) or CALLU(SUB66) was executed, the stack of the LADDER overflowed. (solution) Please reduce the nesting of the subprogram to 8 or less.
WN05 PMC TYPE NO CONVERSION WN06 TASK STOPPED BY DEBUG FUNC WN07 LADDER SP ERROR (STACK)
(2) Alarm messages (For EDIT 1)

Message ADDRESS BIT NOTHING FUNCTION NOT FOUND COM FUNCTION MISSING Contents and solution The address of the relay/coil is not set. There is no functional instruction of the input number. The funcitonal instruction COM (SUB29) is not correctly dealt with. Correspondence of COM and COME (SUB29) is incorrect. Or, the number of coil controlled by COM is specified by the model which the number cannot be specified. There in no empty area of the buffer for the editing. (solution) Please reduce NET under editing. Functional instruction END1 and END2 do not exist. Or, there are error net in END1 and END2. Or, order of END1 and END2 is not correct. There is an error net. The wrong number of the functional instruction is searched. The functional instruction is not correctly connected. The horizontal line of the net is not connected. Because the power had been turn off while editing LADDER, some net under editing was cleared. Operation is not correct. The value is not specified and only INPUT key was pushed. The address data is not correctly inputted. Because the space to display the instruction on screen is not enough, the functional instruction cannot be made. The symbol which was inputted is not defined. There is an incorrect input data. Nonnumerical value was inputted with COPY, INSLIN,CUP,CDOWN etc. The input address was specified for write coil. An illegal character was specified for the data table. The input net is larger than the editing buffer. (solution) Please reduce the net under editing. The functional instruction JMP(SUB10) is not correctly dealt with. Correspondence of JMP and JMPE(SUB30) is incorrect. The number of coil to jump is specified by the model which the number of coil cannot specified. (It is possible to specify the coil number only on PMCRB/RC.) LADDER is broken. There is an incorrect LADDER. You try to edit sequence program on the ROM.
EDIT BUFFER OVER END FUNCTION MISSING
ERROR NET FOUND ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL ILLEGAL NETS CLEARED ILLEGAL OPERATION
SYMBOL UNDEFINED INPUT INVALID
NET TOO LARGE JUMP FUNCTION MISSING
LADDER BROKEN LADDER ILLEGAL IMPOSSIBLE WRITE
358
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Message OBJECT BUFFER OVER PARAMETER NOTHING PLEASE COMPLETE NET PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO.
Contents and solution The sequence program area was filled. (solution) Please reduce the LADDER. There is no parameter of the functional instruction. The error net was found in LADDER. (solution) After correcting the error net, please continue operating. Please input the number of the functional instruction. (solution) If you do not input the functional instruction, please push soft key FUNC again. You tried to edit though there was neither RAM for debugging nor ROM for sequence program. There is an unnecessary relay or coil. The relay or the coil does not suffice. It is impossible to recover the sequence program. (solution) Please clear the all data. The same symbol name is defined in other place. The comment data area was filled. (solution) Please reduce the number of the commnet. The symbol data area was filled. (solution) Please reduce the number of the symbol. There is an incorrect vertical line of the net. The message data area was filled. (solution) Please reduce the number of the message. The 1st level of LADDER is too large to complete execution in time. (solution) Please reduce the 1st level of LADDER.
PROGRAM MODULE NOTHING RELAY COIL FORBIT RELAY OR COIL NOTHING PLEASE CLEAR ALL SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW SYMBOL DATA OVERFLOW VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL MESSAGE DATA OVERFLOW 1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIME OVER
359
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
(3) Alarm messages (For I/O)

Message I/O OPEN ERROR nn Contents and solution An error occurs when the reader/puncher interface was started. nn= 1 Because the interface is used with NC etc., the interface is not able to be opened by PMC side. (solution) After other functions finishes using the line, please execute again. 6 There is no option for the interface. 20 The interface cannot be opened. (solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm setting of the baud rate etc. An output error occurred in the reader/puncher interface. nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct. (solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm setting the baud rate etc. 22 Opponent side is not ready to receive. (solution) Please confirm the power supply on the opponent side. Or, please initialize the interface. An input error occurred in the reader/puncher interface. nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct. (solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm setting the baud rate etc. 21 The data is not sent from the opponent side. (solution) Please confirm the power supply on the opponent side. Please initialize the opponent side. An error occurred in directory read processing from FD Cassette. nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct. (solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm setting of the baud rate etc. A compare error occurred. xxxxxx : The Address where the compare error occurred. aa : The data on PMC side. bb : The data on device side Enter Y to continue processing. The data transferred to the address out of the PMC debugging RAM area. xxxxxx : Transferred address. (solution) Please confirm the address of the transferring data. LADDER : Please confirm the model setting. C language : Please confirm setting the address in the link control statement and build file. An error occurred in the ROM writer.
I/O WRITE ERROR nn
I/O READ ERROR nn
I/O LIST ERROR nn
COMPARE ERR xxxxxx=aa:bb CONT? (Y/N)
ADDRESS IS OUT OF RANGE (xxxxxx)
ROM WRITER ERROR nnnnnn
360
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
A.3
SPINDLE ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE)
NOTE Erxx is not displayed on the screen.
Message Er01
Contents
Countermeasure
*Although ESP (there are 2 types : connection signal and *Confirm the sequence of ESP and MRDY. PMCCNC) and MRDY (machine ready signal) are not input, SFR/SRV is input. However, regarding MRDY, pay attention to the setting of use/not use spindle parameter MRDY. If spindle motor is not integrated with spindle in system Set the spindle motor speed detector parameter to with highresolution magnetic pulse coder, speed detec- 128 p/rev. tor of spindle motor is set to 128 p/rev. Attempt to excite motor fails if value other than 128 p/rev is set. Parameter for highresolution magnetic pulse coder is Check parameter setting for highresolution magnot set, but Cs contouring control command is entered. netic pulse coder. In this case, motor is not excited. Although parameter setting for using position coder was Confirm the parameter setting of the position coder. not performed, commands for servo mode and synchronous control are input. In this case, the motor will not be excited. Although option parameter for orientation is not set, the Confirm the parameter setting of orientation. orientation command (ORCM) is input. Although option parameter for output switchover is not Confirm the parameter setting for output switching set, LOW winding is selected. and power line status signal. Although Cs contouring control command was entered, Confirm the sequence. SFR/SRV is not entered. Although servo mode control command was input, SFR/ Confirm the sequence. SRV is not input. Although synchronous control command was input, Confirm the sequence. SFR/SRV is not input. Cs control command was entered, but another mode Never set another mode when Cs contouring con(servo mode, synchronous control, orientation) is speci- trol command is being processed. Before changfied. ing to another mode, clear Cs contouring contorl command. Servo mode command was entered, but another mode Do not command other modes during servo mode (Cs contouring control, synchronous control, orienta- command. When moving to other modes, perform tion)is specified. after releasing the servo mode command. Synchronous control command was entered, but anoth- Do not command other modes during synchronous er mode (Cs contouringt control, servo mode, orienta- control command. tion) is specified. When moving to other modes, perform after releasing the synchronous control command. Orientation command was entered, but another mode Do not command other modes during orientation (Cs contouring control, servo mode, synchronous con- command. trol) is specified. When moving to other modes, perform after releasing the orientation command. SFR/SRV are simultaneously commanded. Command one or the other. Cs contouring control command is entered when differ- Check parameter setting and control input signal. ential speed control function is enabled by parameter setting (No.6500#5=1). Differential mode command (DEFMDA) is entered when Check parameter setting and control input signal. differential speed function is disabled by parameter setting (No.6500#5=1). Parameter setting (No.6511#0,1,2) for speed detector is Check parameter setting. incorrect. (Specified speed detector is not present.)
Er02
Er03
Er04
Er05 Er06 Er07 Er08 Er09 Er10
Er11
Er12
Er13
Er14 Er15
Er16
Er17
361
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
Message Er18
Contents
Countermeasure
Spindle orientation command of position coder type is Check parameter setting and control input signal. entered when use of position coder signal is disabled by parameter setting( No.6501#2=0). Although the command for orienting the magnetic sensor Do not issue another mode while the orientation system was entered, another mode was issued. command is executed. Before issuing another mode, cancel the orientation command. Both the slave mode and the highresolution magnetic These two settings are incompatible. Check the pulse coder were enabled. parameter settings. The slave mode command (SLV=1) was entered under Enter the slave mode command in the normal opposition control (servo mode, orientation,etc.). eration mode. The position control command (servo mode, orienta- Enter the position control command in the normal tion,etc.) was entered in the slave operation mode operation mode. (SLV=1). A slave mode command was entered when the slave Enable the slave mode. mode is disabled. To perform continuous indexing in the mode for orienting the position coder system, incremental operation(INCMD=1) was first performed, then the absolute position command (INCMD=0) was entered. Check the control input signal (INCMD). To execute the absolute position command continuously, be sure to perform orientation with the absolute position command first.
Er19
Er20 Er21 Er22
Er23 Er24
Contact sig- Between ESP1 and ESP2 of spindle control printed cir- Contact is open : emergency stop nal of *ESP cuit board Contact is closed : general operation
Alarms (Serial spindle)

Alarm No. A display AL01 SPN_n_ : MOTOR OVERHEAT SPN_n_ : EX SPEED ERROR SPN_n_ : FUSE ON DC LINK BLOWN SPN_n_ : INPUT FUSE/ POWER FAULT SPN_n_ : POWER SUPPLY FUSE BLOWN SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED Message Meaning Program ROM abnormality (not installed) Motor overheat Excessive speed deviation DC link section fuse blown Input fuse blown. Input power open phase. Control power supply fuse blown Excessive speed Description Detects that control program is not Install started (due to program ROM not ROM installed, etc.) Remedy normal program
Detects motor speed exceeding Check load status. specified speed excessively. Cool motor then reset alarm. Detects motor speed exceeding Check load status. specified speed excessively. Reset alarm. Detects that fuse F4 in DC link sec- Check power transistors, tion is blown (models 30S and 40S). and so forth. Replace fuse. Detects blown fuse (F1 to F3), open Replace fuse. phase or momentary failure of power Check open phase and (models 30S and 40S). power supply regenerative circuit operation. Detects that control power supply Check for control power fuse AF2 or AF3 is blown (models supply short circuit . 30S and 40S). Replace fuse. Detects that motor rotation has ex- Reset alarm. ceeded 115% of its rated speed.
AL02
AL03
AL04
AL05
AL07
AL08
SPN_n_ : HIGH VOLT INPUT POWER SPN_n_ : OVERHEAT MAIN CIRCUIT SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT INPUT POWER
High input volt- Detects that switch is flipped to 200 Flip switch to 230 VAC. age VAC when input voltage is 230 VAC or higher (models 30S and 40S). Excessive load on main circuit section Low input voltage Detects abnormal temperature rise Cool radiator then reset of power transistor radiator. alarm. Detects drop in input power supply Remove cause, then reset voltage. alarm.
AL09
AL10
362
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Alarm No. AL11
Message SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT POW CIRCUIT SPN_n_ : OVERCURRE NT POW CIRCUIT SPN_n_ : DATA MEMORY FAULT CPU SPN_n_ : SP SWITCH CONTROL ALARM SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT
Meaning Overvoltage in DC link section Overcurrent in DC link section CPU internal data memory abnormality Spindle switch/output switch alarm RAM abnormality Program ROM sum check error Excessive U phase current detection circuit offset Excessive V phase current detection circuit offset Serial transfer data error Serial data transfer stopped Disconnection of speed detection signal for Cs contouring control Position coder signal disconnection Disconnection of position detection signal for Cs contouring control Shorttime overload
Description
Remedy
Detects abnormally high direct cur- Remove cause, then reset rent power supply voltage in power alarm. circuit section. Detects flow of abnormally large cur- Remove cause, then reset rent in direct current section of power alarm. cirtcuit Detects abnormality in CPU internal Remove cause, then reset data memory. This check is made alarm. only when power is turned on. Detects incorrect switch sequence in Check sequence. spindle switch/output switch operation. Detects abnormality in RAM for ex- Remove cause, then reset ternal data. This check is made only alarm. when power is turned on. Detects program ROM data er- Remove cause, then reset ror.This check is made only when alarm. power is turned on. Detects excessive U phase current Remove cause, then reset detection ciucuit offset. alarm. This check is made only when power is turned on. Detects excessive V phase current Remove cause, then reset detection circuit offset. alarm. This check is made only when power is turned on. Detects serial transfer data error Remove cause, then reset (such as NC power supply turned off, alarm. etc.) Detects that serial data transfer has Remove cause, then reset stopped. alarm. Detects abnormality in position cod- Remove cause, then reset er signal(such as unconnected cable alarm. and parameter setting error).
AL12
AL13
AL15
AL16
AL18
SPN_n_ : SUMCHECK ERROR PGM DATA SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET CURRENT U
AL19
AL20
SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET CURRENT V
AL24
SPN_n_ : SERIAL TRANSFER ERROR SPN_n_ : SERIAL TRANSFER STOP SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT CVELO DETECT
AL25
AL26
AL27
SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT POSCODER SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT CPOS DETECT
Detects abnormality in position cod- Remove cause, then reset er signal (such as unconnected alarm. cable and adjustment error). Detects abnormality in position Remove cause, then reset detection signal for Cs contouring alarm. control (such as unconnected cable and adjustment error). Detects that overload has been con- Remove cause, then reset tinuously applied for some period of alarm. time (such as restraining motor shaft in positioning). Detects overcurrent flowing in input Remove cause, then reset circuit. alarm. Detects that motor cannot rotate at Remove cause, then reset specified speed or it is detected that alarm. the motor is clamped. (but rotates at very slow speed or has stopped). (This includes checking of speed detection signal cable.)
AL28
AL29
SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME OVERLOAD
AL30
SPN_n_ : OVERCURRE NT POW CIRCUIT
Input circuit overcurrent
AL31
SPN_n_ : MOTOR LOCK Speed detecOR VSIG LOS tion signal disconnection motor restraint alarm or motor is clamped.
363
A. ALARM LIST
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
Alarm No. AL32
Message SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT SERIAL LSI
Meaning Abnormality in RAM inside the LSI used for serial data transfer. This check is made only when power is turned on. Insufficient DC link section charging
Description
Remedy
Detects abnormality in RAM inside Remove cause, then reset the LSI used for serial data transfer. alarm. This check is made only when power is turned on.
AL33
SPN_n_ : SHORTAGE POWER CHARGE
Detects insufficient charging of direct Remove cause, then reset current power supply voltage in pow- alarm. er circuit section when magnetic contactor in amplifier is turned on (such as open phase and defectifve charging resistor). Detects parameter data set beyond Set correct data. allowable range of values.
AL34
SPN_n_ : PARAMETER SETTING ERROR
Parameter data setting beyond allowable range of values Excessive gear ratio data setting Error counter overflow Speed detector parameter setting error Alarm for indicating failure in detecting 1rotation signal for Cs contouring control Alarm for indicating 1rotation signal for Cs contouring control not detected Alarm for indicating failure in detecting position coder 1rotaion signal. Alarm for indicating position coder 1rotation signal not detected Alarm for indicating disconnection of position coder signal for differential speed mode
AL35
SPN_n_ : EX SETTING GEAR RATIO SPN_n_ : OVERFLOW ERROR COUNTER SPN_n_ : SPEED DETECT PAR. ERROR SPN_n_ : 1ROT Cs SIGNAL ERROR
Detects gear ratio data set beyond Set correct data. allowable range of values. Detects error counter overflow. Correct cause, then reset alarm.
AL36
AL37
Detects incorrect setting of parame- Set correct data. ter for number of speed detection pulses. Detects 1rotaion signal detection Make 1rotaion signal adfailure in Cs contouring contorl. justment. Check cable shield status.
AL39
AL40
SPN_n_ : NO 1ROT Cs SIGNAL DETECT
Detects that 1rotation signal has Make 1rotaion signal adnot occurred in Cs contouring con- justment. trol.
AL41
SPN_n_ : 1ROT POSCODER ERROR
Detects failure in detecting position Make signal adjustment for coder 1rotation signal. signal conversion circuit. Check cable shield status.
AL42
SPN_n_ : NO 1ROT. POSCODER DETECT
Detects that position coder 1rota- Make 1rotation signal adtion signal has not issued. justment for signal conversion circuit.
AL43
SPN_n_ : DISCON. PC FOR DIF. SP. MOD.
Detects that main spindle position coder signal used for differential speed mode is not connected yet (or is disconnected).
Check that main spindle position coder signal is connected to connector CN12.
AL44
SPN_n_ : CONTROL CIRCUIT(AD) ERROR
364
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
Alarm No. AL46
Message SPN_n_ : SCREW 1ROT POSCOD. ALARM
Meaning Alarm for indicating failure in detecting position coder 1rotation signal in thread cutting operation. Position coder signal abnormality The converted differential speed is too high.
Description
Remedy
Detects failure in detecting position Make 1rotation signal adcoder 1rotation signasl in thread justment for signal convercutting operation. sion circuit. Check cable shield status.
AL47
SPN_n_ : POSCODER SIGNAL ABNORMAL SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. DIF. SPEED
Detects incorrect position coder sig- Make signal adjustment for nal count operation. signal conversion circuit. Check cable shield status. Detects that speed of other spindle converted to speed of local spindle has exceeded allowable limit in differential mode. Calculate differential speed by multiplying speed of other spindle by gear ratio. Check if calculated value is not greater than maximum speed of motor. Calculate motor speed by multiplying specified spindle speed by gear ratio. Check if calculated value is not greater than maximum speed of motor.
AL49
AL50
SPN_n_ : SPNDL CONTROL OVERSPEED
Excessive speed command calculation value in spindle synchronization control Undervoltage at DC link section
Detects that speed command calculation value exceeded allowable range in spindle synchronization control.
AL51
SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT DC LINK
Detects that DC power supply volt- Remove cause, then reset age of power circuit has dropped alarm. (due to momentary power failure or loose contact of magnetic contactor). Detects abnormality in synchroniza- Replace servo amp. PCB. tion signal (ITP signal ) used in software. Detects abnormality in synchroniza- Replace servo amp. PCB. tion signal (ITP signal) used in hardware. The cooling fan in the control circuit Check the turning state of section stopped. the cooling fan. Replace the cooling fan. Abnormal current flowed through the Check the selection of the regenerative resistor. regenerative resistor. Alternatively, check whether the cooling fan motor is rotating. The temperature of the radiator of the Eliminate the cause, then main circuit has increased abnor- reset the alarm. mally. (Cooling fan failure, dirt in the cooling fan, overload operation, etc.)
AL52
SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL ABNORMAL I SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL ABNORMAL II SPN_n_ : INNER COOLING FAN STOP SPN_n_ : EX DECELERATION POWER
ITP signal abnormality I ITP signal abnormality II The cooling fan in the unit stopped. Deceleration power is too high.
AL53
AL56
AL57
AL58
SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD IN PSM
Overload on the PSM main circuit
AL59
SPN_n_ : COOLING FAN STOP IN PSM
The PSM cool- The cooling fan of the control circuit Check the turning state of ing fan section stopped. the cooling fan. Replace stopped. the cooling fan.
365
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
B
Fan motor Fan motor
LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
Name
For 2slot case (2.4W) For 1slot case (2.4W)
Specification
A90L00010378 A90L00010385#A A90L00010423#105 A98L00310006 A98L00010902 A98L00310017 A02B0200K102 A60L00010046#7.5R
Remarks
One fan motor per two slots Two fan motors per three slots For intelligent terminal type 2 For CNC memory For series absolute pulse coder For intelligent terminal type 2 For new MMCIV or intelligent terminal type 2 For control unit power supply 7.5A Intelligent terminal type or intelligent terminal type 2 For new MMCIV
Battery for Backup Back up
Power supply fuse Back light for 7.2 monochrome LCD Back light for intelligent terminal type 2 LCD
A13B0172K020 A02B0207K100 A61L00010142#BL A61L00010163#BL A98L00010985#A A98L00010985#S A98L00010986#A A98L00010986#S A98L00050052#A A98L00050052#B
For T series small MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0210C041#TA, C120#TA) For T series small MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0210C041#TAS, C120#TAS) For T series fullsize MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0210C122#TA For T series fullsize MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0210C122#TAS For T series fullsize MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0218C120#TR, C121#TR) For T series fullsize MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0218C120#TS, C121#TS) For M series small MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0210C041#MA, C120#MA) For M series small MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0210C041#MAS, C120#MAS) For M series fullsize MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0210C122#MA For M series fullsize MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0210C122#MAS For M series fullsize MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0218C120#MR, C121#MR) For M series fullsize MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0218C120#MS, C121#MS) For T/M series small CRT/MDI For T/M series small separate MDI For T/M series fullsize MDI (Specification : A02B0210C122#j) For T/M series fullsize MDI (Specification : A02B0218C120#j, C121#j)
Keysheet (sheet type)
A98L00050019#A A98L00050019#S A98L00050003#A A98L00050003#S A98L00050052#C A98L00050052#D A86L00010235 A86L00010216 A86L00010217 A86L00010242
Keyboard (sheet type)
366
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
Name
Specification
A86L00010173#HT2R A86L00010173#HT2S A86L00010175#VT2R A86L00010175#VT2S A86L00010174#HT2R A86L00010174#HT2S A86L00010175#VT2R A86L00010175#VT2S
Remarks
For T series horizontal type 9.5 color TFT/MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0200C065#TBR) For T series horizontal type 9.5 color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0200C065#TBS) For T series vertical type 9.5 color TFT/MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0200C066#TBR) For T series vertical type 9.5 color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0200C066#TBS) For T series horizontal type 14 color CRT/MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0200C071#TBR) For T series horizontal type 14 color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0200C071#TBS) For T series vertical type 14 color CRT/MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0200C072#TBR) For T series vertical type 14 color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0200C072#TBS) For M series horizontal type 9.5 color TFT/MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0200C065#MBR) For M series horizontal type 9.5 color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0200C065#MBS) For M series vertical type 9.5 color TFT/MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0200C066#MBR) For M series vertical type 9.5 color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0200C066#MBS) For M series horizontal type 14 color CRT/MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0200C071#MBR) For M series horizontal type 14 color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0200C071#MBS) For M series vertical type 14 color CRT/MDI (English key) (Specification : A02B0200C072#MBR) For M series vertical type 14 color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key) (Specification : A02B0200C072#MBS)
Keyboard (membrane)
A86L00010173#HM2R A86L00010173#HM2S A86L00010175#VM2R A86L00010175#VM2S A86L00010174#HM2R A86L00010174#HM2S A86L00010175#VM2R A86L00010175#VM2S
367
C. BOOT SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
BOOT SYSTEM
C.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 C.2 STARTING AND EXITING FROM THE SYSTEM MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 C.3 SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 C.4 ERROR MESSAGES AND CORRESPONDING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS . . . . . . 382
368
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
C. BOOT SYSTEM
C.1
OVERVIEW
The boot system load the CNC system software (flash ROMDRAM), then starts it so that software can be executed. The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the CNC: (1) Registering a file in flash ROM S Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM. (2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM (3) Deleting a file from flash ROM (4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card (5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card (6) Formatting of a memory card (7) Deleting a file from a memory card This appendix describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the screen displays and operation for the functions listed above. NOTE This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an input/output device. When a flash card is used, however, data can be written to a FANUCrecommended card only. Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced by 128KB. See the order list for details of the supported memory card types.
369
C. BOOT SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
C.2
STARTING AND EXITING FROM THE SYSTEM MONITOR C.2.1
Starting the System Monitor
Start the system monitor as follows: (1) Turn on the power of the CNC while holding down the rightmost two soft keys on the CRT/ MDI panel (the shaded keys in the figure below). When the system monitor is started, the main menu, shown below, appears. Keep the soft keys held down until this main menu appears.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 1.SYSTEM DATA LOADING 2.SYSTEM DATA CHECK 3.SYSTEM DATA DELETE 4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE 5.SRAM DATA BACKUP 6.MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 7.MEMORY CARD FORMAT 9.END *** MESSAGE *** SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [SELECT] [ Turn on the power while holding down these two soft keys. YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ] 01
FANUC Series 21
CRT
<Main menu>
(2) To execute a function, position the cursor to the corresponding item on the menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. The table below lists each menu item and the corresponding function.
Item
1 2 3 4 5 SYSTEM DATA LOADING SYSTEM DATA CHECK SYSTEM DATA DELETE SYSTEM DATA SAVE SRAM DATA BACKUP
Function
Loading a file from a memory card into flash memory Listing the names of the files stored in flash memory Deleting a file from flash memory Outputting a file, stored in flash memory, to a memory card Backing up all data in SRAM (such as parameters and programs) to a memory card as a single backup file, or restoring the backupfile, stored in the memory card, to SRAM
See Section
C.3.1 C.3.2 C.3.3 C.3.4 C.3.5
6 7 8
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Deleting a file from a memory card MEMORY CARD FORMAT END Initializing a memory card to comply with MSDOS format Exiting from the system monitor and activating the CNC
C.3.6 C.3.7 C.2.2
(3) Refer to the section listed in the table for details of each function.
370
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
C. BOOT SYSTEM
C.2.2
Exiting from the System Monitor (Activating the CNC)
Exit from the system monitor and activate the CNC, as follows: (1) Position the cursor to 9. END on the main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 1.SYSTEM DATA LOADING 2.SYSTEM DATA CHECK 3.SYSTEM DATA DELETE 4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE 5.SRAM DATA BACKUP 6.MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 7.MEMORY CARD FORMAT 9.END *** MESSAGE *** SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ] 01
(2) The system monitor displays message ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO. If your selection is as you intended, press the [YES] soft key. Pressing the [NO] soft key returns the processing to step (1).
*** MESSAGE *** ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
When the [YES] soft key is pressed, the system software for the CNC is invoked to activate the CNC, in the same way as at ordinary poweron.
371
C. BOOT SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
C.3
SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTIONS C.3.1
Loading a File from a Memory Card into Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen)
<Function> A file such as a PMC sequence (ladder) program or PCODE macro program can be loaded from a memory card into flash memory. <Procedure> (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen. Position the cursor to 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING on the main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. The SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen appears, listing the names of all the files stored in the memory card.
Page number/ total number of pages
SYSTEM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY MACRO31. MEM MACRO12. MEM MACRO13. MEM MACRO14. MEM LADDER. MEM END
1/1
Lists the names of the files in the memory card.
*** MESSAGE *** SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
To display the preceding page
To display the next page
(2) Select the file to be loaded. Position the cursor to the name of the file to be loaded by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. NOTE 1 Up to eight file names can be displayed on a single screen. If the memory card contains nine or more files, the files are listed using two or more screens. Pressing the rightmost soft key displays the next screen. Pressing the leftmost soft key displays the previous screen. In such a case, menu item END is displayed for the last screen. 2 To return to the main menu, position the cursor to END then press the [SELECT] soft key.
372
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
C. BOOT SYSTEM
(3) The following message appears:

*** MESSAGE *** LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
To load the file, press the [YES] soft key. Pressing the [NO] soft key cancels loading and returns the processing to step (2). Pressing the [YES] soft key starts loading of the file from the memory card into flash memory.
*** MESSAGE *** LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD. READ DATA FROM MEMORY CARD. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][
UP
][
DOWN
*** MESSAGE *** LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD. FROM PROGRAM [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(4) When loading has been completed normally, the following message appears. Pressing the [SELECT] soft key returns the screen shown in step (2).
*** MESSAGE *** LOADING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
NOTE 3 If an error occurs during loading, an error message is displayed. See Section C.4, Error messages and corresponding corrective actions for details. (5) To load another file, repeat steps (2) to (4). Once all the necessary files have been loaded, position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu. *2 File names in flash memory Files loaded into flash memory are automatically named, depending on the file type, as follows:
File name PMCRA PCD xxxx File type PMC sequence program (ladder) PCODE macro program xxxx varies with the file size (specified with compile parameter No. 9000).
373
C. BOOT SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
C.3.2
Listing the Names of the Files Stored in Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen)
<Function> The names of the files stored in flash memory can be listed on the screen. <Procedure> (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen. Position the cursor to 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK on the main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. The SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen appears, listing the names of all the files in flash memory.
SYSTEM DATA CHECK FILE DIRECTORY ( FLASH ROM : 256KB) 1 PMCRA ( 1) 2 PCD 128K ( 1) END
Lists the names of all the files stored in flash memory. The size of of each file is indicated in parentheses after the file name (in units of 128K bytes).
*** MESSAGE *** SELECT END AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(2) Position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu. NOTE The 21MB and 21TB (control unit B) holds the software for controlling the CNC and servo system as well as user files such as a PMC sequence program and PCODE macro program, in flash memory. These files are called system files. The following, indicated in the file name list of the flash memory, are system files: NC BASIC, NC1 OPTN, DG SERVO, PMCOBAS, OPTLANG, LR BASIC, and PMCBBAS. The system file is protected and cannot be deleted. The protection prevents the operator from deleting the file by mistake. The system file cannot be saved to a memory card.
374
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
C. BOOT SYSTEM
C.3.3
Deleting a File from Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen)
<Function> A file can be deleted from flash memory. <Procedure> (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen. Position the cursor to 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE on the main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. The SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen appears, listing the names of all the files stored in flash memory.
SYSTEM DATA DELETE FILE DIRECTORY 1 PMCRA ( 1) 2 PCD 128K ( 1) END
Lists the names of all the files in flash memory.
(2) Select the file to be deleted. Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. (3) The following message appears:
*** MESSAGE *** DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
To delete the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the deletion, press the [NO] soft key. (4) Pressing the [YES] soft key starts deletion of the file. The message DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY is displayed as the file is being deleted. When deletion has been completed normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE *** DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(5) Press the [SELECT] soft key. To delete another file, repeat steps (2) to (5). (6) Position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
375
C. BOOT SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
C.3.4
Outputting a File, Stored in Flash Memory, to a Memory Card (SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen)
<Function> A file stored in flash memory can be output to a memory card. <Procedure> (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen. Position the cursor to 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE on the main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. The SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen appears, listing the names of the files stored in flash memory.
SYSTEM DATA SAVE FILE DIRECTORY 1 PMC RA ( 1) 2 PCD 128K ( 1) END
Lists the names of all the files stored in flash memory.
(2) Select the file to be output. Position the cursor to the name of the file to be output by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. (3) The following message appears. To output the file, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel output, press the [NO] soft key.
*** MESSAGE *** SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
Pressing the [YES] soft key starts output of the file. The following message is displayed during output. The name of the file (*3) being output to the memory card is displayed under the message.
*** MESSAGE *** WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA. 000 [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN
NOTE To output a PCODE macro program for which a password has been specified, you must enter that password. In such a case, INPUT PASSWORD is displayed. Enter the password using soft keys [1] to [5].
376
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
C. BOOT SYSTEM
*** MESSAGE *** INPUT PASSWORD. ????? [ 1 ][ 2 ][ 3 ][ 4 ][ 5 ]
(4) When output has been completed normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE *** FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA. 000 [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN
(5) Press the [SELECT] key to return to the screen shown in step (2). (6) To output another file, repeat steps (2) to (5). Once you have output all the necessary files, position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu. *3 Names of files stored on a memory card Files output to a memory card are automatically named according to their file type, as follows:
Name of a file stored in flash memory PMC sequence program PCODE macro program PMCRA PCD 128K PCD 256K PCD 05M PCD 10M Name of a file stored on a memory card PMCRA.XXX PCD_128K.XXX PCD_256K.XXX PCD_05M.XXX PCD_10M.XXX
XXX indicates a file name extension, automatically selected from 000 to 031. For example, when file PMCRA is output to a memory card, it becomes PMCRA.000 on the memory card, provided the memory card does not already contain a file named PMCRA.*. If the memory card already contains a file named PMCRA. 000, the output file is named PMCRA.001. In the same way, each output file is named by incrementing the extension by one, relative to the largest existing extension of the files stored on the memory card. If any smaller extension is not current being used, however, as may occur when a file is deleted for example, the output file is assigned that extension. The displayed file names should be carefully checked when several files, having the same names but different extensions, are output to a single memory card.
377
C. BOOT SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
C.3.5
Backing up SRAM Data to a Memory Card and Subsequently Restoring Data from a Memory Card (SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen)
<Function> All data in SRAM (such as parameters and programs, which are retained even when power is not applied to the CNC), can be backed up to a memory card as a single backup file. Data can be restored from the backup file to SRAM. <Procedure> (1) Display the SRAM DATA BACKUP screen. Position the cursor to 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP on the main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. The following screen appears:
SRAM DATA BACKUP 1. SRAM BACKUP ( CNC > MEMORY CARD ) 2. RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD > CNC ) END SRAM SIZE : 512KB ( BASIC + OPTION ) FILE NAME :
*** MESSAGE *** SELECT MENU AND HIT [SELECT] KEY [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(2)1 When backing up SRAM data to a memory card 1) Position the cursor to 1. SRAM BACKUP then press the [SELECT] soft key. 2) The following message appears. Pressing the [YES] soft key starts backup.
*** MESSAGE *** BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
The following message is displayed during backup. The name of the backup file (*4) being created on the memory card is displayed in the FILE NAME field.
SRAM SIZE : 512KB ( BASIC + OPTION ) FILE NAME : SRAM512K. 000 *** MESSAGE *** SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
Name of the backup file
378
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
C. BOOT SYSTEM
3) When backup has been completed normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE *** SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(2)2 When restoring SRAM data from the backup file 1) Position the cursor to 2. RESTORE SRAM, then press the [SELECT] soft key. 2) Select the file from which data is to be restored by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] or [YES] soft key.
*** MESSAGE *** SELECT RESTORE FILE OR UP, DOWN KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
3) The following message appears. Pressing the [YES] soft key starts restoration.
*** MESSAGE *** RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
The following message is displayed during data restoration.

*** MESSAGE *** RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
When restoration has been completed normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE *** RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(3) Press the [SELECT] key to return to the main menu. *4 Name of the backup file The backup file is automatically named depending on the SRAM capacity of the CNC.
File name SRAM256K.XXX SRAM512K.XXX SRAM capacity 256K bytes 512K bytes
XXX indicates a file name extension, automatically selected from 000 to 031, in the same way as when a file in flash memory is output to a memory card (see Subsec.C.3.4). NOTE If data such as parameters was restored from a memory card to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder, set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No.1815 to 0, and set the reference point again.
379
C. BOOT SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
C.3.6
Deleting a File from a Memory Card (MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen)
<Function> A file can be deleted from a memory card. <Procedure> (1) Display the MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen. Position the cursor to 6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE on the main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. The MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen appears, listing the names of the files stored on the memory card.
1/1
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE FILE DIRECTORY MACRO01. MEM MACRO01. MEM LADDER. MEM END
Lists the names of the files stored on the memory card.
NOTE If the memory card contains nine or more files, the files are listed over two or more screens. Pressing the rightmost or leftmost soft key displays the subsequent or previous screen, respectively. (2) Select the file to be deleted. Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted, by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. (3) The following message appears:
*** MESSAGE *** DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
To delete the file, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel deletion, press the [NO] soft key. (4) Pressing the [YES] soft key starts deletion of the file. When deletion has been completed normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE *** DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
380
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
C. BOOT SYSTEM
(5) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the screen shown in step (2). (6) To delete another file, repeat steps (2) to (5) . Once all deletion has been completed, position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
C.3.7
Formatting a Memory Card
<Function> A memory card can be initialized to conform to MSDOS format. Memory cards require formatting before they can be used. SRAM memory cards also require reformatting when they have lost their data due to failure of their battery. <Procedure> (1) Position the cursor to 7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT on the main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key. (2) The following message appears. To format the memory card, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel formatting, press the [NO] soft key.
*** MESSAGE *** MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
Pressing the [YES] soft key starts formatting. The following message is displayed during formatting:
*** MESSAGE *** FORMATTING MEMORY CARD. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
When formatting has been completed normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE *** FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
381
C. BOOT SYSTEM
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
C.4
ERROR MESSAGES AND CORRESPONDING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Error message D DELETE ERROR
This section describes the error messages which may be displayed when the system monitor function is used.
Description Deletion a file from flash memory has failed. If subsequent retry of deletion also fails, the flash memory may be damaged. In such a case, replace the FROM module. Write to flash memory has failed. Turn off the power and retry. If write still fails, the flash memory may be damaged. In such a case, replace the FROM module. Writing of a file to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is normal (Note 1). The available flash memory is insufficient to enable writing of the selected file. Replace the FROM module with another having greater available capacity. Formatting of the memory card has failed. The memory card type is invalid. (Only SRAM memory cards can be formatted. Flash memory cards cannot be formatted. ) The selected file is of an unsupported format. The entered password is incorrect. Enter the correct password. An error occurred during loading of a file to flash memory. Do not touch the memory card while loading a file. The maximum file name extension (031) has been reached. Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. The memory cardG s battery has failed. Replace the battery. The memory card is full. Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Access to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is normal (Note 1). No memory card is inserted into the slot. Alternatively, the mounted memory card has not been pushed fully home. Write to the memory card has been specified but the write protect switch is set. Disable the write protect switch. Access to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is normal (Note 1). Writing of a file to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is normal (Note 1). Writing of backup data to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is normal (Note 1). Restoring of backup data to SRAM has failed. Determine whether the backup data has been corrupted by, for example, checking the file size. No backup file for the 256KB SRAM is found. A backup file is necessary to restore the contents of SRAM. No backup file for the 512KB SRAM is found. A backup file is necessary to restore the contents of SRAM.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x)
FILE SAVE ERROR. FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE
FORMAT ERROR.
I L M
ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE INCORRECT PASSWORD LOADING ERROR. MAX EXTENSION OVER. MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. MEMORY CARD FULL. MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. MEMORY CARD PROTECTED. MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR.
SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. SRAM DATA RESTORE ERROR. SRAM256K. * NOT FOUND. SRAM512K. * NOT FOUND.
382
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
C. BOOT SYSTEM
NOTE 1 Check that the memory card is correctly inserted into its slot. Check that the memory card is compatible with the system monitor function and that it has been normally formatted. Check whether the battery in the memory card has failed or whether any electrical damage has been caused to the card. 2 When an SRAM parity error is detected in SRAM backup during booting All CNCs are delivered with no parity errors after the SRAM areas are factorycleared. A parity error may occur in the SRAM area, however, if the CNC is subjected to physical shock in transit or if the backup battery is exhausted if the CNC is left unused for one year or longer. The data retained in the SRAM area in which a parity error is detected may be adversely affected. The CNC, however, may not use the whole SRAM area. The CNC does not detect a parity error before it accesses the corresponding area. The CNC may operate normally if a parity error occurs in an area which the CNC does not access. The boot SRAM backup function, however, reads the entire SRAM area. The function may detect a parity error during backup while the CNC is operating normally. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of the CNC is adversely affected, and the boot SRAM backup function cannot backup the data. Meanwhile, the CNC may still be operating normally. The recommended procedure involves backing up the necessary data, using a Floppy Cassette or Handy File, clearing all the data, and restoring the backup data to the CNC. Once all the data has been cleared, the parity error is eliminated. Then, the boot SRAM backup function can be used.
383
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATORS D. MANUAL
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
MEMORY CARD OPERATORS MANUAL
D.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 D.2 DISTINCTION OF SUPPORTED CARD AND UNSUPPORTED CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 D.3 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 D.4 OPERATING OF MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 D.5 BATTERY CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
384
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATORS MANUAL
D.1
OUTLINE
It is possible to backup the mocro file and ladder program in the flash memory module of CNC, and the SRAM area in the CNC to the flash memory card by using this function. This functions is available in the following software series/edition D In case of Series 21/210MB (DDA1 series) and Series 21/210TB (Control unit B) (DEA1 series) Boot function software (60M2/03 edition or later)is required. D In case of Series 21TB (Control unit A) (DE01 or DE02 series) System software includes Boot function software. System software (DE01/08 edition or later) D In case of Series 21MB (D201 series) Boot function software (60M0/09 edition or later) is required. The restrictions of this function are explained at the following.
385
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
D.2
DISTINCTION OF SUPPORTED CARD AND UNSUPPORTED CARD
At present, the writing method of chip (flash memory) wich is built in flash memory card is different. The method is depends on the maker and the product. Therefore, it is difficult to correspond to all flash memory card. The following kinds of flash memory card which Intel made are supported at this time. D Intel Series 2 flash memory cards (or compatible cards.) It is impossible to write the flash memory card, in which the flash memories expect Intel are used for a builtin chip, by BOOT SYSTEM. It is possible to read unsupported flash memory card which is formatted/written with personal computer by BOOT SYSTEM.
386
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
D.3
RESTRICTIONS D.3.1
Standard of Memory Card
Any kind of card has to be conformed to TYPE 1 to 2 of PCMCIA (The Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) 2.0 (or later) or TYPE 1 to 2 of JEIDA (Japanese Electronics Development Association) 4.0 (or later.) Memory Card Specification In all the Memory Cards conformed to PC CARD STANDARD, if the Memory Card supports Vcc (Power supply voltage) values of 3.3V, you can not use it for these CNCs. D Memory Card supports 3.3V ! The Memory Card doesnt physically fit into the socket on the CNC. D Memory Card supports both 3.3V and 5V. (Automatic voltage sense type) ! The Memory Card fits into the socket physically. But it is not sllowed the insertion with the socket electrically. If such a card is inserted and then powerup, the Memory Card or CNC may take electrical damage. Dont use this type Memory Card for these CNCs.
D.3.2
Kind of Memory Card
NAME JEIDA V4.1 SRAM memory card ca d JEIDA V4.1 Flash memory card CAPACITY 256KB 512KB 1MB 2MB 4MB SPECIFICATION NUMBER A87L00010150#256K A87L00010150#512K A87L00010150#1M A87L00010150#2M A87L00010153#4M
NOTE Then abovementioned capacity is the number before formatting. After formatting, the capacity decreases a little. Therefore, it is necessary to prepare the memory card with bigger capacity than the size of the data or the program. [Example] The memory card of 1MB or more is need for storing 512KB data.
SRAM Card Reading a file Formatting a card Writing a file f f f Flash memory card Supported card f f f Unsupported card f
387
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
SRAM Card Deleting a file Listing files f f
Flash memory card Supported card f Unsupported card f
D.3.3
Method of Format of Memory Card
In BOOT SYSTEM, the memory card is formatted by the method of the FAT file system. Additionally, there is a format method of the flash file system. There is no compatibility between FAT file system and the flash file system, so they can not use the function of Read and List each other.
D.3.4
File Operation in Flash Memory Card
It is impossible to delete of each file individually. It is necessary to delete the file in the entire memory card. For that, the following file operations are impossible. D To delete the file which has already exist. D To change the file name. D To write again with the same name. When the flash memory card is written in BOOT SYSTEM, last 128KB of the flash memory card will be used as a buffer area. Therefore, the capacity of the flash memory card decreases 128KB.
D.3.5
The Capacity of Flash Memory Card
D.3.6
Notice when Flash Memory Card is Formatted with CardPro
CardPro formats the flash memory card with the flash file system in a default setting.When you format the flash memory card with CardPro, please format by following command.
A:CPFORMAT drive:/F:FLASHFAT/NOCIS
D.3.7
When Flash Memory Card Formatted with BOOT SYSTEM is Used with Each Company Device
RAMUZOU Reading a file Adding a file Listing files f Not supported function f CardPro f f
D.3.8
When Flash Memory Card Formatted with Each Company Device is Used with BOOT SYSTEM
RAMUZOU Reading a file Adding a file Listing files f f f CardPro f f
NOTE 1 RamuZou is a memory card reader/writer that is made by ADTEK SYSTEM SCIENCE in Japan. 2 CardPro is a memory card reader/writer that is made by Data I/O.
388
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
D.3.9
Names and Function of Memory Components
WRITE PROTECT SWITCH
BATTERY CASE
Name 1 Write Protect Switch
Function The memory card can be protected from writing data into the memory card by setting of the write protect switch.
Non Write Protect Write protect
Battery Case
Incase of the SRAM memory card, the battery case includes the battery for data backup. The flash memory card has no battery case.
389
APPENDIX
B62705EN/03
D.4
OPERATING OF MEMORY CARD D.4.1
Connection of Memory Card
(1) Insert the memory card in the direction shown in the figure through the memory card insertion slot. (2) The memory card cannot be inserted with wrong side, because the memory card has insertion guides. Take care the direction of the memory card.
D.4.2
Disconnection of Memory Card
Pull the memory card out in the direction shown in the figure.
390
B62705EN/03
APPENDIX
D.5
BATTERY CHANGE D.5.1
Battery
CR2325 or equivalent battery can be used for the SRAM memory card.
D.5.2
Battery Life
The battery life is as follows. But the battery life in the table is only reference data, because the battery life is changeable by the change of ambient temperature.
Drawing Number A87L00010150#512K A87L00010150#1M A87L00010150#2M Parts Number MB98A9092320 MB98A9102320 MB98A9112320 Battery Life about 6 months about 1 year about 6 months
D.5.3
Procedure of Battery Change
(1) Pull the battery case out with pushing projection.
(2) Change the battery. + mark of the battery must be set to + mark of the battery case.
BATTERY CASE
(3) Put the battery case back in the memory card, and make sere read/write operation.
391
B62705EN/03
Index
[A]
Alarm 970 (NMI Alarm in PMC Control Module), 331 Alarm 971 (NMI Alarm in SLC), 332 Alarm 972 (NMI Alarm in Other Board), 333 Alarm 973 (NMI Alarm by Unknown Cause), 334 Alarm Display, 27 Alarm History Screen, 27 Alarm List, 337 Alram 411 (Execessive Position Error During Move), 313 Alram 416 (Disconnection Alarm), 316 Associated Parameters, 256 Automatic Operation Cannot be Done, 284 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters, 267
A02B0207C020, A02B0207C021, A02B0207C022, 123 A16B22030180, 129 AC Spindle (Analog Interface), 268 AC Spindle (Serial Interface), 257, 258 Action Against Noise, 170 Address, 203 Address List, 204 Adjusting Reference Position (Dog Method), 253 Adjusting the Color Liquid Crystal Display and Plasma Display, 161 Adjusting the Flat Display, 161 Alarm 300 (Request for Reference Position Return), 302 Alarm 301 to 305 (Absolute Pulse Coder is Faulty), 303 Alarm 306 to 308 (Absolute Pulse Coder Battery is Low), 304 Alarm 350 (Serial Pulse Coder is Abnormal), 305 Alarm 351 (Serial Pulse Coder Communication is Abnormal), 306 Alarm 400 (Overload), 307 Alarm 401 (*Drdy Signal Turned off), 309 Alarm 404 and 405 (*Drdy Signal Turned on), 310 Alarm 410 (Excessive Position Error Amount During Stop), 312 Alarm 414 (Digital Servo System is Abnormal), 315 Alarm 417 (Digital Servo System is Abnormal), 317 Alarm 700 (Overheat at Control Side), 323 Alarm 704 (Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection Alarm), 318 Alarm 749 (Serial Spindle Communication Error), 319 Alarm 750 (Spindle Serial Link Cannot be Started), 320 Alarm 751,761 (Spindle Alarm), 322 Alarm 85 to 87 (Reader/Puncher Interface Alarm), 294 Alarm 90 (Reference Position Return is Abnormal), 300 Alarm 900 (ROM Parity Error), 324 Alarm 910 to 913 (RAM Parity), 325 Alarm 920 and 921 (Watch Dog or RAM Parity), 326 Alarm 924 (Servo Module Mounting Error), 328 Alarm 930 (CPU Error), 329 Alarm 950 (PMC System Alarm), 330 i1
[B]
Backing Up SRAM Data to a Memory Card and Subsequently Restoring Data from a Memory Card (SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen), 378 Battery, 391 Battery Change, 391 Battery Life, 391 BIOS Setup, 90, 96 BIOS Setup of Intelligent Terminals 1 and 2, 96 Bios Setup of the MMCIV, 90 Block Diagram, 268 Boot System, 368 Builtin Debug Function, 216
[C]
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 174 Calculation of S Analog Voltage and Related Parameters, 269 Clearing Alarm History, 27 CNC Status Display, 56 Configuration Display of Software, 23 Configuration of PCBs, 24 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board and LED Display, 106 Configuration Switch, 121 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output, 178 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit, 172 Connection of Memory Card, 390
Index
B62705EN/03
Contents Displayed, 46 Control Unit P.C.B., 142 Corrective Action for Failures, 273 Correspondence Between Operation Mode and Parameters on Spindle Tuning Screen, 265 Cycle Start LED Signal has Turned off, 291
[G]
General of Handware, 104 General of Interface, 201 Graphic of Wave Diagnosis Data, 61 Graphic Screen (M Series), 20 Graphic Screen (T Series), 20 Ground, 171
[D]
Data Input/Output on the All IO Screen, 186 Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis, 63 Deleting a File from a Memory Card (MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen), 380 Deleting a File from Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen), 375 Deletion of External Operator Messages Record, 28 Details of the Setup Items, 99 Digital Servo, 246 Disconnection of Memory Card, 390 Display and Operation, 1 Display Method, 24, 44, 69, 219, 260 Displaying Diagnostic Page, 46 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen, 250 Distinction of Supported Card and Unsupported Card, 386 Dogless Reference Position Setting, 255 Hardware, 103 Help Function, 44 Help Screen, 19 How to Begin the SetUp, 91 How to Begin the SetUp, 97 How to End the SetUp, 95 How to End the Setup, 102 How to Replace the Batteries, 150 How to Replace the Modules, 146 How to Replace the Monochrome Liquid Crystal Display, 162 HSSB Interface Board, 120
[H]
Handle Operation (MPG) Cannot be Done, 282
[I]
I/O Printed Circuit Board, 113 Initial Setting Servo Parameters, 247 Input and Output of Data, 175 Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files, 195 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data, 193 Inputting and Outputting Parameters, 192 Inputting and Outputting Programs, 188 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data, 39 Inputting CNC Parameters, 182 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 184 Inputting Part Programs, 185 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount, 184
[E]
Environmental Requirement, 166 Error Messages and Corresponding Corrective Actions, 382 Execution Period of PMC, 218 Exiting from the System Monitor (Activating the CNC), 371 External Operator Messages Record, 28
[F]
File Operation in Flash Memory Card, 388 For Lathe, 259 Formatting a Memory Card, 381 Function Keys and Soft Keys, 2
Inputting PMC Parameters, 183 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount, 185 Inputting/ Outputting Data, 178 Insertion, 146 Intelligent Terminal, 132 Intelligent Terminal 2, 137 i2
B62705EN/03
Index
Interface Between NC and PMC, 200 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred, 273
[N]
Names and Function of Memory Components, 389 No Display Appears at Powerup, 293 No Manual Operation Nor Automatic Operation Can be Executed, 275 Noise Suppressor, 173 Notes, 29, 43, 68, 89 Notice when Flash Memory Card is Formatted with CardPro, 388
[J]
Jog Operation Cannot be Done, 279
[K]
Keys Used for Operation on the SetUp Screen, 90, 96 Kind of Memory Card, 387
[O]
Offset/Setting Screen (M Series), 14 Offset/Setting Screen (T Series), 12 Operating Monitor, 69
[L]
LED Display, 122 List of Alarm Codes, 338 List of Alarms (PMC), 356 List of Maintenance Parts, 366 List of Operations, 71 List of Signals by Each Mode, 237 List of Unit and Printed Circuit Board, 142 Listing the Names of the Files Stored in Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen), 374 Loader Control Board, 118 Loading a File from a Memory Card into Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen), 372 Loading of Software, 21
Operating of Memory Card, 390 Operation, 255 Operation History, 30 Option 1 Board, 117 Others, 144 Outline of Spindle Control, 258, 268 Outputting a File, Stored in Flash Memory, to a Memory Card (SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen), 376 Outputting CNC Parameters, 179 Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables, 194 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 181 Outputting Part Program, 181 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount, 180 Outputting PMC Parameters, 180 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount, 181 Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type), 65
[M]
Main PCB, 106 Maintenance of Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger, 163 Memory Card Operators Manual, 384 Memory Display (M.SRCH), 228 Message Screen, 19 Method a of Gear Change for Machining Center, 259 Method B of Gear Change for Machining Center (PRM 3705#2=1), 259 Method of Format of Memory Card, 388 MMCIV PCB, 123 Module Configuration Screen, 25 Parameter, 29, 79 Parameter Input/Output, 87 Parameter Setting, 30, 250 Parameters, 70 Parts Layout, 120 PMC PRM Screen, 232 PMC Screen, 219 PMCDGN Screen, 224 PMCLAD Screen, 220 Position Screen, 3 i3
[P]
Index
B62705EN/03
Power Motion Manager, 79 Power Supply, 168 Power Supply Printed Circuit Board, 116 Procedure of Battery Change, 391 Program Screen, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10

HELP
, 19

MESSAGE
, 19

OFFSET SETTING
, 12, 14
[R]
Removing, 146 Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up, 150 Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder ( Series Servo Amplifier Module), 152 Replacing Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse Coder, 152 Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal, 155 Replacing the Battery for New MMCIV, 154 Replacing the Fan for Intelligent Terminal, 157 Replacing the Fan Motor, 156 Replacing the Fan Motor for Control Unit, 156 Replacing the Fuse for LCD, 149 Replacing the Fuses, 147 Replacing the Fuses for Intelligent Terminal 2, 148 Replacing the Fuses for New MMCIV, 147 Replacing the Fuses for Power Supply of Control Unit, 147 Replacing the LCD Backlight for Display, 158 Restrictions, 387

POS
,3

PROG
(When the soft key [BGEDT] is pressed in
all modes), 10 Soft key transition triggered by the function key

PROG
in the EDIT mode, 6

PROG
in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode, 9

PROG
in the MDI mode, 8

PROG
in the MEM mode, 4

PROG
in the TJOG or THDL mode, 9

SYSTEM
, 16
[S]
Screen Display, 27, 28, 31, 80 Screen Displayed Immediately After Power is Turned on, 21 Separating Signal Lines, 170 Servo Tuning Screen, 250 Setting Input/OutputRelated Parameters, 187 Setting Module Screen, 23 Setting Parameters, 57 Setting Parameters for Input/Output, 176 Setting the Input Signal or Output Signal to be Recorded in the Operation History, 35 Slot Status Display, 22 Soft key transition triggered by the function key
GRAPH
Soft Keys, 2 Software Configuration Screen, 25 Specification, 202 Specification of PMC, 202 Spindle Alarms (Serial Spindle), 361 Spindle Monitor Screen, 263 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen, 260 Spindle Setting Screen, 260 Spindle Tuning Screen, 261 Standard of Memory Card, 387 Starting and Exiting from the System Monitor, 370 Starting the System Monitor, 370 System Block Diagram, 121 System Configuration Screen, 24 System Monitor Functions, 372 System Monitor Screen, 21 i4
, 20
B62705EN/03
Index
System Reserve Area of Internal Relay, 217 System Screen, 16
[W]
Warning Screen Displayed When an Option is Changed, 76 Warning Screen Displayed when System Software is Replaced (System Label Check Error), 78
[T]
The Capacity of Flash Memory Card, 388 Troubleshooting, 272 Tuning S Analog Voltage (D/A Converter), 271
Wave form Diagnostic Function, 57 Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen, 58 When Flash Memory Card Formatted with BOOT SYSTEM is Used with Each Company Device, 388 When Flash Memory Card Formatted with Each Company Device is Used with BOOT SYSTEM, 388
i5
Revision Record FANUCSeries 21/210-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B62705EN)
03
Oct., 97
D Addition of Series 21TB and 210TB.
D Addition of descriptions of intelligent terminal.
D APPENDIX 1, APPENDIX 2, APPENDIX 4, are deleted.
02
Sep., 95
D Main board A1622020900 and Series 210MB are added.
D Boot system is added.
01
Jan., 95
Edition
Date
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 21 / 210 Model B

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication

PowerMotion is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION

WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO REPLACEMENT

WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO PARAMETERS

WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

Description of this manual

SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CNC STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.13 1.14 1.15

BIOS SETUP OF THE MMCIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BIOS SETUP OF INTELLIGENT TERMINALS 1 AND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIST OF UNIT AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REPLACING THE FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5

152 154 155

REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13

163 166 168 170

3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. DIGITAL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275 279 282 284 291 293

B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 C. BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ERROR MESSAGES AND CORRESPONDING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D. MEMORY CARD OPERATORS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

385 386 387

OPERATING OF MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Indicates input from the MDI panel.

Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).

Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key)(*3).

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Soft key transition triggered by the function key

Relative coordinate display

(Axis or numeral) [ORIGIN]

[ALLEXE] (Axis name) [EXEC] [EXEC] [EXEC]

Current position display

(Axis or numeral) [ORIGIN]

[ALLEXE] (Axis name) [EXEC] [EXEC] [EXEC]

Monitor screen [MONI] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] [EXEC]

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed"